Home

LogPlot TM User Manual

1. S P EE RW Logging CO e Client Deia Static Mote Edit Mote D I Fagat Gig it 1nd I il Ehi inact Pho 3 Bech a a a E E Cy l Ee Vi Jead T Foge r Cr Documents snd Settings oe Hy bureto t ZVGarGkzUErrepcx ecdet Ki Designing Your Logs D Header Footer Line This tool simply plots a line anywhere in the header or footer of the log E Header Footer Rectangle Use this tool to draw a rectangle anywhere in the header or footer of the log Header Footer Picture You may insert a picture logo etc in a raster format BMP JPG TIFF PNG PCX TGA ora Windows Metafile format WMF EMF into your log header Header Footer Pattern The Header Footer Pattern tool permits you to include a rectangular pattern block in the header or footer usually to create an index to the lithology patterns used in the log body Ei Header Footer Symbol This tool is used to insert a symbol into the log header or footer usually to create an index to the symbols included in the log body Static Text Static Text is header or footer text that does not change each time you plot a log It is frequently used to label columns list the unchanging logging company name or to serve as a label for changing text entries Edit Text It can also be used to insert automatic page numbers in the header or footer Edit Text Edit Text is header or footer text that can change based on what is listed in the data file This could include d
2. ros 1 Create LDFX Insert a check in this check box if you want the program to generate a log design for this data file You might want to do this the first few times you use the program as the generated design can be a good launching pad for creating your own designs Once you have modified the design to include the more detailed information you ll probably want then you should not opt for the automatic LDFX file 2 LogDesign filename Click on the open file button to the right of the prompt to enter a name for the new log design file ldfx to be created 3 Include Header Into As Click in the Legend button if you want to include a Curve Legend above each curve column in the output LDFX file Click in the Static Text option if you want to include a small Static Text label above each curve in the output LDFX file as shown in the image to the right Click Omit if you prefer to omit curve column headings altogether Note that you can always add change any of the design items after import is complete 4 Next review the curve information The Min and Max shown here represent the values to correspond to the left and right edges of each curve column on the log They will default to the data minimum and maximum for each curve You can accept the defaults or if you prefer to round the column extents type in preferred Min and Max column values For example you might want to change a default data range of Min 4 951 and
3. 86 Designing Your Logs If your well is not vertical you can set the Scale Bar to display true elevations downhole This is done by linking the Scale Bar to an Orientation tab in the data file which lists the downhole survey depths orientations and inclinations LogPlot data tab None unless you request display of true elevations based on downhole survey in which case the Scale Bar will link to an Orientation tab page 174 How to Insert a scale bar in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod bis Geier if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Scale Bar button Cham the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Scale Bar The pointer will change shape to a i for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the scale bar cursor where you want to position the scale bar and click the left mouse button The program will display the Scale Bar Setup dialog box It is comprised of three tabs 5 Enter the general settings on the Main tab Bar Position This determines the actual placement of the scale bar enter or change the horizontal coordinate for the vertical line of the scale bar The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen The placement of the depth elevation labels relative to the bar is
4. Specify the Output File Name and Format 1 If necessary open into the LogPlot data editor the data file DAT to be exported 2 Select the Export command from the Data Editor s File menu 3 From the pop up menu select the LAS option The first import window is used to enter a name for the file to be exported 4 LAS Filename Click on the open button Bln the right side of this prompt In the File Name prompt type in a name for the exported file with LAS as the file name extension Click the Open button to the right 5 Format Click in one of the two buttons 2 m Gs Entering your Data ASCII This is the default format and the most commonly used This option tells the program to create a standard ASCII text file with rows separated by carriage return and line feed characters This is the LAS standard Unix Mac Choose this option if you ve been requested to use this format The rows are separated by line feed characters only 6 Click on the Next button Enter the depth units for the LAS export On the second screen of the import window you ll need to establish some information about how the depths are currently entered and how they are to be exported 1 Depth Units Click in the radio button that corresponds to the depth units in which your LogPlot data is entered If it s not in feet or meters click in the Other button and type in the Units name This information is recorded in the curves header section
5. The preview file is also displayed within Log Plot when you select the LDFX file to establish as default See Program Settings page 283 for information about de activating the LDFX previews Set the Log s Page Size The size of the page that your log is compiled onto is defined within the Log Designer and it is stored in your log s design LDFX file so that you Know how much horizontal space you have for your design items Vertical dimensions of the paper won t be as much of an issue in the log design phase since it isn t until you actually compile your data into a log that the paper length will determine log pagination along the length of the well One exception to this is the need to know page length if you are designing detailed headers and footers and want to be sure to leave room for the log s body items Of course page size is intimately tied to the printer you have selected since single sheet printers with small paper will restrict you to small pages and banner capable printers will allow almost unlimited length pages 27 Designing Your Logs 1 To set the log s page size and to select the default printer click on the Page Print Setup button on the Log Designer toolbar Or you can choose the Page Print Setup command from the Designer s File menu At the top of the displayed window you will see a summary of the current printer information the printer name the paper size the printable area on that paper for tha
6. click the Page Up button or press the PgUp key 3 To jump directly to a specific page select the View Go To Page command Or click the Go To Page button E The program will prompt you Go To Page Type in or use the up or down arrow buttons to declare the page number and click OK The program will display that page If you enter a page number beyond the last page LogView will simply display the last page of the plot See also Adding Static Header Footer Text page 52 regarding automatic insertion of page numbers and total pages in your log header or footer Setting Depth Units per Page LogView contains a tool View Custom Page Length for repaginating a multi page log based on a user declared number of depth units to be plotted per page This can be used to start new log pages at regular intervals prevent mid interval page breaks etc 232 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs The current version of LogView is limited to regularly spaced page breaks You cannot define different break points for each log page This does not change the scaling of the log which is defined at compile time and cannot be changed in LogView This tool simply changes the number of units to be displayed per page at the existing scale How to Set the depth units per page 1 First take a good look at your log pages to determine the best number of depth units to be displayed on each page of your log Note that if the layout of
7. 150 175 Enter the label settings on the Labels tab in the Scale Bar Options window Font Click on this button to access font settings for the depth or elevation labels Color Click on this box to select the font color This can also be established in the Font settings above Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places to be represented in each depth or elevation label Angle Choose an angle for the labels by clicking in the appropriate radio button Position Choose where the labels are to be placed relative to the scale bar line by clicking in the appropriate radio button You should double check how you set up the tick mark position below as well Label interval is established on the Tick Marks tab Adjust vertical position at top and bottom of page If activated with a check mark LogPlot will nudge the depth elevation labels down or up slightly if they fall on a page break This prevents the label from being clipped in half Enter the tick mark settings on the Tick Marks tab Major Tick Marks Increment Type in the depth or elevation interval at which the large tick marks should be plotted down the log in your downhole units or in the converted units if Convert is activated Main tab This will also be the interval for the depth elevation labels they are plotted with the major tick marks Tick Size Type into this prompt the size length for the major tick marks in your design units decimal inches
8. See also The LogPlot File Manager page 17 Opening a Log Design File using the File Manager 1 Expand the File Manager s LogDesign heading as necessary 2 Double click on the name of the LDF file you wish to open 25 Designing Your Logs LogPlot will open the selected file into the Log Design window You can have only one design file open at any one time j LoeP lot Fie Edit Data Took Opbons Window Heb C Smith Project an Design borehole log Kb Data DHS dat Ei Data BH9 dat lt 6 Smith Project j FE Data dat k Header F ooter d RockWorks DB P ENEE d LogDesign P Ma ki Select DEE FIELD Be borehole log Idx E Logs Ipi Double click on the PROJECT NUMBER 19916 PROJECT NAME gt TAC LOCATION OVER THERAINBOW G Rectangle Picture name of a Log Design file DEA or LDF al DRILUNG CO MeEACHRAN amp SON to open it DRILLING METHOD AIRROTARY FIELD PARTY Minden Harley Seene ss ege SEET Stalic Eet Edt Tent DATE BEGUN DLO9me DATE COMPLETED E I mportant Notes The Log Designer opens files in the LogPlot 7 log design format LDFX The Log Designer opens files in the LogPlot2001 2005 log design format LDF Because this is an older format you will be warned should you try to save any changes to the design that it will be resaved in the new LDFX format LDFX files are not usable in versions older
9. The Data Listing To enter the actual curve data into the Multi Curve data page cells you can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of one row to the beginning of the next as you type in the values If there is no data for a depth you may note this with a non numeric entry such as ND or you may leave the interval blank If the curve is to be plotted as a line the line will be broken where there is no data If the curve is to be plotted as a filled curve then the no data entries will simply be ignored Shortcut If you already have this quantitative data in a tabular format in another application you can copy the data there and then paste it into the Multi Curve tab using the Edit Paste command See also mporting Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Multi nterval Data Tab Use The Multi I nterval Data tab is used to list depth intervals and two or more columns of data to be plotted as Bar Graph Columns as labels in Bar Graph Value columns or as text in Interval Text columns This data tab differs from the Multi Curve tab in that data are entered over depth intervals with a top and base depth while curve data are entered with single depth points If you wish to list just a single column of data for each depth interval see the Interval Data tab page 164 This replaces the Multi Histogram tab from older versions of Lo
10. There are a few other housekeeping details you ll need to do so that your RockWorks borehole data can be displayed in a LogPlot log Import your Lithology and or Stratigraphy Tables 1 Use LogPlot s Tools Edit Keywords option to access the Keyword Editor 2 Use its File Import command to import your RockWorks lithology table or stratigraphy table into LogPlot 3 Use its File Append to Current File command to append the keywords to your existing table Open update the RockWorks Log Design 1 Inthe Log Designer open the sample file RockWorks BH Idfx 2 Use the Data Editor s Data Check Data Against Log Design command to see where the sample layout doesn t match your imported data file 3 Make the necessary changes to the design file You will probably need to remove some design items and add others that are missing Be sure to check the curve and bar graph column ranges to assure they match your data range 216 Entering your Data Importing Excel Data The Data Editor s Excel import tool reads data from multiple worksheets in a single Excel file into one or more LogPlot DAT format files NEW You can import data for more than one borehole from a single XLS file The required file structure is different for single well versus multiple well files The format of the Excel data to be imported must be the same as that produced by the export to Excel program File Export Excel The worksheet titles in
11. Vertical Text Col You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Vertical Text Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Vertical Text Column right click on the Vertical Text Column and select Edit Entity or find the Vertical Text Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding a Symbol Column Use A Symbol column is used to plot a specific symbol at user declared depths LogPlot can plot vector symbols or bitmap symbols How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate a depth or elevation declaration listed in the Symbol Column data tab It will plot the user specified symbol at the declared depth elevation in the Symbol Column of the same name Such symbols could be used to note locations where gas shows were measured above left or to note water level depth above right Each Symbol column on the log must have a separate tab in the LogPlot data file LogPlot data tabs Symbol Columns are linked to data entered in Symbol Column data tabs page 178 How to Add a symbol column to a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 116 2 3 Designing Your Logs In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button is Log Body Select the Symbol Column button al f
12. has reached the opposite corner point for the rectangle 6 Release the mouse button The rectangle will be displayed on the screen Reposition the Rectangle See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Access the Rectangle Options You can use the Header Footer Rectangle Setup window to adjust the rectangle s position the line style thickness and color and its fill color if any 1 Double click on the rectangle to access its Setup window Tip You can also right click on the rectangle and choose Edit Entity or locate the line in the Edit View Entity List screen to access its settings 2 Adjust the rectangle s placement by editing the edge coordinates 45 Designing Your Logs Header Footer Rectangle Setup Position Top 0 125 Left Right 0 125 B 2 25 Bottorn l M Fil E Left Right These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the left amp right edges of the rectangle in the header footer of the log You may change the rectangle s position by editing these values or by simply moving or resizing the item on the design screen itself as discussed above The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen Options Top Bottom These coordinates determine the vertical placement of the top and bottom edges of the rectangle in the header footer of t
13. 1 Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary 2 Choose your drawing tool Straight lines d or choose the Tools Line menu command 266 ReportWorks Polylines ZS or choose the Tools Polyline menu command Polygons a or choose the Tools Polygon menu command Rectangles O or choose the Tools Rectangle menu command Draw your shape Line Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one endpoint of the line is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to place this point Drag the cursor to the desired location of the second endpoint and release the mouse button Polyline Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the first endpoint of the line is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of this segment s endpoint and release the mouse button Click and hold again and drag to the next segment s endpoint and release the mouse button Continue in this manner for each polyline vertex To end the polyline either click on the pointer button 3 or double click the left mouse button Polygon Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one vertex of the polygon is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of the next polygon vertex and release the mouse button You ll see a straight line connec
14. Compile Selected Files Any DAT files that are checked will be compiled using the currently active log design Select All Inserts a check mark in all listed DAT LPT and RockWorks borehole files Log Design files are not shown with a check box because you can only have one design open at a time Unselect All Removes check marks from all available boxes Refresh Files Reloads the names of the files in the current project folder Hide Hides the File Manager Pane You can re activate the display of the pane using the Window Show File Manager option Displaying Hiding Resizing the File Manager Pane 138 Hiding the pane Select the Window Show File Manager option in the main LogPlot menu to remove the check mark Or right click in the File Manager pane and choose Hide Displaying the pane Select the Window Show File Manager option in the main LogPlot menu to remove the check mark Widening narrowing the pane Use your mouse to grab the right edge of the File Manager pane and drag it to the left or right to make the pane smaller or larger Entering your Data C SSmith Project Fy E Smith Project BH1 dat BH2 dat ch DHA det DH det DH det th Hockworks DB H 8 LogDesign ldF Idf 3 Logs Tz ol Where Dol Start Entering Editing Data With the LogPlot program running there are several options for getting started with entering your data Plan 1 Modify an Existing LogPlot Data File 1
15. Survey data must be listed in order from the start of the well to the end See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Percent Tab Use The Percent tab is used to specify the keywords for the rock types to be represented in a Pattern Percent column and to list the depth elevation intervals and the representative percentages of each rock type Corresponding log design component Percentage data listed in the Percent tab will be plotted within the Pattern Percent column page 105 of the same name if any in the log design Restrictions You may specify up to 20 keywords per Percent tab How to enter the Percent data 1 To add a new Percent tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Pattern Percent column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Percent tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information 175 Entering Your Data 176 Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Percent command to manually insert a Percent tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Pattern Percent column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Patte
16. TOPSOIL SANDY SILT Tan loose and damp 1 5 4 SANDY SILT Tan loose and damp HNU 12ppm 2 2 HNU 12ppm 4 Gasoline odor 5 4 7 5 CLAY AND SI Dark green brown phyllitic wet Gasoline odor 7 5 10 SAND White poorly cemented wet CLAY AND SILT Dark green brown Base depth amp keyword phyllitic wet are left blank Description text is plotted below defined Top depth dd e SAND White poorly cemented wet Lithology In this column you type in the keyword for the interval Keywords may be comprised of one or more words and are limited to 60 characters including spaces Shortcut Rather than typing in the keyword name just double click on the keyword cell to bring up the Lithology Selector window Here you can pick from the available keywords in the current keyword file and view the pattern that is associated with them Contact Double click in this column to specify a customized contact line for the top of the listed interval This line will be plotted between pattern blocks and between description blocks if present and if description divider lines are enabled Description In this column you may type in any extended description that you wish to have plotted in the Description column of the log design There is a limit to 2000 characters including spaces Shortcut Rather than typing the extended description into the Lithology tab cell you can double click on the description cell to bring up the Description
17. l Start up the LogPlot program if necessary 2 Click on the Log Designer tab to bring that window to the front Z LoeP lot File Edit Data Tools Options Window Help P Design Lithologyt Mis pe Hod Active log design file HeaderFooter C Documents and Cl Ltboloou dat o Lithology3 dat M Mm dat Mininge dat Mining dat Mudog det penr dot dat Radon dat ucada a EE The program will display the Log Designer window with the current or default log design displayed The Log Designer Screen Before you get into the log format items themselves you should familiarize yourself with some general design features of the program The Design Screen is your work area designing logs is simply a matter of drawing the desired format items in their appropriate 21 Designing Your Logs positions on the design screen as if it were a piece of paper When you open a log format LogPlot is shipped with many the program screen will look something like the example shown below These screen items are summarized below 22 T M d RA SR enu commands C Documents anc Setting coe fa ZE Dem Cngeomatech ks BE Oaa Ero geotech a Dec A Rl Eero TE Lat t Beate e l da DIS DRILL HOLE Drill Hole a d i B Eat d Location Defaut Listing Project No Detauh Listing Guter dav Directon Datauk Listing Elevation Detach Listing gee ja g D Dritting Contractor
18. move the item just a pixel or two you can use your keyboard s arrow keys to nudge the item left or right ae TERR Umiruricurirumitumiuniee d le Be Deeg SS Click here and drag EEEE to here r E Di a o do ch Or to resize an item click on the largest handle located at the lower right corner or at the end of the line Keep the mouse button depressed and drag that corner or end point to the new location Release the mouse button when it is resized as you wish The column will now look like this Click here and drag to here Alignment Tools Use the Edit menu s Align tools to assist you in getting your log body items arranged 1 Click on the pointer button in the Log Designer toolbar 2 Click on the first of the items to be aligned This is the reference item to which the other items you choose will be lined up with 3 Hold down the Ctrl key and click on the additional items to be lined up with the first With all of the items selected click on the Edit Align option you wish to use Or right click and choose Align Align Left Multiple items will be set to the same left X1 coordinate Align Right Multiple items will be set to the same right X2 coordinate Align Horizontal Spacing Items will be spaced evenly from left to right Align Vertical Spacing Items will be spaced evenly from top down Align Horizontal Snap Item edges will be aligned at the
19. z Lewes Gidas CO Baami et REEL ESCH TAPI d iaraa PN ppr i E 1E remp q i Baie in ewe Hi i ali Lt ere E ee ir I F a 18 Gla RE Ee el beat Pint e ZK E L H ER i fis ei det CH P I EIE zl H E Bii iu L ei EE E E a E b B TETE wer E Die Sech EE nri Pei ka mal Dee ntr iel el gy ketei pa RN Reg et puntos L ia ti ii MN Lappe Fup ih Left Enviro geotech3 dat Enviro geotech3 Idfx Soils lithology volatile vapors Right Enviro geotech4 dat Enviro geotech4 ldfx Soils lithology text well installation Sg ae RESIDENTIAL SITES CHROME REMEDIATION PROJECT FELD BOREHOLE Los Prac E a F r He ap CHET HOER Lan FSB Kidde ta pele SIT rere i rr T Vee D Laien T in erg Dat mat L t ren ENEE ME RAP RRE MAPLE DDAN 1 EEE EG EA AJ Jii Fei BUTS TA Te ci EA i s CL kia Pe aor rare Gea AE RI zt l WR UR E NR VW n DLHA AR Bast AR my Se ore pe SE Er PILO Peers i Let Ces d nr SJN bi eg DS RSR 4i iE SEHR di eS Geng f b re Pie E E i p i i MEA AA E e 5 D 5 gt H Emn L krin imr bei E d 5 E i i Set LE e EERE ra et a d 2 ib aad Apri IR Rat HSH CSR eem d eni brouser a hi e Lee ex oe Fan L bet od eg a iid E besom menie s n be ok rm KAN a et ee a Km bai e ee a ai ah ain T reu aa EE Linn i Er We poten ee d Eira d KR DW ir rr d ef e R pu rp Ch bh E pe via bi La fe deee pi e E H E D ak i k ml es H E WEI DEEE p E Ji H Lag m r LES EAR pE ra P i k _ Kam
20. 115 Designing Your Logs Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Vertical Text column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Frame Column If this box is checked the column will be bounded by a solid line rectangle Fill Background Check this box if you want the background portion of the column to be filled with color and click on the small color box to choose the fill color Text Down Text Up These radio buttons are used to specify whether the text labels are to be plotted downward or upward in the column Note the preview in the dialog box which shows examples Font Use this button to retrieve the Font dialog box where you can establish the font type style size and color to be used for the text column Color Use this button to select a color for the text This may also be selected using the Font button above Plot Arrows Insert a check here to include arrows with the vertical text The arrows will extend to the interval top and base The arrow appearance cannot be changed 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Vertical Text column displayed in the design screen labeled
21. 206 292 302 Data Auto Template 191 Data Editor data files 140 148 206 292 302 data tabs 144 145 148 204 205 283 data tools 191 194 200 203 SINC Fal ee 135 Reference data tabs 144 145 148 177 204 205 te E DE 208 depths lgl e WER 150 189 on log 86 174 232 233 234 275 description column 81 196 description editor cccceeeeeeeeeee eens 196 designing logs see Log Designer 21 dipmeter data 128 181 Edit Entity Name scsrccsrersiuccteruiotorerorn 200 Edit Multi Column Headers 5 201 EIE NOTE iiaa dd det 62 Edit Note data tab sses 157 203 Edit Percentage Headere 200 EGE KE 56 291 Edit Text data tab 158 202 elevations Elle WEE 150 189 on log 86 174 232 233 234 275 EMF files 46 119 152 240 269 PEN 42 66 76 133 environmental log designS ssssssu 294 OOT eniinn rae 288 289 290 291 292 Excel les 217 221 export Ee DEE 218 et GE 240 REDOLWORKS ee 263 file manager 17 19 25 137 142 143 227 239 files data files DAT 140 148 206 218 292 302 log design files LDFX 23 24 25 26 27 292 log plot files LPT 234 235 236 239 240 248 Progra EE 299 ei UR EE 118 elle gn Reie Uu D EE 198 Reference Fill Interval Column 199 FRillbar data taD EE 159 footers see log footerS ccccceeeees 30 ee Wale E 41 general
22. Alternatives If you need pattern columns that are linked to lithology data use a Lithology Pattern Column LogPlot data tabs Fill Bar Columns are linked to depth intervals and optional keywords listed in Fill Bar data tabs page 159 How to Add a Fill Bar to a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod kd EE if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Fill Bar button El from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Fill Bar Column The pointer will change shape to a EI for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the fill bar cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and press the left mouse button 5 Enter the requested information in the Fill Bar Setup window Fill Bar Setup Name Organic Vapor Position Left 1 28125 Right 1 364583333 Fill Pattern Color BANKAI Outline Color Fill Color WI ei jw Frame Name Enter the name for this Fill Bar Column Any fill bar data in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces 118 Designing Your Logs Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Fill Bar column in the body of the log The horizontal coordina
23. DU 4 0 11 0 0 0 SURFACE E 4 0 140 UD 10 0 SURFACE F P fe 14 0 GROUTED AMMULUS F fe 36 0 10 0 6 0 GROUTED AMMULUS 15 E 50 0 6 0 S THREADED JOINTS E m 36 0 42 0 10 0 6 0 BENTONITE see ays F Inner dia 6 Fb Z 42 0 80 0 10 0 6 0 GRAVEL C A Top and base These determine Type in material F 35 of each interval the width of the keyword or E pattern blocks See double click to 40 text for details select BALARI LELEI K p n TTTT WI un cn Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Well Column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and base of the interval to be filled with pattern they determine the vertical extent of the pattern Entering your Data blocks in the Well Column Depths can be entered as either positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Outer Diam The value entered in this column determines the outer width of the pattern blocks in the Well Column The Well Column is set up in the Log Designer to represent a particular well diameter in real world coordinates such as inches or centimeters The Outer Diameter setting established here determines how much of the width of the entire Well Column will be filled with that pattern block Exampl
24. In these columns you must list the depth or elevation and the top and the base of the interval that is to be filled with the image You may listed multiple intervals for a single column Bitmap Here you must list the name of the image file to be plotted in the Bitmap column You may list multiple files and intervals within a single tab Important If in Log Designer you have set up the Bitmap Column to link to the image file to the log rather than imbedding the image in the log be careful how you enter the file name here and how you manage your files e If you enter the name of the file only with no directory path as shown in the example above then the link will also be recorded that way when you save the compiled log If the compiled log is ever moved to another folder or another computer and it is re opened the program will simply look in the current folder for the image file As long as you keep the compiled log LPT and the image file in the same folder regardless of where that folder is the link can be maintained This will require that the image file is in the same folder as the DAT file when compiling e f you enter the full path to the image file Such as C Project_A j efferson Site raster_log_032134 tif than that s how the link will be saved in the compiled log If you move the compiled log to another folder machine and try to re open it the program will look for the linked image using the full path information If th
25. Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Static Note The pointer will change shape to SS for marking the desired note position on the design screen 4 60 Place the cursor at the intended location in the header or footer for the upper left_corner of the notes block and click the left mouse button once The program will display the Note Setup window Enter the requested text settings Position These coordinates determine the placement of the edges of the note block in the header or footer of the log The X coordinate represents the horizontal left to right placement and the Y coordinate the vertical placement in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the top of the header or footer The defaults reflect the location where the mouse button was clicked step 4 above You may change the text placement by editing these values or by moving resizing the block itself on the design screen usually easier for notes The units of the X and Y coordinates are established under File Page Printer Setup Margin These settings define the top bottom left and right margins within the Static Notes block They are defined in decimal inches or centimeters the same units and the Position coordinates Text Enter the actual text to be displayed in the header or footer of the log You will likely press the button in order to enter more lengthy text into the displayed pop up window You can resize the pop up window i
26. Same value as the Major Interval Divisions plus 1 For example if your value grid is set to 4 major divisions set the ma per line to 5 25 ie Labels per Sc g 50 j i i H Offset from y o so 400 150 200 depth 1 Depth between ero labels 50 gee ain Cl oS HE _ d Ai riia D I K r Transparent yes 100 Display with scale change If you have selected any curve wrapping appearance tab or horizontal scaling via a Curve Scale Table you can request the legend labels be plotted to reflect the wrapped scale change Here s an example 99 Designing Your Logs w Display With Scale Change Display with Scale Change 4 Establish the Label settings Font Click on this button to select the font size style and color for the automatic legend labels and click OK Color Click here to select the font color This can also be set via the Font button Transparent Insert a check in this box if any background grid or curve lines are to show through the label text block Leave this box cleared if the label text is to block out any background items Compare the examples below Iw Transparent Transparent Orientation Choose Horizontal or Vertical for the label orientation Decimal Places Select the number of decimals to be represented in the labels Adding a Cross Plot Curves Column Use A Cross Plot Curv
27. any patterns defined with a non white background color will be changed at compile time they will display with the background color as the foreground color against a white background Reference No Solid Fill turned on All patterns with colored backgrounds now plot in Original log the background color against white IR ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white ver fine grained well MME sorted firm to brittle blocky to sub platy alt G and pepper glauconitic pink fluores cence SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite filled en echelon fractures S ANH YODRITE light gray with minor breceiation c throughout interval SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite C26 minor chlorite C21 ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white wery fine grained well sorted firm to brittle blocky to sub platy alt and pepper glauconitic pink fluores cence SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense G lctte ed en echelon fractures ANHYDRITE light gray gt with minor breceiation throughout interval SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite 26 minor chlorite EH ER As 3 Embed Patterns and Symbols in compiled log This option is used to store the pattern and symbol designs in the graphic log s LPT file rather than linking them to the program s pattern and symbol libraries By turning this option on which is default it makes sharing logs much easier because
28. appropriate color box and making a selection Adjust the line thickness for the pattern design by increasing decreasing the Line Width value When you have established the pattern color and density to your satisfaction click on the OK button at the bottom of the Select Pattern window You will be returned to the Header Footer Pattern Setup window See Viewing and Editing Patterns page 253 for more information Position Use these settings to determine the placement of the pattern block Left Right These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the left amp right edges of the pattern block in the header footer of the log Top Bottom These coordinates determine the vertical placement of the top and bottom edges of the pattern block You may change the block s position by editing these values or by simply moving or resizing the item on the design screen itself as discussed below The horizontal and vertical coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left and top edges of the design screen respectively Header Footer Pattern Setup Position 1 75 Select Bottom Options Iw Frame Frame If you want the pattern block to be enclosed in a solid line box insert a check in this box 49 Designing Your Logs 6 To accept the displayed settings click the Apply button You will see the pattern block displayed on the screen at the declared location and dimensions wi
29. are truncated or are wrapped back to the midline 95 Designing Your Logs no wrap 0 100 Wrap 10x This option functions like the Wrap above except that the wrapped portion of the curve is scaled to 1 10 the original scale This can accommodate large data Spikes without having to wrap multiple times For Wrap and Wrap 10x curve values that are less than the column minimum will be truncated 4 Frame Insert a check in this box if you want the Curve column to be bounded by a solid black line Set up grid lines value and depth The Grid tab in the Curve Bargraph Cross Plot Curve and Tadpole setup windows contains settings that control the plotting of horizontal and vertical grid lines to serve as value and depth reference markers Grid We Plot Value Grid Grid On Top Value jw Major Interval Major Interval Divisions Style Color jw Minor Intervals Minor Intervals within Major Interval Divisions Style Color 7 w Plot Depth Grd Depth We Major Interval Major Interval Depth Units Style Color RE EE w Minor Intervals Minor Interval Depth Units Style Color 40 96 Designing Your Logs For Cross Plot Curves it s important to note that the value and depth grids will be shared by both Curve 1 and Curve 2 8 Click on the Grid tab in the Curve Bargraph Cross Plot Curve or Tadpole Column Setup window Grids on Top If you would like the value and depth grid lines if activ
30. in inches or cms Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Symbol column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Depth You can list either a single depth where the symbol will be placed or a depth interval within which the symbol will be stretched Depth Top In this column list the single depth or elevation at which you want the symbol to be plotted the symbol s origin usually its center will be placed at the declared depth Or if the symbol is to be stretched list the depth at which the symbol s top will be placed Base optional This column is used only if the symbol is to be stretched within an interval Here you type the base depth for the symbol Your depths can be entered as either positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Symbol Double click on the Symbol cell to bring up the Symbol Selector window Here you can pick from the available symbols in the current symbol file and select the symbol color You can choose either vector or bitmap symbols See Creating and Editing Symbols page 257 for more information Size In this column you must type in the size at which the symbol is to be plotted expressed in decimal inches An entry of 0 25 would plot the symbol at a size of one quarter inch or cm regardles
31. snap margin that is defined Remember alignment will occur based on the first item selected 73 Designing Your Logs Dialog box Each log body item has characteristics that can be set via a dialog box Within the dialog box there are coordinate edit boxes that display the current horizontal coordinates for the item You may change the placement of the item by editing these coordinates You can also use the dialog box to change font type and sizes for text items line styles etc 1 Click on the pointer button i in the Designer toolbar 2 Double click on the item to display its dialog box Or right click on the item and select Edit Entity Or double click on the item in the Edit View Entity List screen 3 Edit the x coordinates for the item 4 Click the Apply button to see the effect of the position change 5 Click Close to close the Settings window and return to the design screen It is typically easier to use the manual method since it involves working right on the design screen and you can see what you are doing And with the reference grid and snapping features it s easy to line things up However you might find it valuable to use dialog box coordinates if you need to align items at a resolution different than that of the snapping grid For example if you have two log body columns that you want to line up right next to each other you could use each item s dialog box to set the horizontal x coordinate
32. than LogPlot 7 The Log Designer also opens LPT files from LogPlot98 however it will display a warning that it will need to convert it to a newer format as it s being opened The Log Designer permits only one log design file to be displayed at a time The design displayed in the Log Designer window is always considered to be the default LDFX file to be used in LogPlot for compiling your logs The name of the active file is always displayed on the stick up Design tab and also in the Status Bar at the very bottom of the program window Once you have opened a design file you may edit it and save the changes Save command or save the changes under a new file name Save As command You may also print the design file Save Log Design Files To save any changes you have made to a log design file LDFX that is displayed on your screen 1 Select the Save command from the Log Designer s File menu or the Save File toolbar button Fol The program will save the current version on disk under the same name If the design is from an older version of LogPlot an LDF file you will be warned that the file will be saved in a LogPlot 7 LDFX format and will not be readable in versions older than LogPlot 7 26 Designing Your Logs 2 a Click Cancel to cancel the Save operation b Or click OK to proceed The program will display a window where you can enter the new name for the log design file to be saved You can probably use th
33. the Select Pattern window and the Select Symbol window Any file name changes you make in those program windows will be reflected in the Program Files tab when it is next displayed Factory default settings Keyword file LogPlot key Pattern file rockutil pat Vector Symbol file rockutil sym Raster Symbol file rockutil rsf All of these files are installed into your My Documents LogPlot 7 System folder How to Select a different Keyword Table 1 To change the name of the keyword file to be used in the program click on the open file button 2 Inthe displayed window locate the name of the file to be loaded accessing other drives or directories as necessary Be sure the keyword file has the extension KEY This process can be used to open keyword files created in LogPlot2005 LogPlot2003 LogPlot2001 and LogPlot2003 If you wish to open a keyword file from LogPlot v 1 97 98 and RockWorks these files must be imported rather than opened because of format differences See Help Contents Other LogPlot Tools Keyword Editor for details 3 Select the desired file name by clicking on it to the right of the Keyword File name prompt Click the Open button to accept the selected file name Or click on Cancel to throw out any changes You will be returned to the Program Files tab with the new file name displayed as default You may repeat this process as necessary to change other file names The program will
34. thickness and color for the curve line You may select this information even if you wish to fill the curve with a solid color below Curve Style Select one of the options Line With this option the curve is plotted as a line of the style and color selected above Line and Symbol This option plots the curve as a line using the style and color selected above In addition a symbol will be plotted at each data point listed in the source file Selecting the symbol type is done using the Symbol button to the right discussed below Symbol This option plots a symbol at each data point in the curve column with no line connecting the points Selecting the symbol type is done using the Symbol button to the right discussed below Block This option transforms a point to point curve to a block curve using the style and color selected above Filled This option fills the curve with solid color Click on the Color box to choose the color for the fill This may be a different color than the Line color established above Compare these examples below Designing Your Logs line curve line amp symbol A ac Ea a filled Fill Type Click in the Single Color button if the curve is to be filled with a single solid color Click in the color box to select that color Or click in the Value Based Color button to create a gradient of color within the column Use the color boxes to select a color for the minimum and maximum data values
35. 7 Jog Pk Edt Date Log Took Options Window Help C Semith Project Sl ER Derion borehole tog ined ES Ota Bt o 7 Active Data File ASmith Project Data Tabs P JEg Dala dat ot FR Data dat EN Consistency E Gegen vanor J ca E uithology A Well Column T BHi dal TC BH2dat SETUP E TEXT Samples E SamplingMethod Sample Number Moisture Hd dal PRS dal i l HHA RockWworks OB D 110 EI LUTTE CET boehoe log is BS Logs bi ast Modified 2 20 2007 Suggested design Fike borehole ei KE Feld borehole ling Suggested vertical scaling 2 5 uritsfinch COs nii File Manager Usa LogPiot kew PoockUtil pat l babalia teli ola RE MODIFIED 20 00 pein PULTI G17 x 10 67 CO mtb reiectbaretce log Hi The Setup tab establishes the top base and location of the drill hole it is the only required tab Each other tab within the Editor corresponds to an item within the log s design file Idfx and contains the data to be plotted in that item To view the data contained in any of the data tabs simply click on the tab name and it will be brought to the foreground LogPlot allows you to keep more than one data file open at atime All are accessible by clicking on their stick up tabs labeled with the file s name The LogPlot File Manager The File Manager is displayed in a pane along the left edge of the LogPlot program window It is used to display the LogPlot rela
36. Access the Data Editor window by clicking on the LogPlot Data Editor tab 2 Open the existing LogPlot data file Select the File menu from the Data Editor menu Select the Open command and select the data DAT file you wish to modify This could be a data file you created earlier Or it could be a sample file installed with the program see Sample Files page 292 for details 3 Add data to the existing data tabs Type it in copy paste it from another document import File Import into a single tab 4 Add new data tabs Data New Data Item or delete unused data tabs Data Delete Data Page as necessary Or use the automatic Update tool Data Update Data Template from Log Design to add missing tabs to the data listing 5 Save the data file File Save or Save As Plan 2 Import a Data File LogPlot imports several types of data from other software programs LAS geophysical data elogs sonic logs etc RockWorks BH borehole files Excel 1 Create a new Data Editor window File New Data Editor 2 Import the data File Import LAS or RockWorks or Excel See Importing Data page 206 Plan 3 Create a Blank Data Template for the Current Log Design 1 Access the Log Designer window and open an existing log design for which you want to create a data file This is now considered the default log design 2 Select the Log Designer Data Create New Data Template command The program will create a new dat
37. Double click on the log image to adjust the scaling or add an outline border e Use the other ReportWorks tools to add your company name or other text insert a logo or map image etc e Save the page as a ReportWorks RW6 document File Save LUTTE Bis gir Wes fen mes ee a Gi Bl Ta ey l SE l 7 i eae Main Street Site LES Bate Speen Bir USR db Verto Exriresgentu FELD BORERELE LOS ab bazpars li zap paren See a EFF Je D 247 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Note that LogPlot creates a temporary BMP or EMF file on disk for insertion into the ReportWorks document The image is inserted as imbedded so that you don t need to maintain any links from the ReportWorks document to the external BMP or EMF file This means that the log image itself is saved in the RW6 document and will be displayed the next time you open the RW6 file into Reportworks You can change the link embed status of the log image but we recommend that you tread carefully See the ReportWorks documentation page 261 for more information about how it links and embeds images Distributing LPT Files to Your Clients RockWare offers the LogView portion of LogPlot as a free program on CD and on the web so that your clients can view and print your original LPT files without having to purchase the entire LogPlot program This section includes some instructions for distributing LogView and your LPT files Version control First we always
38. El Samples E sam M DHA dat BHE dat Ending Depth Easting DH dat a RockWworks DB 0 2 15 0 RockWorks borehole BH records from MDB S EE M BHE Last Modified 2 20 2007 BH Suggested design File borehole log ldfx Field borehole loc ep LogDesign ldfx ldf oo borehole log ldi Si ay Loge Ipt M bhl lpt M bh lpt M bh Ipt M bhe Ipt 1 bh Ipt Log Design files LDFX and LDF Suggested vertical scaling 2 5 units finch continuous DO Use LogPlot key Rock H pat Log Plot files LPT se LogPlot hey RockUtil pa The File Manager will also provides direct access to RockWorks MDB data display open and compile any RockWorks MDB borehole data no import necessary The Log Design file format has changed to XML style with a new extension LDFX LogPlot will still read older format LDF files and you can re save in the new format New amp modified entities Introduction Well Construction columns now have automatic caption labels with lines or arrows BORING WELL COMPLETION DESCRIPTION Concrete seal Bentonite Screened interval from 14 to 25 Cap at 25 Backfilled with bentonite Well Column fe pe pempe p bebes 0 1 3 0 0 0 cap 14 25 3 0 0 0 screen Screened interval from 14 to 25 25 26 3 0 0 0 cap 26 30 3 0 0 0 bentonite Backfilled with bentonite 0 1 6 0 3 0 cap 1 10 6 0 3 0 cement Concrete seal 10 15 6 0 3 0 bentonite Ben
39. Gat Yee Jock Opia bien CEA EC EECHER IER j 3 i D 4 P EN a a RS RSR EECH DO Do SC Lt pi E There are several ways to start up the ReportWorks program supplied with RockWorks and LogPlot From RockWorks If you are at the main RockWorks program window click on the ReportWorks button along the left edge of the main RockWorks program window to open a new blank ReportWorks window From RockPlot2D If you are in the RockPlot2D window choose the File ReportWorks command to open a new blank ReportWorks window From LogPlot If you have a log displayed in the LogView window choose the File Export To ReportWorks command to export a single page or the entire log to ReportWorks From Windows Outside the RockWorks program you can use the Windows Start menu to locate the shortcut to the ReportWorks program in the RockWorks shortcut folder From Windows Outside the RockWorks program you can use Windows Explorer to locate the program file ReportWorks exe in the program folder and double click on it to launch the application Once you have a ReportWorks window displayed you can use the File Page Setup menu command to set up your new page and the Tools menu options to insert shapes text images and more to the current page Or use the File Open menu command to open an existing RWR file 261 ReportWorks Managing ReportWorks Files Creating a New ReportWorks Document RWR File Use the ReportWork
40. General Toolbar Buttons are positioned to the right of the File Tree They offer Shortcuts to file and other menu functions Note that this side toolbar can be dragged to the upper lower left or right edge of the Design window The Design Toolbar Buttons offer the log header footer and log body design items They are grouped into header footer buttons and log body buttons You simply click ona button place the associated item in the header or body where you want it and establish any specific settings that may be required Toolbar Buttons also offer easy access to other design features such as a reference grid and snap tools along the bottom and to file management tools along the left The Options Toolbar Buttons offer shortcuts to Options menu functions such as setting the reference grid snapping etc The Log Header can contain text wrappable notes column legends lines rectangles symbols patterns bitmap images logos maps etc that are plotted at the top of your log or log page Designing Your Logs The Log Body can contain patterns descriptions scale bars curves bar graphs text pattern percent symbols fill bars lines bitmap well construction vertical text cross plotted curve columns and tadpole plots The Log Footer can contain the same items as the Header which are plotted at the base of your log or log page The Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the window It displays status in
41. Headers option The program will display a window listing the current names for the curve or bar graph columns in the tab 4 To change a column name click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the item to which this data listing corresponds In this list the program will show the 201 Entering Your Data names of all of the Curve Cross Plot Curves Bar Graph Bar Graph Value and Interval Text in the current log design If you don t have a design selected or if your design s correct column names aren t displayed click the Cancel button Access the Options menu from the main program toolbar select the Log Settings option and select the log design to be used Then try changing the column header again The Edit Multi Column Headers prompt will also allow you to type in a name This must match character for character the name that is assigned to the corresponding item in the log design The match is not case sensitive You may list up to 40 columns in the Multi Curve and Multi Interval Data columns respectively Each listed column must have a unique name in order to match the data to an item in the log s design Any extra data columns in the tab without matching items in the log s design will simply be ignored when the data is compiled The example below shows a Multi Interval Data tab and how its column names appear when displayed in the Multi Data Column Editor window SPT Blows SPT Blows
42. Labels Offset From Depth A Labels per Line jw Display With Scale Change Transparent Horizontal Orientation 0 Decimal Places 1 Click on the Legend tab in the Curve Column Setup window 2 To activate the plotting of the value legend insert a check mark in the Plot Legends box 3 Establish the I nterval settings 98 Designing Your Logs Depth Between Labels Type in the depth interval between the automatic labels For example if you want labels to appear every 50 feet on the log type in 50 For every 100 meters if those are your depth units type in 100 Offset from Depth This controls how far above or below the actual depth the top of the label text will be placed This can be helpful to avoid overplotting on regularly spaced depth grid lines Some examples To position the top of the labels directly at the declared depth intervals enter 0 To place the top of the labels 1 foot below the depth intervals enter 1 If you want to bump the labels above the depth intervals you need to enter the offset as a negative value 2 will place the top of the label text 2 feet above each depth interval Labels per line Type in the number of labels to appear at each depth interval This will include the minimum column and maximum column values at either side of the column and any additional labels in between Tip If you have activated the column s value grid set the Labels per line to the
43. Max 38 453 to Min 0 and Max 50 213 Entering Your Data This does not affect the data itself it just tells the program how to set the left and right edge of the curve s column in the log design Log This check box can be used to set the curve column to a logarithmic rather than linear scale Caption These will be the text listed in the Static Text header labels inserted into the log design if you have activated the Include Header Caption check box The default text corresponds to the curve s name in the left column You can type in a preferred label of up to 60 characters including spaces Note that neither Legend nor Static Text labels wrap so you should keep the titles short Width This establishes the width of each curve column in inches or centimeters The more columns you have selected the narrower these will default so that they ll fit into the design Note that all of these settings can be modified later in the Log Designer screen 5 Click the Finish button at the bottom of the LAS Import window to proceed The program will create a Multi Curve data tab in the current data window with column headings corresponding to the names of the curves you selected The first left most column will contains depths listed at the Step indicated in the LAS file The depth range will correspond to the LAS file s Start and Stop depths or a filtered depth range if you specified that Each curve s data values will be
44. Note s font type size and color Color Use this button to change the color for the text This can also be selected using the Font button Border If you want the Notes block to be outlined insert a check in the Outline check box and choose a line color Fill If you want the Notes block to be filled with color insert a check in the Fill check box and choose a fill color 63 Designing Your Logs 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the text placed in the header or footer in the design window You may continue to adjust the text if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied For the Notes block it s possible that the Position settings don t allow enough space to see the text once you ve clicked Apply you ll either need to modify the Position coordinates or close the Note Setup window to resize the block manually 7 To close the Note Setup window click the Close button Reposition the Notes Block See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Text Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the text item right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the notes item in the View Entity List and choose the Load I tem button Adding Header Footer Curve amp Bar Graph Column Legends Use The Header Footer Column Legend item is u
45. Notes e This now is the active keyword file and its name will be displayed in the title bar at the top of the Keyword Editor window The program will use this keyword file during compiling of logs and this file will now be listed as default under Options Program Files e The keyword file structure in LogPlot 7 LogPlot2005 LogPlot2003 and LogPlot2001 is ASCII text in format rather than binary in format If you wish to open a keyword file created in LogPlot98 LogPlot97 or LogPlot v 1 you must use the Import option rather than the Open option e If you wish to open a list of keywords from RockWorks you must use the Import option See also Creating and Editing Keywords page 251 for information about adding deleting and changing keywords changing patterns associated with keywords and importing keywords from other sources The Description Editor The Description Editor window is accessible from two LogPlot data tabs From the Lithology tab the Description Editor is accessed by double clicking in the Description column It is used to type in the extended description if any that will be plotted in the Lithology Description column in the log s design Ee Observed Lithalagy Lithology tab Top Base Lithology Contact Description up to 2000 Characters Double click in this cell to access the Description Editor A comments Text Column tab Depth Text 196 Entering your Data From the Text Column tab the Descri
46. Setup menu 5 Instead select the Properties button from the Print Setup menu This will load the Epson supplied printer driver menu Click on the Paper tab from the Epson Stylus 1500 1520 menu Locate the Paper Source setting within the Paper tab Select the Manual Feed Slot Banner option from within the Paper Source pull down menu 8 Locate the Paper Size button within the Paper menu Select the Long Paper 17x 11 in option from within the Paper Size menu 9 Click OK to close the Epson setup window to return to the LogPlot Print Setup window 10 Double check the upper part of the Print Setup window It should show your printer name the printer s page size now reading something like Page 11 00 x 16 54 and the printable area on the paper now reading something like Printable Length 11 Printable Width 13 60 What s important here is that the Printable Length matches the page s physical length this means that the printer is telling LogPlot to include no top or bottom margins on the page thus to fill the entire page or to compile as a continuous log If you don t see that the Printable Length is equaling the Page Length then go back to 7 and be sure that it s set to Manual Feed Slot Banner and repeat steps 8 10 11 Now check the lower half of this window where the log s page size is set Click the Set Default Size button to set the log s page size to the full printable length and wi
47. Snap button The resolution setting is shared by the Show Grid button if activated Snapping and the reference grid may be activated independently of each other although it can be helpful to have the grid displayed when snapping is turned on For snapping a setting of 0 125 for example means that subsequent design items that you place will be snapped to the nearest 1 8th of an inch or cm both horizontally for all design items and vertically for header and footer items Any existing design items that are already placed will not be affected by the turning on of Snapping unless you use the pointer to reposition them We recommend that you set the snap resolution to a multiple of 1 16th 0 0625 0 125 0 25 etc This prevents rounding errors that can occur when the program toggles back and forth internally between pixels on the drawing screen and actual inch units See also Pages 38 and 72 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items The alignment tools are very handy for regular spacing of text and edge alignment Selecting Items in the Log Header Footer To select a single item in a log header or footer 1 Use your mouse to position the screen pointer on the item and single click it The selected item should appear with handles in the upper left corner static text on either end lines or on all corners other header footer items J PER OS f To select multiple items in a log header or foot
48. Text data entries page 158 it will look for Edit Text items in the log s design that are flagged with the same names If it finds a match the label declared for the item in the data file will be plotted in the header or footer of the log at the Edit Text location 56 Designing Your Logs Restrictions You may include a virtually unlimited number of Edit Text items in the header or footer The Edit Text labels can be up to 120 characters in length including spaces They can occupy a single line only wrapping will not occur If you need multi line text see Header Footer Edit Notes page 62 How to Add Changing Header Footer Text 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button HeaderFooter DN if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Edit Text button Elom the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Edit Text The pointer will change shape to JE for marking the desired Edit Text position on the design screen 4 Place the cursor at the intended location in the header or footer for the handle of the label and click the mouse button once The position of the handle relative to the text label itself depends on the horizontal alignment left center right and the vertical alignment top bottom See the alignment settings below The program will display the Edit Text Setu
49. Unlike a Lithology Description column Interval Text columns do not link to graphic pattern designs How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will look for text listed in an Interval Data tab of the same name and plot it in the Interval Text column at the indicated depth Alternatives Text that is to be associated with lithologic patterns is designed with the Lithology Description Column tool Text that is to be plotted vertically is designed with the Vertical Text Column tool Text that is listed with a single depth rather than an interval is designed with the Text Column tool LogPlot data tab Interval Text columns are linked to data entered into Interval Data tabs page 164 130 Designing Your Logs How to Create an Interval Text column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button is Log Body 3 Select the Interval Text Column button El from the toolbar Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Interval Text Column if necessary to display the log body buttons The pointer will change shape to a int for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the Interval Text column cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and click the left mouse button to place it 5 Enter the column settings in the displayed window Interva
50. User Manual and registration card you received from RockWare Multi User registration numbers contain the letters CM or AM If you opted to downloaded the program at purchase you can contact RockWare for this number Installation Number This is a number that s generated by the RockWorks program when it s first started It is unique to each computer Unlocking Code This activates the Multiple User license and is supplied by RockWare when you send us your Registration Number and Installation Number described above Contact RockWare at the addresses on page 12 2 You can click OK to proceed and jump to Starting Up LogPlot page 12 Network Computer Logging In Note You must have standard user or higher e g administrator privileges to set up the network licensing Restricted users should contact their system administrator 11 Introduction Network licensees will now see a window where their licensing information can be entered 1 Enter the requested information Licensee Name Type in your company s name This will be displayed in the initial Splash screen Registration Number Type into this field the letters and numbers that are printed on a sticker on the CD User Manual and registration card you received from RockWare Multi User registration numbers contain the letters CN or AN If you opted to download the program at purchase you can contact RockWare for this number Certificate File Use the Browse butt
51. are represented by the minimum and maximum data values You are however able to establish the major and minor grid line appearance Plot Depth Grid If you want depth or elevation grid lines to be plotted within the column insert a check mark in this box These are horizontal lines that plot down the column to note depth or elevation intervals Major Interval Insert a check here to define a main depth or elevation interval and click on the Style Color box to select a line style thickness and color for these lines Enter the actual depth or elevation interval at which the lines should be drawn 97 Designing Your Logs We Plot Depth Grid Depth Enter the interval w Major Interval Major Interval in your depth units Depth Units Style Color at which major divider lines are P pp __ to be plotted w Minor Intervals Minor Interval Enter the interval Depth Units Style Color at which the L 1 10 minor grid lines are to be plotted Minor Interval Insert a check here to define a minor depth elevation interval and click on the Style Color box to establish the line appearance Enter the actual depth or elevation interval at which the lines should be drawn Set up automatic value labels The Legend tab in the Curve Column setup window is used to activate and configure automatic values labels that can be plotted at periodic intervals in a Curve column Legend W Plot Legends Intervals DU Depth Between
52. around in the log display and to move to different pages LogView can be used to save print and export your graphic logs See LogView Introduction page 231 5 Go back to the log design if necessary to make changes additions etc and then re compile Importing RockWorks2004 2002 Borehole Data The Data Editor s RockWorks import tool reads BH borehole files containing downhole data from the RockWorks program versions 2004 and 2002 The import tool automatically creates a new LogPlot data file populated with the required data tabs for the different borehole data types The import tool imports individual BH files one at a time creating a complete DAT file If you want to open data from a RockWorks2006 database MDB you can do so easily via the File Manager How to Import RockWorks2004 2002 BH Files 1 Click in the Data Editor window 2 Select the File Import RockWorks Boreholes menu option The program will display a dialog box 3 Browse to the folder where your existing BH files reside In RockWorks this is called a project folder 4 Select the name of the BH file to import LogPlot will read the contents of the RockWorks BH file and generate LogPlot data tabs for each data type Here is a listing of the comparable data types RockWorks data item LogPlot data item 215 Entering Your Data ERR oreraa o E ER EE 5 Save the imported data choose File Save as a LogPlot DAT file
53. bay H Abi ween Ti Le Fe Peetu j e A i 74 T f D t E I J J 34 Pn E RA L J l I Th H I 1 T Tii Left Geophysical3 dat Geophysical3 Idfx Lithology caliper elog curves Right Geophysical4 dat Geophysical4 ldf Lithology 10 elog curves PanGalactic On Rat Brent Frere et te Hpanaitfa i ke Co bas pn Pie bbe K e ZS KS i Lapi Mra k Fiki WI Tag ME 188 Rer Lj lim ER A Bes 1 TEHNY Lalas AT TR F H ihhh lgi 117 E SC E amaj wa bewe iFa tii Firmie rarei Larae TITA m lee Tar Miiri Henke b TIE Cimri Jeer 19 TT m ss By Bry Beery ora Eeey eppi y k PENE byli C Hamir H LL rari ee Te Lee Cee d Set Ko fr et R m BS Di Late i d me at s A 1 Leem ae ge DE Ae Kabel Gei WEEN CK A PT tae et AE et del ai WS kung V P WC GER Edi 297 Reference Mining log designs Left Miningl dat Miningl ldfx Coal log with lithology BTU and ash bar graphs Right Mining2 dat Mining2 ldfx Minerals with elemental abundances lith mineralization Dph L Trup es rae rE Io Ge be al MMi be i i Se mes it Setz geg VE ral Fira 8 Died iy Leer Emri ed ee 1 i nu It h Mining3 dat Mining3 ldfx Minerals exploration with ore grades pee e Rb Cee in em H arma bi Ereg eegen H i Le TE Pat eli Sh 0s nme OF eee AH a as OFT bay OPT n eemi d ge vd e p By Sea ee
54. because Offset Description is turned off 20 ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white very fine grained well sorted firm to brittle blocky to sub platy salt and pepper glauconitic pink fluorescence Small fracture C14 at 16727 tilled with fluorite barite and black calcite AREMACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white very Tinegrained vel faa sorted firm to brittle blocky to Sg sub platy sat and pepper glauconitic pink fluorescence Small fracture 144 at 16727 SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite tilleden echelon fractures eee CN ANKY DRITE light gray with Gw S Geet minor brecciation movement En SALT graywhite massive minor U anhydrite 459 minor chlorite K minor brecciationimovement K throughout interval SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite lt 5 minor chlorite 121 SANDSTONE yehite orthoquartzite veryyellrounded poorly cemented frosted minor Fe staining along fractures GOOD SHOM GOOD SANDSTONE white a oorthoquartzite very well rounded poorly cemented frosted minor FeO staining along fractures GOOD Neate NNN ANY DRITE light gray with Move Up Insert a check in this option to allow offset descriptions to be moved upward if there is room This prevents continual downward offsetting of the text In the example below the Anhydrite interval in the log on the right has moved upward to make more room for the text that follows 85 Desig
55. button Color Use this button to select a color for the text This may also be selected using the Font button above Vertical Alignment Choose whether the text is to be aligned at the top middle or base of the defined interval The example below shows three interval text columns side by side with top middle and bottom aligned text Horizontal Alignment Choose how the text is to be aligned horizontally within the column 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Interval Text column placed in the design screen You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Interval Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Interval Text Column right click on the Interval Text Column and select Edit Entity or find the Interval Text Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button 132 Designing Your Logs Listing Log Entities The Log Designer permits you to view a listing of all of the items that are currently included in the open log design 1 Select the View Entity List button from Log Designer s left hand toolbar Fi or the same command from the Edit menu The program will display a window that looks like this Each item that you ve inserted into the log design header footer amp body items w
56. button to choose how the text is to be aligned horizontally relative to the insertion handle In the graphic example below the PROJ ECT label is set to Top vertical alignment and shows the difference between left center and right aligned text iii i iit SbrRodect left justified PROJECT Bandolier Gas Station SITE LOCATION 3300 W Rimrock Drive ot i ppe ecp TT center justified PROJECT Bandolier Gas Station SITELOCATION Sg eeumeockeDrrve t prquec 777 7 right yustified PROJECT Bandolier Gas Staten SITE LOCATION 3300 W Rimrock Drive 55 Designing Your Logs Vertical Alignment Click in a radio button to choose how the text is to be aligned vertically relative to the insertion handle In the examples below the six Static Text labels are set to Left horizontal alignment and show the difference between Top and Bottom vertical alignment WITH MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION NOTES ATH MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION NOTES ROJECT Groundwater study PRosEct a ere study ORING NO B 1 BORING mo Bed re i ORING LOCATION Z5N 35W ORING LOCATION Sagan 0222 2 THOD OF DRILLING ET HOllew Seem AUgeE THOD Ob DRILLING 6 Hollow Stem Auger CORD OF WATER DEPTH CHECKS none ECORD OF WATER DEPTH CHECKS none WE gaY ING DEPTH none EE AN TIHG DEPTH none Vertical Alignment Vertical Alignment Transparency Click in a radio button to set the text
57. ces Oe E Ge gray White very fine grained well Sorted SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense ANHYDRITE light gray With minor brecclation throughout interval SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite lt 55 minor chlorite gray white Very fine grained well Sorted gray to dark gray blocky dense light gray with minor brecciation throughout interval gray white Massive G Minor anhydrite lt 531 Minor chlorite lt 15 fxlSi fxlSi W Eeuaord jw Leuword Keyword i Colon S4ND Colon SAND Colon SAND Ww Description iw Description W Description Description Insert a check here to plot any extended text in the Lithology Description column Omitting this information can be helpful if you want to display a short version of your data e g keywords only Be sure to have Keyword above turned on if descriptions are turned off Offset descriptions Insert a check mark to activate automatic offsetting of description text If activated if a description is too large to fit within its depth interval 84 Designing Your Logs when compiled in LogPlot the program will shift the following descriptions down the log so that all the text will be visible In the example below the log on the left displays how the Salt interval is offset downward to make enough room for the Anhydrite text In the log on the right the Anhydrite and Salt text blocks are simply clipped
58. column If left un checked the bar graph will be scaled linearly across the column Minimum and Maximum Values These settings define the range of data values to be represented in the bar graph column Manual This is the default setting This allows you to define manually the data values to correspond to the left and right column edges via the Min Value and Max Value boxes e Linear Scaling Simply type in the data value range to be represented in the bar graph column For example if the column is to contain assay values that are to be plotted from O to 5 ppm you would enter 0 for the Min Value and 5 for the Max Value e Logarithmic Scaling For the Min Value enter the non negative and non zero real number to represent the minimum value of the logarithmic bar graph column You may then select the appropriate Max Value using the Designing Your Logs up or down arrows next to that prompt You are restricted to even logarithmic cycles such as 0 2 to 2 000 1 to 10 000 etc Scaling We Logarithmic fe Manual Min vValue 0 0 Mas Value 10 Type in the minimum value for the bar graph column Then use the arrow buttons to select from one of the displayed Max Values logarithmic cycles e f Logarithmic Scaling is selected and the program encounters a zero or negative value in the data file that value will be plotted at the minimum value edge of the column Automatic New Choose this option if you want the
59. column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 105 Designing Your Logs 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button is Log Body if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Pattern Column button E from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Pattern Percent Column The pointer will change shape to a Ka for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and click the left mouse button to place it 5 Enter the requested information in the column Setup window Pattern Percent Column Setup Name Cuttings Position Left 0 9596 Right 3 073 Options iw Frame Column X ome 7 e Name Enter the name for this Pattern Percent column Any percentage data in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this Pattern Percent column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Pattern Percent column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work scree see Moving and Resizing L
60. data listed in the data file The name match is not case sensitive The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces 91 Designing Your Logs True Depth Curves If you want to display true depth in the curve rather than downhole data you should set the Name field to the name of the Orientation data tab containing the downhole Survey data Then insert a check in the True Depth Curve check box Specify whether the downhole survey data is entered as dip from vertical 0 straight down and 90 horizontal or as dip from horizontal 0 horizontal 90 straight down 90 straight up as entered in RockWorks See the other true depth specific notes regarding the scaling below 2 Position These list the horizontal coordinates for the curve column The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 3 Scaling Logarithmic Insert a check here if the curve is to be scaled logarithmically log base 10 within the column If left un checked the curve will be scaled linearly across the column Minimum and Maximum Values These settings define the range of data values to be represented in the curve column Manual This is the default setting This allows you to defi
61. design buttons 3 Select the Edit Notes button krom the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Edit Note The pointer will change shape to SS for marking the desired note position on the design screen 4 Place the cursor at the intended location in the header or footer for the upper left corner of the notes block and click the left mouse button once The program will display the Note Setup window 62 Designing Your Logs Enter the requested text settings Name Enter the name for this Edit Note item Each Edit Note item must have a unique name so that you can refer to each one individually in the data file For example you might name an Edit Note item that will contain driller s notes Driller Notes Position These coordinates determine the placement of the edges of the note block in the header or footer of the log The X coordinate represents the horizontal left to right placement and the Y coordinate the vertical placement in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the top of the header or footer The defaults reflect the location where the mouse button was clicked step 4 above You may change the text placement by editing these values or by moving resizing the block itself on the design screen usually easier for Notes Units inches or centimeters are declared under the File Page Print Setup option Margin These settings define the top bottom left and right margins w
62. display the Static Text Setup window 5 Enter the requested text settings Position These coordinates determine the placement of the handle of the Static Text block in the header or footer of the log The X coordinate represents the horizontal left to right placement and the Y coordinate the vertical placement in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the top of the header or footer The defaults reflect the location where the mouse button was clicked step 2 above You may change the text placement by editing these values or by moving the text itself on the design screen See the alignment settings below for information about the position of the handle relative to the text label The coordinate units inches or centimeters are established under File Page Printer Setup 53 Designing Your Logs 54 Text Enter the actual text to be displayed in the header or footer of the log The Static Text label may be up to 120 characters in length See Macros below for information about automatic plotting of page numbers well locations etc lest Text to be l displayed in Driller Name the header or footer Angle Enter the angle at which the static text label is to be plotted The text may be plotted at any angle between 90 and 90 CH Ai Gi Angle 0 wi Oe Ke T Sr Angle ajug 06 Font Use this button to access the Font dialog box where you may set the static text label s font ty
63. each one individually in the data file The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Name The NAME identifies the lithology E pattern column you may have more than one AND matches it with its associated Lithology Description column if any Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Lithology Pattern column in the body of the log You may change the column s position by editing these values or by moving or resizing the column on the design screen itself The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen 78 Designing Your Logs Frame Column lf this setting is activated with a check mark the program will enclose the column in a solid line frame This will probably only be noticeable in areas where no lithologic patterns are displayed 6 Click on the Profile Curve tab in the window if you want to use curve values to create a lithology profile LIMESTONE with clay interbeds LiMY DOLOMITE En SHALY LIMESTONE with clay interbeds SANDSTONE Ui Use a Curve to Create a Profile Insert a check in this box to activate this feature and enable the additional settings Curve Name Type here the name of the Curve data tab in the data file or the name of the column in the Multi Curve tab in the data file that contains the data to be used to mask the lithology column For example if you wish to clip the
64. ee TI a Client Det Project Def gt C Documents and Sethngsir ow My Dooumerts LogPint 7iSanples invwwo geotech Idx Interval Text iz Lithology Pattern Column Contains graphic patterns that are associated with keyword declarations The column would typically represent lithology type but could also contain mineralization fossilization and other patterns 76 Designing Your Logs Eel Lithology Description Column Contains textual descriptions that are listed in your data file on a Lithology tab The patterns for the declared description keywords will be plotted in the associated Lithology Pattern Column if any LI Scale Bar Notes depths or elevations down the log KI Curve Column Plots quantitative data as a point to point curve line symbol filled block etc all Cross Plot Curve Column Plots two sets of curve data with overlapped regions filled with pattern and or color Elpattern Column Displays up to 20 lithology patterns in a column based on component percentages cal Bar Graph Column Plots interval based quantitative data as a bar graph Hi Bar Graph Value Column Plots value labels next to overlaying a Bar Graph column Text Column Plots text that is not associated with a lithologic pattern This could include sample numbers soil classifications general comments etc El Vertical Text Column Plots text vertically in the body of the log between user declared depths T
65. fill to achieve different results Curve 1 gt e Curve 2 Overlap In this example the curves are plotted opposite directions Curve 1 is plotted in blue filled or not Curve 2 is plotted in red filled or not with the overlap color set to solid green Curve 1 Curve 2 gt Overlap E In this example the curves are both plotted left to right Curve 1 is plotted in blue no fill Curve 2 is plotted in solid green with red outline The overlap zone is plotted in solid red Set up grid lines value and depth See page 96 for more information Adding a Pattern Percent Column Use A Pattern Percent column is used to plot lithology patterns in a column based on component percentages How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate relative percentage data for declared keywords and intervals that are listed in a Percent data tab that has the same name It will plot the appropriate patterns in the Pattern Percent column the width of each pattern corresponding to that component s percent representation This is typically used to represent cuttings percentages in a graphic manner Alternatives See the Lithology Pattern column page 78 for plotting individual pattern blocks for each depth interval See the Fillbar Column page 118 for more generic pattern filled columns LogPlot data tabs Pattern Percent Columns are linked to LogPlot Percent tabs page 175 How to Create a pattern percent
66. footer and has a different set of design buttons BY LoePtot ol Bile Edt Data Took Options Window Help C Documerits i el N Design untied Mis EE Data Enviogeotech6 dat mm Semples E EX A RockWoarks B Wi Log Body 46 LogDesign Dy onelate kitx D rvro geote B Select Pattern vro Qeaole m vro geote 0 980 draggable header boundary mmm Mmm mo 335 3333 F 22 EI Descnpton Scale Bar mo gece A lt gt Wwro geote E Tall ro geote a Envro geot Cuve Cross Plot Erwiro gaot page edge Erviro geote reterence Geoplwaca amp fl Geophysicat n Pescent Bar Graph gt Geophysics Geophysical Log Body i ert H gil g Drawing Log Body Design Area Lithology2 ki Tools Lithology3 kd f Miring dix 2 E e Maer is Vertical Symbol Miring3 iis Text Mudiog1 kdlx penrrdot idb Le Radon Idx Pi Ba Pictures RockWorks lt gt mtie E D ege kii wie Hosorta draggable footer boundary un d e Comsteuc Line volcano idx cc Le Bit Vertical Tadpoles Line v Interval lt gt Test SN m P gt 8581 64 IC 050 4 Heade 1 Footes 1 lt 4 98 perin SINGLE 8 17 x 10 67m C Documents and Settings uer ety Documerts LogPict 7 Sanpiles untitled M When you create a new log design File New Log Design command the program will display a blank design screen You may then insert a log body item by clicking the appropriate toolbar button and
67. four corners all other header footer items 2 Select the Edit Send to Back command The selected item will now be displayed behind other items in the design allowing you to click on them to move them or to access their settings Move or Resize Header Footer Items You can move and resize log header and footer items using several methods Manually You can reposition header and footer items and resize lines rectangles and pictures by grabbing left click and hold and dragging them on the design screen itself The program also offers a reference grid and a Snapping feature to make it easy to line things up You may select items individually or in groups 1 Click on the pointer button in the Log Designer toolbar 2 Click on the item to be moved to select it It will display small handles to indicate it s selected To select multiple items hold down the Ctrl key and click on additional items 3 Keep the mouse button depressed and drag the item to its new location 38 Designing Your Logs FIELD BORE PROJECT NUMBER 1991 66 PROJECT NAME TAC LOCATION OVER THERAINBOW PAINE Click and hold to grab the item then drag to a new location If you need to move the item just a pixel or two you can use your keyboard s arrow keys to nudge the item left or right Or to resize an item other than text click on the largest handle located at the lower right corner or at the end of the line Keep the m
68. if L i 8 Peien Mudlog Designs 298 Reference Mudlogl dat Mudlogl ldfx Lithology 5 gas curves drill rate cuttings Freee Pay b s zc ABC Logging ES Ae Fi ege E Installed Files and File Types LogPlot Program Files These program files are typically installed into the Program Files RockWare LogPlot 7 folder contacting RockWare htm information about contacting RockWare installation htm information about the installation program License htm Lists the terms of the RockWare license agreement LogPlot7 exe LogPlot 7 program LogPlot7 inf Revisions list LogPlot7_Licensing exe LogPlot 7 licensing program LP7_ INSTALL LOG Installation log lpintro gif Splash screen images Readme txt Additional documentation Rock err Reference list of program error messages 299 Reference These program files are typically installed into the Program Files RockWare Help folder LogPlot7 chm LogView7 chm ReportWorks chm LogPlot Help file with tutorial LogView Help file ReportWorks Help file These program files are typically installed into or created in the My Documents LogPlot 7 System folder the original versions are stored in Program Files RockWare LogPlot 7 System Note that the exact path may differ if you are using Windows Vista LogPlot7 log LogPlot 7 ini LogPlot key LP_deutch key LP_espanol key LP_francais key LP_italiano key Rockutil pat Rockutil sym Rockutil rsf USCS1 key USCS1 pat USCS2 key
69. in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Scale Table tab labeled with the selected name 2 Set up the tab and enter the data as shown in the example below 177 Entering Your Data Scale Table identifier to match name of Curve column in the log design CALIPER Top Base Minimum Value Maximum Value 425 465 5 5 635 750 5 a Top and base New minimum amp maximum depths for value for curve column listed scale for listed depth range change Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Curve column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Top Base In these columns you must list the depth at the top and the base of the interval where the curve scale is to be changed Any data outside these depth ranges will be scaled as defined as default in the log design Minimum Value and Maximum Value Here you can enter the range of data values to be represented in the curve column for the defined depth interval Notes e If you ve set up your Curve column to be linked to a Scale Table and if there s either no Scale Table tab in the data file or the Scale Table tab is blank the curve will be plotted using the default settings in the log design This is handy because it offers the option of custom scaling should you wish to us
70. is determined by size declarations in the data file Frame Column If this box is checked the column will be bounded by a solid line rectangle To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Symbol column placed in the design screen You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied To close the Symbol Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Symbol Column right click on the Symbol Column and select Edit Entity or find the Symbol Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button 117 Designing Your Logs Adding a Fill Bar Column Use A Fill Bar column is used to fill user declared depth intervals with a specific pattern How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate depth or elevation intervals listed in a Fill Bar data tab It will plot either 1 a constant user specified pattern from the top to the base of the interval in the Fill Bar column of the same name or 2 if the data lists a keyword for the interval it will plot the keyword specified pattern fill for the interval Such pattern intervals are typically used to note intervals of core sampling or of qualitative nature such as trace show or good porosity Each Fill Bar column on the log must have a separate Fill Bar tab in the data file
71. log design 41 42 0 00 42 43 1 00 43 44 3 00 44 45 4 00 45 46 4 50 46 47 4 00 47 45 3 00 45 49 1 00 Depths at top amp Measured base of intervals values Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Bar Graph column Bar Graph Value column or Interval Text column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited by right clicking in the body of the data tab and selecting Edit Entity Name from the pop up menu Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and the base of the interval at which the measurements were taken If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Interval Data tab and select Fill I nterval Column to fill the columns with regular depth increments Value In this column you enter the numeric alphabetic values measured at the indicated depths to be represented on the log as a bar graph or as labels If you are entering numeric data and if there is no data for a depth interval you can note this with a non numeric entry such as ND or you can leave the interval blank That bar graph interval will just be omitted from the column Shortcut If you already have this quantitative data in a tabular format in another applic
72. log designs cceeeeeeeenees 292 geophysical log designs eee 297 geotechnical log designs 000e 294 Header Footer Items 42 66 133 headers see log headers nneennennn 29 ET 283 Horizontal Line log body 666 125 Horizontal Line datatab 161 images SXDOMING ees 240 header amp footer ccc eeeeee cece eee es 46 e Le Beie ek EE 119 152 FIMO EE 206 208 209 215 217 HAS EAMG Beet le EE 7 Interbed data tab eee eens 162 Interval Data tab cece eens 164 Interval Text Column 130 164 171 JPG files 46 119 152 240 263 269 270 Keyword Ibrar ua 285 keywords 159 162 166 175 185 194 251 252 288 KREE Ee 209 218 LAN CUS aie eee a ee 265 LDFX nles 23 24 26 27 292 legends curve amp Dar orapb 64 inserting into ReportWorks 272 licensing Tree Eeer 8 14 lines header amp footer cc cece cece eee ees 44 IN ReportWorke 266 OO DON EECH 125 127 161 Lithology datatab eee 166 Lithology Description Column 81 196 289 Lithology Pattern Column 78 162 194 288 289 lithology selector WINdOW s sssssssesssn 194 lOGALION Or EE EE 150 304 log body ele lgel IEN 68 data TaD EE EE EE EE EES 148 design eme 66 76 133 designing EE 68 76 LE e EE 69 ee LEE 70 72 75 Log Designer body see log body 68 entity list aerer eenk gie 66 133 footers see log footers 5
73. log inside it has not been saved You can turn this warning off under the LogPlot Options System Settings window How to Save a log plot as an LPT file 1 Be sure the log you wish to save is the active LogView window 234 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs 2 Select the File Save As command or the Save As button Fel from the View window s toolbar 3 Enter the name to assign to the log plot file accessing necessary drives and or directories LogView will automatically append an LPT file name extension to the name you enter 4 Choose the OK button when you are ready for the program to save the log plot See also Distributing Logs to your Clients page 248 Printing Your Log Any time that you have a log displayed in the View window on the screen you can output the plot to a printer Notes The vertical scale of your log cannot be changed in the LogView window The scale must be established before the log is compiled and displayed in the LogView window If you wish to create the log at a different scale you need to switch back to the main program window change the vertical scale setting in the Compile window and recompile the log LogView can however change the number of units plotted on each page at the current scale See Setting Depth Units per Page page 232 How to Print your log 1 Select the Print command from the LogView File menu or click on the Print button EI The program will display the st
74. of the Same name if any in the log design The keywords themselves can be plotted in the Lithology Description column page 81 or they can be omitted as declared in the Log Designer Descriptions entered in the Description column of the Lithology tab will be plotted within the Lithology Description column page 81 of the same name if any in the log design Descriptions may be short or extended and are optional Restrictions There is a limit of 60 characters including spaces for keywords There is a limit of 2000 characters including spaces for extended descriptions How to enter the Lithology data 1 To add a new Lithology tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Lithology Pattern or Lithology Description column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Lithology tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Lithology command to manually insert a Lithology tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Lithology Pattern and or Lithology Description columns in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the pattern and description columns in the current
75. of the output file 2 Start Stop Step Starting Depth The default value here is taken from the DAT file s Setup tab Overwrite this as necessary if you wish to export a different subset of the data Ending Depth The default value here is taken from the DAT file s Setup tab Overwrite this as necessary if you wish to export a different subset of the data Step Interval This is an important setting since it determines the interval at which the curves table will be recorded in the output file LAS format allows a single table with multiple columns If all of your Curves tables and Lithology Percent tables are recorded at the same depth intervals such as 1 foot then simply enter that value such as 1 0 for the step interval If your data are recorded at various depth intervals then you ll need to figure out an optimal output step interval You ll also need to decide on a resampling method below If you ve been requested to submit data at a particular interval then enter that here Resampling Method If the data being exported is listed in the LogPlot file at different depth intervals the program will have to resample the listings to comply with the Step setting defined above Weighted Average Choose this option to have the program perform a distance weighted selection of the data values locating the two closest depths to the resampled interval and averaging their data values based on their distance from the resampl
76. or centimeters The default is 0 1 Designing Your Logs Style Select the desired style for the major tick marks using the displayed radio buttons The offset of the labels is established on the Labels tab of the Scale Bar Options window discussed above Minor Tick Marks Increment Type in the depth or elevation interval at which the small tick marks Should be plotted down the log in your downhole units or in the converted units if Convert is activated Main tab Tick Size Type into this prompt the size length for the minor tick marks in your design units decimal inches or centimeters The default is 0 05 Style Select the desired style for the minor ticks using the displayed radio buttons Scale Bar Options Mam Labels Tick Marks Major Tick a arks Ihcrement Style Tick Size Bn Minor Tick Sa arks Increment Style Tick Size 0 05 In this example the Major ticks would be plotted every 100 units and Minor ticks every 20 units The scale bar labels would be plotted every 100 units with the Major tick marks 8 To accept the displayed settings click the Apply button You will see the Scale Bar in the design screen with the appropriate tick marks labels etc You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 9 To close the Scale Bar Options window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Setup windo
77. page 148 for details 3 Save the data file Turn off Automatic Data Templates E Choose the Options System Settings menu item 2 Remove the check mark from the Data Auto Template option The next time the program starts it will initialize the new blank data file with only the Setup data tab Creating a New Data File for a Log Design The Log Designer s Data Create New Data Template command is used to open a new Data Editor window and populate it with the data tabs that match the items in the current log design Example Your company drills a new borehole and you want to display the data in the log design typically used for all such projects You use LogPlot to open the log design and you use Create New Data Template to create a new data file with tabs for this design You then enter the field data and compile the data into a plottable log Here s a diagram of this workflow 192 Entering your Data Create New gt Data Template Pick creale a Data File Log View Log Design Enter Field Notes into Data File How to Create a new data file for the current log design 1 If necessary click on the Log Designer tab and open the log design you wish to use 2 Choose the Data Create New Data Template command from the Log Designer s Data menu The program will populate this new data file with one or more tabs that correspond in type and name to the entities in the current log design 2 Enter the data
78. placing the component in the log body section You may use the displayed ruler for placement reference Items in the log header or footer cannot be moved into the log body and vice versa Log Body Coordinates The placement of any log body item is stored in terms of horizontal inches or centimeters Unlike the log header and footer the log body items do not have any vertical placement since they will extend the length of the log when it is compiled LogPlot2003 and earlier versions stored placement in screen pixels The Log Designer will open older design files and automatically translate the pixel coordinates into inches centimeters for you 68 Designing Your Logs The horizontal coordinates start at 0 along the left edge of the screen and increase to the right in decimal inches or centimeters The horizontal range of the design page is dependent upon the currently selected printer page size and orientation established under the File Page Print Setup command since a printer with 15 paper will allow more design space wider logs than one with 8 5 paper The paper s right edge will be shown with a red line EF Design untitled dik EE Data Uried Al Header Footer k Log Body al B D E H SS Select Pattern a Descnpton Scale Bar e A lt gt aq al Cuve Cross Plot page edge S E Ei rererence P cent Bar Graph At the left edge of the log bod EJ the horizontal
79. plotted with no depth intervals 82 Designing Your Logs DEPTH LITHOLOGY 16720 I ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white a Very fine grained well sorted firm to brittle blocky to subplaty salt and pepper d Qlauconitic pink fluorescence Small fracture 1 4 at 16727 filled with fluorite E barite and black calcite SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite filled er echelon fractures 16740 SS ANHY DRITE light gray with minor 1 brecciation movement throughout intery al SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite 59 minor chlorite 111 E Interval M Top Baz This example illustrates both the top and the base depths displayed as positive values within parentheses LIEPTH LITHOLOGY 16729 l WW 16720 16734 ARENACEOUS mee LIMESTONE gray white very fine 2 grained well sorted firmto brittle blocky to sub platy salt and pepper glauconitic d pink fluorescence Small fracture 144 Y at Ba 16727 filled with fluorite barte and black 16730 BEES calcite 16734 16740 SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite filled en echelon fractures 16740 16740 16744 ANHY DRITE light oray 4 With minor brecciation movement A throughout interval 16744 16752 SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite 555 minor EIER chlorite 16 j Interval jw Top jw Base Appearance Ww Positive Depth Iw Parentheses f New Line If you turn on either or bot
80. positive or negative depths but be sure you re consistent throughout the data Columns 2 amp 3 These columns list the actual measurements at the listed depths These measurements will be plotted as point to point curves The Column Names The names displayed as column headers within the Cross Plot Curves data tab are used to match the data to the curve names in the Cross Plot Curve column in the log design For example the data in the Neutron Porosity column will be plotted as declared for the Neutron Porosity curve in the log design These names were entered when the tab was first created above To change the names of the headers right click on any cell in the Cross Plot Curves window and select the Edit Multi Column Headers command The Data Listing To enter the actual curve data into the Cross Plot Curves data page cells you can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of one row to the beginning of the next Shortcut If you already have this quantitative data in a tabular format in another application you can copy the data there and then paste it into the Cross Plot Curves tab using the Edit Paste command If there is no data for a depth you may note this with a non numeric entry such as ND or you may leave the interval blank If the curve is to be plotted as a line the line will be broken where there is no data If the curve is to be plotted as a filled curve then the no data entri
81. recommend that you use the most recent versions of both LogPlot and LogView available from our web site This assures that LogPlot and LogView will talk well with one another and that you have all the newest bells and whistles 1 For LogPlot updates go to http www rockware com support updates html and click on the LogPlot 7 link 2 For LogView updates go to http www rockware com and click on the Download tab Fill in your name and email address and click the Download Now button Locate LogView in the next list it s in the right hand column you may need to scroll down a little in the Free Downloads section For both products you need to save the downloaded file to your temp folder on your computer To install either program just double click on the downloaded file and the installation program will be launched When updating be sure to make backup copies of any system libraries patterns keywords symbols or data files that have the same names as the factory versions so that your work won t be overwritten LogView is freely distributable feel free to include its installation program in emails or on disks to clients along with completed LPT logs for their viewing and printing Checking the page size When compiling your logs remember that the page size is stored in the log design or LDFX file The page size is based on the current printer you have set as default and the paper size defined for that printer This i
82. select the symbol to be inserted and to choose its color In LogPlot you can choose between e Vector symbols whose designs are created with lines drawn in the Symbol Editor and e Bitmap symbols whose designs can be imported from small bitmap images you create in any paint style program These symbol libraries are accessed by clicking on the vector symbols or bitmap symbols tabs Selecting Vector Symbols The Select Symbol window is displayed when you insert a symbol in a log design s header or footer or when you are entering data in a Symbol data tab It s also available when you select the Tools Edit Symbols menu option To work with vector or line based symbols click on the Vector Symbols tab By contrast bitmap symbols are created from BMP images This window is used to select the symbol to be inserted and to choose its color It is also used to manage the Symbol file save changes open a different file to create a printable index of the symbols and to access the Symbol Editor Load currently selected Move symbols symbol into Symbol Editor within current file pckUtil Sym Current symbol file Open new save current import other symbol file Currently selected symbol Symbol number Accept Cancel Create a graphic where cursor is changes changes index to the symbols currently pointing and exit and exit 257 Other LogPlot Tools See the LogPlot Help messages Help Contents
83. selected File menu Print Page Setup command Vertically Headers 1 and 2 and Footers 1 and 2 can be up to about 10 5 inches 26 7 cm in length though realistically you ll probably design them significantly shorter than that Report headers can occupy a full page Any unused space below the last header and footer item will be truncated Any white space above the header and footer will not be truncated The Reference Grid and Snapping Items To aid you in placing your design entities the Log Designer offers a reference grid If activated the program will display a grid of dots in the header footer and log body portion of the design screen The resolution of the grid e g spacing of dots in decimal inches or centimeters can be determined by you 34 Designing Your Logs _ FIELD BOREHOLE LOG PROJECT NUMBER M99166 FELO BOOK hee Mee eet Behn eee LOCATION JOVER THERAINBOW GROUAMD SE LORILLING CO MeEACHRANG SON ren DRILLING METHOD AIRROTARY 00 FIELD PARTY Rm Reference grid is on at 0 125 in spacing E d EK FIELD BOREHOLE LOG PROJECT NUMBER 1991 66 FIELD BOOK PROJECT NAME TAC TOTAL DEPT LOCATION OVER THE RAINBOW GROUND SL DRILLING Co McEACHRAN amp SON DRILLING METHOD AIR ROTARY Depth i FIELD PARTY Minden Hartley Reference grid is off Ee 1250 44 In addition to the display of the reference grid you can also acti
84. specific printer settings When you have established the printer settings to your satisfaction choose the OK button to return to the LogPlot menu Note that once your printer is set up within the program you will not need to re select it unless the setup changes in some way Next select the Data Editor s File Printer Font command to establish the font type to be used in printing the data file s text listing In the displayed window select from the available fonts font styles sizes and effects by clicking on your choices Entering your Data Click on the OK button in the Printer Font dialog box to return to the Data Editor window 4 Then to send the data file to the selected printer select the Print command from the Data Editor s File menu When you select this command the program will display a dialog box displaying print options specific to your printer Choose the OK button when you are ready to have the file printed Note that the file is printed in its continuous text form as it is stored on disk It will not be organized into tabular pages as it is displayed in the editor For example a file that looks like this in the Editor AB Desion borehole log ldi Has Data Lithology dat 3 E SETUP E text E Lithology 0 450 0 0 0 Comments Last Modified 2 26 2007 Suggested vertical scaling 50 unitsfinch Suggested design Lithology1 ldfx simple lithology Use LogPlot ke Bock pat
85. tab will be plotted on the log within the Well Column page 121 of the same name Restrictions There is a limit of 60 characters including spaces for keywords 185 Entering Your Data How to enter the Well Construction data L 186 To add a new Well Column tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Well Construction column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Well Column tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Well Column command to manually insert a Well Column tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Well Construction column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Well Construction columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Well Column tab labeled with the selected name Enter the depth diameter keyword and offset information This example illustrates how you enter data into the tab Well column identifier to match column name in the log design Well Construction TTT Top Base Outer Diam Inner Diam Material Foo
86. the currently selected item Delete the currently selected item m H L A Load Save Add Edit Delete Data File LogDesign File Top Bottom Scale Continuous Report Page Print jd Log Lpt Name CAD acuments an C Documents and O False False True C Documents and Gei False False 2 Select the Add button to add a new action to the listing The program will now display the Batch Editor dialog box where you can specify file names and settings for the new batch item 3 First you need to select the name of the data file to compile Click on the Browse Data Files button and locate the desired LogPlot data file accessing other directories as necessary Click on the file name to highlight it and then click OK to select the file and return to the Batch Editor window 229 Compiling Your Logs The The program will scan the data file s Setup tab and insert the Top Depth and Bottom Depth settings into the Batch Editor window You may override these if necessary Next you need to specify the name of the LogDesign File LDFX that contains the blueprint for the log Click on the Browse Format Files button to locate the LDFX file for the selected data file Click on the file name to highlight it and click OK to select it Back at the Batch Editor window you can specify both the plotting scale for the data and whether a header is to be inserted on every page For more information see Log Settings page 275
87. the data page above and can be edited by right clicking in the body of the data tab and choosing the Edit Entity Name option from the pop up menu Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and the base of the interval that is to be filled with a pattern You may list multiple intervals for a single column If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either negative or positive values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Fill This optional data field can be used to customize the fill for the fillbar column If you leave this column blank the fillbar interval will be filled with the default pattern defined for the Fillbar column in the log design If you enter a keyword here the fillbar interval will be filled with the pattern that is associated with keyword Like a Lithology data tab this field links to the current Keyword Table In this way you can specify the pattern design background and foreground colors pattern density and fill percent Keywords may be comprised of one or more words and are limited to 60 characters including spaces Shortcut Rather than typing in the keyword name just double click on the Fill cell to bring up the Lithology Selector window Here you can pick from the available Entering your Data keywords in the current keyword file and view the pattern that is associated with them E f A good is defined
88. the data file in a column to the right of the graphic diagram Use the Font button and color box to define 123 Designing Your Logs the font style and color for the captions See the Well Construction Data setup for information about how the caption text is entered Diagram lt gt Caption Use this slider bar to define how much of the well construction column is to be used by the diagram and how much is to be used by the captions as a percent Some examples are shown below though you should note that you can define other percentages than those shown here just by dragging the slider bar SURFACE a SURFACE a GEO TED GRO Teo ANNULUS ANNULUS PEDO TED AALS GROU TED BA TED ANNULUS ANW ILLS THREADED JOINTS GROU TED ANNULUS THREADED JANTS BLAME BLANK a DR Ate BEM TONITE HI ANA M SEW TOMATE BEN TONITE PLIG BEN TONITE PLUS BLAWK BLANK BEN TONITE PLIG BEN TONITE PLUG GFA WEL JALANA Pre SCREEN BLANK eve SCREEN D D E E DH D F i U D E E D D i i 1 DH U T PYE SCREEN PFC SCREEN SCREEN BEN TOMITE SEN TOMTE BEN TONITE 25 diagram 75 caption 50 diagram 50 caption 75 diagram 25 caption Disgram 25 Caption 75 Diagram OU steen 50 Diagram 75 Caption 25 IS Diagrann 100 US Diagram 100 US Diagram 1004 100 Caption US 100 Caption DS 100 Caption 0 Plot Leader Lines Insert a check here to include lines between the captions and the construction item
89. the log design information Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Vertical Text command to manually insert a Vertical Text tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Vertical Text column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Vertical Text columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Vertical Text tab labeled with the selected name Enter the text information This example illustrates how you enter data into the tab Entering your Data Yertical text identifiers to match the column names in the log design Age Top ase Tex upto 255 characters IW 2000 2102 Tertiary Group Top Base Text Cup to 255 characters A 2000 2063 Sweetwater Depth interval 20163 um Brey for listed text Text to be plotted in listed interval Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Vertical Text column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and the base of the interval in which you want the text to be plotted If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as eithe
90. the recommended settings the default library will be found in My Documents LogPlot 7 System Rockutil sym Contour Line Vector Font Click on the small open file button to browse for a somewhat obscure RockWorks program file used to draw contour line labels in some diagrams In RockWorks this library is hard wired to be found in the tables folder inside the the program folder By default this would be in Program Files RockWare ReportWorks2006 Tables Vfonts tab 3 Click OK to close the window Drawing Tools Working with Layers ReportWorks allows you to organize the different items on a page into different layers These are groups of items that can be displayed or hidden with the click of a button For example you might keep your static legend items company logos maybe a pattern index in one layer while document specific RockPlot LogPlot or bitmap images might be kept ina separate layer Opening the program or creating a new ReportWorks document generates a single layer named Layer 1 Subsequent items that are drawn or inserted into the page are done so in that layer until a new layer is created e To add a layer to the current document choose the Tools New Layer menu item or click on the New Layer button The program will add a new layer entry into the data pane along the left side of the window Be sure to highlight a particular layer prior to adding items to your document items are always added to the currently highl
91. the toolbar buttons 3 You can copy a particular depth to the clipboard using LogView s Edit Copy Depth Ctrl D command With the mouse pointing to the location in question press the Ctrl key while you type the D key and the depth or elevation shown in the title bar will be copied to the clipboard You can paste this number into another document using its Paste command Saving Your Log When you have compiled a log and it is displayed on the screen in an untitled View window you can save your log plot on disk so that you can re open it at a later time for viewing or printing Notes Log diagrams that you create in the LogPlot program are stored on disk in a log plot format with an LPT file name extension This is the only type of plot file that LogPlot creates opens or Saves You can export logs to a different graphic file format see exporting logs LPT files store the log scaling page size and paper orientation landscape versus portrait so that when reopened they should appear as they did when first created You can also store the pattern and symbol designs in the LPT file rather than linking to external files a setting you can establish prior to compiling the log Bitmap images in the log header footer or log body can also be either linked or embedded in the LPT file these settings are established in the log design In typical Windows fashion LogPlot will normally warn you if you try to close the View window if the
92. then click OK The log will be displayed on the screen at the new page size to match your printer b If your paper is considerably smaller than the log you should simply click OK WITHOUT clicking Set Default Size The program will warn you that the log is larger than your printer paper and ask Do you want to fix you should click No The log will be displayed on the screen at full size but if you then try to print it may be clipped 3 You can view the log and or print the log with caveats noted above Opening a Log with a New Page Size If you have saved a log plot on disk as an LPT file it is possible to re open later it into a LogView window for viewing exporting and printing In most cases you will use the File Open command to re open the LPT file using its default page settings However there may be times when you want to display an existing log on a page of a different length such as if you have a multi page log that you wish to repaginate to a single long page for printing to a continuous PDF file or you need to set up the log for a different page size for a service bureau In this case you can use the File Open with Page Dimensions option Example Let s say you have a 3 page log saved as an LPT file originally compiled for letter sized paper as a continuous log 237 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs This log printed fine on your banner printer the three pages chained continuously with no
93. they are automatically saved in the LPT file Once you re done working with the LPT file you may want to return to the main LogPlot window and return to your default settings using the File Page Print Setup option Opening Log Plot Files using the File Manager How to Open a Single Log Plot File 1 Expand the File Manager s Logs heading as necessary 239 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs 2 Double click on the LPT file you wish to open LogPlot will open the selected graphic log into the Log View window You can have multiple LPT files open at the same time Open Multiple Log Plot Files 1 Expand the File Manager s Logs heading as necessary 2 Insert a check mark next to the names of the LPT files you wish to open 3 Right click in the File Manager 4 Choose Open Selected Files from the pop up menu m Project Cl AG Design bor E AGmfh Project i BE Data P dat A Ge RockWorks DB ae Ele A1 Ep LogDesign div If EP SETUP E Logs fr ot M Hab Ge WW KH i bet e egen Open Selected Files A E bh It Compile Selected Files Select All Unselect All Refresh Files Hide LogPlot will open the selected logs into their own Log View windows Exporting Your Log When you have compiled a log and it is displayed on the screen you may Save it in a native LogPlot format LPT as discussed under Saving Your Log or you may Save the log in other more universal graphic formats Log export is availab
94. to fill 100 of the column No keywords are defined for the Cores column so the fat is defined to fill _ entire column is filled 75 of the column trace is defined to fill 50 of the column Examples You could leave the Fill column blank for a Fillbar column displaying cored intervals in the borehole All intervals would be displayed with the default pattern design You could define custom keywords for some kind of measured intervals good show versus poor show varying the colors patterns and even percent fill of the column You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the Fillbar tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Horizontal Line Tab Use The Horizontal Line tab is used to enter one or more depth levels at which a horizontal line is to be plotted across a portion of the log or across the entire log as set up in the log design This is often used to create a solid line at the lowest depth in the log If a second unequal depth is specified in this tab then the line will be plotted at an angle between the two depths In the log design you can request that the horizontal line be plotted at regular depth increments in addition to the manually declared depths done here If you want the lines plotted at regular intervals only you need not create a data tab Corresponding lo
95. to fill the columns with regular depth increments If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Columns 3 22 These columns represent the rock types for which you will be declaring percentage representation The rock type keywords are displayed as column headers The Column Names Entering your Data To change the names of the headers or to add or remove headers right click on any cell in the Percent window and select the Edit Percentage Headers command The program will display the Pattern Percentage Editor window In this window is listed the keywords that are to be displayed in the Percent data tab The top down order in the listing corresponds to the left right order of the column headings See page 200 The Data Listing To enter the actual percentage data into the Percent data page cells you can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of one row to the beginning of the next The relative percentage values on each row must add up to a value less than or equal to 100 Shortcut If you already have this percentage data in a tabular format in another application you can copy the data there and then paste it into the Percentage tab using the Edit Paste command See also Importing Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for m
96. to insert a graphic symbol into an existing ReportWorks page You can insert a symbol from the RockWare symbol library or you can choose from some generic symbol shapes 1 Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary Click on the Symbol toolbar button CH or choose the Tools Symbol menu command 3 Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the symbol is to be placed and click the left mouse button to insert it You will see the symbol displayed on the page 4 Double click on the symbol to access its settings or right click on the symbol and choose Properties 5 Select the symbol style fill outline etc and click Apply to enforce these settings See the help messages for details Click Close to close the Symbol Options window 6 Resize the symbol as you wish by clicking on one of the corner handles and dragging larger or smaller If the Equal Scales option was selected the horizontal to vertical aspect of the symbol will remain the same as you resize 7 Reposition the symbol as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the symbol and dragging it to the new location Drawing Lines Polylines Polygons and Rectangles on a ReportWorks Page Use the Reportworks Tools menu commands or toolbar buttons to draw straight lines multi segmented lines closed polygons and rectangles in an existing ReportWorks page You can adjust the line style thickess and color and the fill for polygons and rectangles
97. to open a log design since its preview can be 283 Reference 10 11 12 284 displayed helping you to confirm you re opening the intended file Remove this check mark to disable this automatic preview creation The preview files are saved in the same folder as the LDF files with a naming convention filename preview jpg where filename is the name of the LDF file Show Log Design Preview If you have requested that Log Designer create J PG previews insert a check here to have these previews displayed when you browse to open a log design Show Hints If this setting is checked the program will display small explanations or hints about program buttons when you position the pointer over them Hints are also displayed in the File Manager pane when you point the cursor at file names displaying date size Allow Data Tabs to be Dragged If this setting is checked you can click on the stick up tabs in the data editor window and drag the tabs to a new location If left unchecked this ability is turned off Data Auto Template When the LogPlot is started up it always loads the most recently used log design as default It also starts with a new untitled data file in the Data Editor window By default the untitled startup data file will be populated with a complete set of data tabs to match the default log design If you turn off the Data Auto Template the program will initialize the untitled startup data file with only a
98. up to approximately 10 5 inches in length You may use the scroll bars provided at the bottom and along the right side of the header to view portions of the header than you cannot currently see You may also change the displayed size of the header work area by positioning your pointer on the boundary bar at the bottom of the header and dragging it up or down as appropriate You can design three distinct header designs a Report header which can precede the first page of the log header 1 which is typically printed at the top of the first page and header 2 which typically displays on middle and end pages of the log All are optional When you invoke the New command File menu to create a new log design the program will display a blank design screen You may then insert a log header item by selecting one of the header toolbar buttons and placing the item in the log header section You may use the displayed ruler for horizontal placement reference Items in the log header cannot be moved into the log body and vice versa However header items can be copied into and from the log footer Log Footer I ntroduction Log footers are plotted at the bottom of a log or at the bottom of each log page Like the header they can contain textual information company name date etc column labels company logos etc The footer text can be static unchanging or can change from log to log Log footers can also contain the new Notes tool for wrapping
99. with column titles only to serve as a template for entering data for later import It will format the template based on the current DAT file Multiple Logs Template Only no data Choose this if you want to generate worksheets in Excel with column titles only to serve as a template for entering data for later import It will format the template based on all open DAT files Current Log Choose this option if you also want to export the data listed within the LogPlot datasheets for the current DAT file All Open Logs Choose this option to export the data listed within all open DAT files 4 Click OK LogPlot will generate an Excel format file containing a worksheet for each data tab each with column headings identifying the data listed with or without actual data for the current DAT file or all DAT files as you requested The file will be loaded into Excel See also Excel File Format Help Contents Entering Your Data Exporting Data Exporting RockWorks2004 2002 Borehole Files 221 Entering Your Data RockWare has a stand alone program designed to read one or more LogPlot DAT files and reformat them to a RockWorks2004 2002 BH borehole file format This program is available free of charge from the RockWare web site It does not require an unlocking code RockWorks2006 can import LogPlot DAT files directly and no separate import program is needed See Help Contents Entering Your Data Exporting Data for more infor
100. within the column Symbol If you have requested a Curve Style that includes symbols you can click on the Symbol example to select the symbol type and color Style Select one of the symbol shapes and fills from the drop down list at the top of the pop up window Color Choose a color for the curve symbols by clicking on the box and selecting a color Size Choose Small Medium or Large which represent percent of column width If the pre set sizes are too small or too large for your liking you can select Other and enter a preferred percent value in the prompt box Set up the curve Wrap LogPlot contains a tool to wrap a curve if the plotted data exceeds the maximum value of the column Select one of the options None If this option is selected the curve will be plotted beyond the boundary of the column if the data value exceeds the maximum value of the column Truncate With this option the curve plot will be truncated at the column border if the data value exceeds the maximum value of the column Wrap This option will wrap the curve back to its baseline if the data value exceeds the maximum value of the column When wrapped the curve column then takes on the next data range for the plotting of the curve If the wrapped data exceeds the maximum again the program will continue to wrap to the baseline again Compare the following examples of a block curve in which the high data values of 101 150 plot off the column no wrap
101. you drag you ll see a rubber band image of the shape s outline The program will display the Raster Options dialog box Click on the Raster tab to define the bitmap image to be placed on the page and to define its scaling and settings File Browse for image file to be inserted into the space you defined You can also choose whether the file will be linked to the ReportWorks document or embedded within it Scaling Choose from Best Fit horizontal scale vertical scale or Stretch the image will be stretched to fill the available space Establish other diagram settings margins etc Click on the Outline tab to define any outline color and line style Click Apply to apply the settings you ve chosen Click Close to close the Raster Options window You can access the image s options at any time by double clicking on the image or by right clicking and choosing Properties You can resize the image block by first single clicking on the image to see the boundary handles Then click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or edges and drag to the new position Release the mouse button when the boundary s edges are in the 269 ReportWorks correct position The raster image will be redrawn within the new boundary using the selected stretch or best fit scaling you ve selected 9 Reposition the image as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and dragging it to the new location Inserting a Geo Referenced Rast
102. your printer s documentation regarding specific printer settings Compiling Display Tips Errors During Compiling If there is a syntax error within your data file the compilation process Log Compile a Log or Compile All commands will halt the program will display a message box and it will display the tab in which the error has occurred The exact contents of the message box will vary depending on the type of error Check the required format for the data tab s See LogPlot Data Format page 148 When you have made the necessary corrections try compiling again Note that you do not need to save the data file prior to recompiling LogPlot will read the data directly from the Editor window Don t forget to save the changes you make however prior to quitting the program or closing the data file Missing Lithologic Patterns If your log compiles successfully but you are missing pattern blocks for some lithologic intervals there s probably a keyword problem Check the following e Be sure that the keyword you used for that interval is declared in the Keyword Editor Click on the Lithology tab containing the keywords Double click on the keyword for the missing interval If that keyword is not displayed in the Lithology Selector window click the Edit Keywords button and add the keyword to the list See the instructions under Editing Keywords The Keyword Editor can also be accessed directly from the Tools Edit Keywords opt
103. 000 0 5 57 64 19 z234 match column names in the 7000 5 5 65 64 19 345 log design 2001 0 5 92 66 91 456 7001 5 6 18 71 02 567 7002 0 6 70 76 54 675 7002 5 7 39 53 37 Fag 7003 0 7 92 90 20 234 0 2003 5 5 26 04 25 259 5 Za OO n CA OU JAC A Depths Measured Yalues Depth In this column you must list the depth or elevation at which the measurements were taken 170 Entering your Data Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Multi Curve tab and select Fill Depth Column to fill the column with regular depth increments If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as positive or negative values but be sure to be consistent throughout the data Columns 2 41 These columns list the actual measurements at the listed depths These measurements will be plotted as point to point curves The Column Names The names displayed as column headers within the Multi Curve data tab are used to match the data to particular curve columns in the log design For example data listed in a RLM column will be plotted in the Curve Column named RLM in the log s design and the data in the RSFO column will be plotted in the RSFO Curve Column in the log s design These names were entered when the tab was first created above To change the names of the headers or to add or remove headers right click on any cell in the Multi Curve window and select Edit Multi Column Headers from the pop up menu
104. 015 190 Entering your Data If you are plotting just a subset of the data the elevation labels will be adjusted accordingly Elevation Data Elevation Scale If your LogPlot data are in elevations this sets up a different scenario To get them to plot as elevations you should set your Scale Bar to Depths and be sure the Positive Depths checkbox in the Compile window is not activated Top of log in elev ations Base of log in elevations Start Depth Ending Depth Northing Elewation KE 4033 3943 106 4033 y coordinate location of well not used 7 coordinate e g collar elevation of well Descriptions How the L L Limestone depth T E bar looks when IT the log is OAS SAS compiled in oe Sandstone LogPlot oe Automatic Data File Tools LogPlot contains these very handy tools for automatic linking of your data and design files and for trouble shooting linking problems e Automatic Data Template Each time you start up the LogPlot program it will display a Data Editor window complete with all the applicable tabs for the current log design e Create New Data Template is available in the Log Designer window s Data menu Use this tool to create a brand new data file with blank data tabs that match the items in the current log design e Update Data Template from Log Design is available in the Data Editor s Data menu It is used to update an existing data file for the items contained in the current l
105. 036 2039 Shale gray abundant PYRITE CHLORITIZED odiferot or alteration Ka S bo LOST CIRCULATION NO SAMPLE Depth at top amp base Optional contact lines e RECOVERED i for top of interval of intervals P Dolomite light gray fine grained quartz g S Se stringers minorskarn very minor Keyword for intervals Optional description for intervals brecciation throughout interval type in or double click type or double click Shale gray abundant PYRITE CHLORITIZED odiferous Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Lithology Pattern and or Lithology Description column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited by right clicking in the body of the data tab and selecting Edit Entity Name from the pop up menu Top Base n these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and the base of the lithologic interval being described on that row If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be either negative or positive values be sure to be consistent throughout the data file Shortcut Right click on any data column in the Lithology tab and select Fill Interval Column New Comments If you leave the Base depth blank you can plot comments within a larger description interval 167 Entering Your Data 168 Description TOPSOIL Lithology Description up to 2000 Character gt 0 1
106. 30 headers see log headers s i 29 IALPOOUCTION DEE 21 log design files LDFX 23 24 26 27 292 log footers data CAS EE 148 design eme 42 66 133 general30 31 32 33 34 36 38 41 69 log headers data tabs naredne a 148 design eme 42 66 133 general 29 31 32 33 34 36 38 69 ee En gute EE 275 LogPlot compiling Iogs 223 227 229 Data Editor see Data Editor 135 file manager see File Manager 17 137 getting started 5 12 23 139 301 WMS CaN DEET 7 introduction 5 14 21 23 135 139 libraries s 251 253 257 285 ein LE nl ME 8 14 Log Designer see Log Designer 21 Log View see Log View 231 new features cee eee ee eee eee eee eeeeee ees 2 SaMmiple Mee 292 SEET 223 275 SYSTEM requirements ccceee eee eeeees 7 URIOCKIN Oinean tenets 8 14 logs el e EPEE T EE E ET 223 GOS QIANG EE 21 entering data TOM cise 135 else 292 ne EE 231 LOQVICW NNN ENNEN ENN 231 232 235 248 LPT files 234 235 236 237 239 240 248 Nee UA 27 lala 143 MINING log GESIGNS cc cceeeeeeeeeee eens 298 moving entities in Log Designer 38 72 MUCIOg designs 298 Multi Curve data tab 169 201 Multi Interval data tab 171 201 new Gata Tesne 140 191 192 data aleet 144 e te Bel e ln BEE 24 ReportWorks document 05 262 VIEW WINCOW c cece cece eee eeeeneeeees 235 New Data Item NNN 144 148 new features in L
107. 46 Designing Your Logs 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button HeaderFooter S if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Header Footer Picture button el am the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Picture The pointer will change shape to a kez for placing the picture 4 Place the cursor where you want the upper left corner of the picture to be in the header or footer portion of the design screen and click the left mouse button to insert it The program will display the Setup window and you ll see a rectangle labeled no image in the log design 5 Enter the requested information Select Click on this button in the lower right portion of the window to browse for the name of the image to be inserted into the design accessing other folders as necessary The program can read BMP JPG WMF EMF PCX PNG TGA and TIFF format files When you have located the file click on its name and then click the Open button to select it You will be returned to the Graphic Setup window and the image will be shown in the background in the design Position These coordinates determine the placement of the rectangle in the header or footer of the log Vertical Y coordinate for the top of the picture Position Top 0 0938 Horizontal xX elt ch i coordinate for 0 375 ao 1 2168 dad pial x
108. 5 Because the graphic part of the log is exported as a JPEG image you need to establish these J PEG settings 245 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Compression quality Use the slider bar to select also the compression style Generally the greater the compression you select by dragging the slider bar to the left the lesser the output quality Because the JPEG graphic format stores information very efficiently you might start with relatively low compression to achieve better quality Pixels Inch In this prompt type in the number of bitmap pixels you want per horizontal and vertical inch of the JPEG image For display on screen the default settings of 96 your screen pixels per inch should work fine Because HTML is designed primarily to be a screen display tool for logs we don t usually recommend higher resolution for these JPEG pages or the logs will look huge D View in browser Insert a check here if you want your default web browser to be launched automatically when the export is complete and to load the log s HTML table and linked J PG files in the browser for viewing LogPlot will launch the browser that is associated in Windows with HTML or HTM file name extensions 7 Click OK to proceed The program will create JPG images of each page of your log naming each the same file name as that assigned to the HTML file followed by a _page_1 for the first page page 2 for the second etc It will then create an HTML f
109. 50 0 300 60 5 0 PA SCREEN PAC SCREEN 79 0 400 5 0 0 0 PANIC SCREEN PANIC SCREEN 20 0 100 0 10 0 6 0 GROUTED ANNULUS GROUTED ANNULUS y 50 0 485 0 6 0 0 0 BENTONITE EFENTONITE S 25 0 1000 6 0 0 0 CONCRETE PLUS CONCRETE PLUS if o 50 L5 D BLANK 1 E 50 60 L BENTONITE PLUG 1 BENTONITE PLUG 40 62 15 0 BLANK E o ep 15 0 BLANK 1 i 3 ep 70 LS d BENTONITE PLUG 1 BENTONITE PLUG ial 70 77 5 15 d BLANK l You may use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell within the Well Column tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Depth versus Elevation Your log data that you enter in the LogPlot program will typically be entered as depths down the drill hole The depths can be entered as either positive values depth at top of log O0 depth at base of log 500 or as negative values depth at top of log 0 depth at base of log 500 You may also enter the data as elevations Your log might start at an elevation of 2500 feet elevation and extend down 500 feet to an elevation of 2000 feet LogPlot will accept both types of data but you need to follow these guidelines to get the correct values to be plotted on the scale bar Depth Data Depth Scale If your LogPlot data are in depths and you select a depth Scale Bar the uppermost depth label will be equal to the top of the log listed in the LogPlot data file on the Setup tab An excerpt from a data fi
110. 8 Reference EE 275 Beieleit EEN 275 lag ei elle Mey Wile l TiO Sinna ener er meee nee mee ete metre ete eee eee ee ee ee 288 agidichi hls ite ne A ee ee ere ere a ere 291 Sample Log Designs and Data Files ccccccccee eee ceeee eee eeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessennneees 292 Installed Files and File Types EE 299 Command Ling EXECUHOM EE 301 Data FORMAL E 302 RNE E Chern en at AE tn E A A EE Te EE rT Te 303 Introduction Welcome Welcome to LogPlot 7 LogPlot 7 is the newest version of the log plotting software published by RockWare Inc It reads user created or imported data files that contain downhole descriptive quantitative and other data and plots these data as graphic strip logs The format or blueprint of the logs the components and their locations is designed within the Log Designer included with LogPlot 7 LogPlot has been used in the environmental geotechnical mining and petroleum industries since 1983 Getting started with this program involves the following steps refer to the indicated chapters for more information Note that this manual is a subset of the more complete online help available in the program s Help menu Main Topics ge the tutorial These acquaint you with the program and lead you through the design data compile and viewing steps The tutorial is available in the online help messages only using the Help Tutorial menu option yi Designing your log Using the built in Log D
111. Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Edit Text Setup window click the Close button The text label you specified will be displayed on the screen at the declared location Reposition the Text See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Text Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the text item right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the text item in the View Entity List and choose the Load Item button Adding Static Header Footer Notes Use The Header Footer Static Notes item displays multi line wrapping text in the log header or footer The text to be plotted is entered into the log design for text that won t change from log to log such as company names and addresses or column headings You might think of Static Notes as expanded Static Text labels If you want to enter the Notes text in the data file for text that will change from log to log use the Edit Notes item This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands How to Add static header footer notes 1 Access the Log Designer window 59 Designing Your Logs 2 In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button Header Foot N SE if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Static Note button krom the Log Designer tool pane
112. BER PROJECT NAME LOCATION etc are Static Text items that will remain constant each time this log is compiled with data The accompanying text 1991 66 TAC OVER THE RAINBOW etc are Edit Text items whose text is listed in the data file and may change each time this log format is compiled with new data 52 Designing Your Logs FIELD BOREHOLE LOG Static Text PROJECT NUMBER 1991 66 Edit Text PROJECT NAME TAC LOCATION OVER THE RAINBOW DRILLING CO McEACHRAN amp SON DRILLING METHOD AIR ROTARY FIELD PARTY Minden Hartley GEOLOGIST McEachran DATE BEGUM GIMSE DATE COMPLETED GAMAE How to Add Static Header Footer Text 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button Header F oct N SE if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Static Text button EI the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Static Text The pointer will change shape to JS for marking the desired label position on the design screen 4 Place the cursor at the intended location in the header or footer for the handle of the label and click the mouse button once The position of the handle relative to the text label itself depends on the horizontal alignment left center right and the vertical alignment top bottom See the alignment settings below The program will
113. CGI SETUP E TEXT Samples Sampling Mel Ending Depth Easting 0 2 15 0 LogPlot data files DAT RockWorks borehole records from MDB Comments ast Modified 2 20 2007 Suggested design file borehole log IdFx field borehole log Log Design files LDFX and LDF Suggested vertical scaling 2 5 units inch continuous no Use LogPlot ke RockUtil pat Log Plot files LPT se LogPlo y Boch IO pa Check boxes are used to open multiple fies at once File Manager Right Click Options If you right click anywhere in the File Manager pane you ll see the following options Open Selected Files Any DAT LPT and RockWorks boreholes that are checked will be opened into their respective windows Compile Selected Files Any DAT files that are checked will be compiled using the currently active log design Select All Inserts a check mark in all listed DAT LPT and RockWorks borehole files Log Design files are not shown with a check box because you can only have one design open at a time Unselect All Removes check marks from all available boxes Refresh Files Reloads the names of the files in the current project folder Hide Hides the File Manager Pane You can re activate the display of the pane using the Window Show File Manager option Displaying Hiding Resizing the File Manager Pane 18 Hiding the pane Select the Window Show File Manager option in the main LogPlot menu to remo
114. Click on the line sample below this prompt to select the line style and color for the leaders Arrows Insert a check here to include an arrow head on the leader line It will be plotted in the same color as defined for the line 7 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Well Construction column displayed in the design screen according to your settings You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 8 To close the Well Construction Setup window click the Close button 124 Designing Your Logs Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Well Construction Column right click on the Well Construction Column and select Edit Entity or find the Well Construction Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding Horizontal Log Body Lines Use The Horizontal Line tool is used to plot a horizontal line of user defined length and style at regular depth intervals AND OR at specific user declared depths in the body of the log This could be used to plot a line at the total depth level in the log How it works If you request regularly spaced horizontal lines here in the log design there s nothing more you need to do the program will plot the lines at the specified intervals down the log If you wish to declare specific depths for the line s you can do so with Horizontal L
115. Click on the tab into which you wish to import the DBF data You can insert a new data tab if necessary Select the Data Editor s File menu and choose the I mport command From the pop up menu select the DBF command Enter the requested information into this first import screen DBF Database Name Click on the open file button to the right of the prompt to select the name of the DBF file whose contents are to be imported This file must have a DBF extension Import to This determines the data tab into which the data is to be imported The default will be the current front most tab but you may click on the arrows to advance through the list of tabs The selected tab will be brought to the foreground of the Editor The tabs will be listed by their names except for Multi Curve and Multi Interval Data tabs which have multiple names If necessary you can move the import window to the side as you scroll through the tab names to see which tab is on top Starting at Row Enter the row number in the specified data tab at which the imported data listing should start Note that the imported data will always start in the first column though you can manually select the import column order Click Next to advance to the next screen where you can assign specific DBF fields to specific columns in the selected data tab The first column of items labeled Columns corresponds to the columns in the active data tab The second column of values label
116. Default Listing Coordinates Default Lesting anes ail Ferme ScseBa Logged By Dofauk Listing Daro Deich Listing l Fluid Default Lasting 4 A LR d D minuity Date File Manager U A ag e a Log Header L grotect gt o chech d EES a E e D mice dal Percent Ba Graph E mal du 1 Cal da g 3 s a re jat Ei Ba Gran Tat gt Po Laf rT obg D Keyword Desceptien rob A E e T T t Mew Venca Simba gt Mew dal Tew waa General P G Mudog da re Lo Bod swe toolbar Lage Peise g ker OS are B am vel Honzortal A Rock DE Corguut Leg j a ogDeng F bn K E a o dectech ki Vera Tadpoles lt gt Erreso geotech D s Lee eres m RW Logging CO Client D st Uage 2 E rego gectocret idx Interval 1 Es Project Detaut Usting ro gececi dt Zeg oni L USADIO 03 Log Footer Sheet Defaut Listing Sieegege Design x Eniogeciech iie toolbar is _ sais E o 0 t Heats Ire Options toolbar B000 per SINGLE B 17 x 10467 C Documents and Settings nciv My Documerts Log nt 7 Samples lErraro geotech7 ifs Status bar The Menu Commands offer file utilities Saving printing etc editing utilities clearing sending items to the back and other options multiple headers header size shifting header items The File Manager shows the data DAT log design LDFX or LDF plot LPT and RockWorks borehole database MDB in the current project folder You can double click or right click on files to open them The
117. EE 119 152 rectangles header amp Tooter eee eeeee eens 45 IN REPOrtWOrkS cccceeeeee eee eeeaees 266 report header 31 ReportWorks Cra WANG en EE 266 drawing SYMDOIS ccceeeeee eee eees 266 exporting EE 263 inserting Iegende eee eeeaees 272 inserting raster images 269 270 inserting RockPlot2D images 268 Inserting scalebars cece eee eeees 271 Reference inserting TEX EE 267 INTFOGUCTION E 261 AY CUS eener 265 page e E 264 page Ein UE 264 RK6 files inserting into ReportWorks 268 RockWorks data 143 215 221 gel 203 RUK Dalles EE 264 RW SV Dn EE 264 RWO TIES ee 262 elle e E 292 save d ta Egeter 145 Og desig SE 26 27 leie GE 234 ReportWorksS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 262 Scale Bar lai ele Bearer cnet tr tee eee 86 174 inserting into ReportWorks 271 Scale Table datatab 177 scaling header amp footer ccc eceeee cece seen es 32 log27 76 275 printing ReportWorks images 264 Select all mbane eee ees 36 70 SENG kee BACK EE 36 SETUP taD EE 150 Shap lO ON e WEE 34 69 Starting the program 12 301 Statie NOTE NEN econ eee le GEG 59 Statie E E 52 SYMbDOl COMM asses ce hee desta eeiss 116 178 Symbol data tab erarnan 178 VADO MEET 264 285 symbols 306 ill e E 258 header amp footer eee ees 50 Dt Jeu EE ee 116 178 IN REPOrtWOrkS earan en aee 266 selecting BEE 257 259 system requir
118. Editor window You can format your descriptive text with spaces and paragraphs In the Description Editor window simply add spaces or carriage returns paragraph markers using the Enter key to format your text If you are typing the descriptions in the Lithology tab s cell use these characters a forward slash followed by an asterisk to note a hard carriage return Entering your Data Description Editor A do bray white well sorted firm to brittle Entering this into the Description Editor saltand pepper glauconitic small fracture 1 4 at 16727 generates this in the Lithology tab Description up to 2000 Characters p gray Wwhite wel sorted Firm to brttle P salt and pepper glauconitic Small fracture 174 at 16727 Arenaceaus Limestone gray white well sorted firm to brittle Sak and pepper glauconittic Small fracture 1 4 at 1727 and this on the compiled log Tip If you need specific depth placement of the non contiguous text you should use the Comments method discussed above You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Multi Curve Tab Use The Multi Curve tab is used to list depths and two or more columns of measured data to be plotted as point to point curves in a Curve column or a Cross Pl
119. Excel must be identical See Excel File Format in the Help messages for details There must be no blank rows within the Excel worksheets Otherwise the import program will stop reading that particular worksheet as soon as a blank row is encountered We HIGHLY recommend that you create a sample file in LogPlot that contains a representation of the data you ll be importing and export that data to Excel either with data or without as a template in order to generate the proper worksheet tabs Use the exported Excel spreadsheet as the guide for formatting the data to be imported into LogPlot How to Import Excel XLS Files 1 Click in any open Data Editor window If none is present create a new Data Editor window 2 Select the File Import Excel menu option The program will display a dialog box 3 Browse for and the desired Excel spreadsheet to be imported These files typically have an XLS file name extension Click on the file s name to select it and click OK to continue LogPlot will read the contents of the Excel file and generate LogPlot data tabs for each worksheet where the data will be listed It will be able to determine based on the structure of the XLS file whether you are importing data for a single well or for multiple wells if the latter then multiple data windows will be created The data is stored in memory only at this point 4 Choose File Save to save each borehole s data as a LogPlot DAT file
120. Finally for this batch item you can select whether the completed graphic log is to be printed insert a check in the Print box and or saved on disk as a Log Plot file insert a check in the Save as LPT file box If you have requested saving as an LPT file click on the Browse Output Files button to enter the name for the LPT file that will be created When all of the information for the data file listed at the top of the window is entered to your satisfaction click on the OK button at the bottom of the Batch Editor window All of the information will be listed on the first line of the Batch Compile window If you want to add another data file to the batch click on the Add button again and repeat this process If you want to edit any of the entries in the Batch Compile window click on the line to be edited and then click on the Edit button at the top of the window The program will retrieve the Batch Editor To delete any of the entries in the Batch Compile window click on the line to be deleted and then select the Delete button at the top of the window To save the listing click the Save button and type in a name for the BTC file When you are ready to process the batch click on the OK button at the bottom of the Batch Compile window program will start with the first data file in the list and compile it into the requested LDFX file at the indicated scale All other possible settings are assumed to be the
121. Footer 1 is typically plotted on the second and subsequent pages of a log You can toggle between these header and footer views using the drop down lists at the bottom of the window 31 Designing Your Logs EE HOLE Drill Hole Default Listing Ss eke Project No Default Listing f Default Listing Elevation Debt Listing Drilling Contractor Default Listing aa ordinates Default Listing ULogged By Default Listing eee Eug Default Listing Discontinuity Data ore Recovery Load Strength Spacing em om RW Logging CO e Client Debut Usteg 221 East St Sule 101 0Golden Co boeken s Project Defaut Listing 90401 USA0tel 303 278 3534 fax HI 278 4009 oe ee Sheet Default Listing 08071 03 E To view or design the first header for example select Header 1 from the list and that will be displayed in the header pane of the design window To view design Footer 2 select that from the list and it will be displayed in the footer pane At compile time you will have the opportunity to specify exactly which headers and footers to use on the first middle last pages of the log if any and whether a header report is to be included All header and footer designs are optional Header and Footer Scaling During the compiling and plotting of the log in LogPlot the header and footer portions of the log are not affected by changes in the vertical
122. Header and Footer Settings These settings are found on the Header Footer tab of the Compile a Log Compile All Logs and Log Settings windows Margin L Margin between Header Footer and Log Body Type in the space that to be inserted between the header and footer and the log body in the compiled log It is expressed in either inches or centimeters depending on the units you have established for the Scale setting If no margin is desired enter 0 Page Settings L Continuous Output Insert a check here if you do not want a header and footer to be plotted on each page of your log e g a continuous log Leave this box blank if you do want a header and footer to be plotted on each page of the log e g single sheet log for continuous logs you can select only a header for the first page and a footer for the last page Report Insert a check here if your log design contains a Report header that is to be plotted before the remaining log pages First Page Use the drop down boxes to choose which header and footer to plot on page L of the log 279 Reference 4 Middle Pages Choose which header and footer to plot on the middle pages of the log if any If you will be plotting a continuous log indicated with the check mark above these will be ignored 5 Last Page Choose which header and footer to plot on the final page of the log Some examples Single sheet log If you want a header and footer on each page to ach
123. ILDCAT H a P fe HANTTOBA u wish to import If so click Next _ 2003 0000 0 5000 999 2500 Company Hame Well Name Field Name 3 333 333 3 UTM Field Location County Province i5teate e 4 LAS Filename Browse for the LAS file to be imported and click OK in the file open window to select it The program will scan the LAS file and will list the header information in the reference window in the import dialog box 5 Click on the Next button Step 2 Select the curves to import On the next screen is listed all of the curves in the LAS file referenced with the name the curve units the API number and description LAS Import X 2 Select the data to import 4 Select the curves you wish to import by inserting a check by their names 5 Edit the curve Names as necessary to match names in your log design 210 sc pe p p Fee kb DEPT bi mme iz wes SGR CGR SP LLD LLG LLS NOOO Ma o jo MSFL lt ial F MV OHMM OHMM OHMM OHMM 00 000 00 00 11 282 01 00 31 280 01 00 31 310 01 00 31 310 01 00 11 01001 00 11 220 10 00 11 972 01 00 11 220 09 00 11 270 04 00 1 Depth Curve 2 B Size 3 Density Caliper 4 5 6 Spontaneous Pot 7 Laterolog Deep 8 Laterolog Groning 9 Laterolog Shallow 10 Micro Focused F gt Null 999 2500 V Ignore L se JL new J 26 canca L Hee 1 To ignore nulls 2 Click here to scan for the cur
124. ITE CALCAREOUS gray to cream finely crystalline no visible mineralizatior 28 00 31 00 No Circulation No sample recovered 21 NANN ec nn MOT AMA OAATTO link aves Fine aesinad OLANT ebveinaeee rainey CK ANAL navo minar he Scrolling Tabs Off In this example there are no scrolling arrows all tabs are visible because they wrap within the available space 205 Entering Your Data AB Design Mining2 ldtx E Data Mining2 dat SS Ei Recovery Elo Blnazo Blcao Rico Ru Aao Ra Er Eich SETUP E TEXT Fossils Ed mo SZ Lithology PX Mineralization FY Alteration Top Base Lithology Contact Description up to 2000 Characters A 0 00 6 00 LIMESTONE medium gray to dark gray thinly bedded no visible fossils secondary C 6 00 10 00 CHERT cryptocrystalline bedded alternating black gray and white 1 4 inch bi 10 00 14 00 ARGILLACEOUS LIMESTONE buff minor echinoids 14 00 19 00 SANDSTONE white orthoquartzite very well rounded well cemented silica matrix Fr 19 00 23 00 Quartz Latite crystal fragments in DEVITRIFIED glass matrix 23 00 28 00 DOLOMITE CALCAREOUS gray to cream Finely crystalline no visible mineralizatior 28 00 31 00 No Circulation No sample recovered 21 nn 26 nn MET ANAL OMTTE lint arau Fine arsined OIAOT chrinjqaare ra innr SVADA uaru ro inar hr How to Turn on off scrolling tabs L Click in the Data Editor window whose settings you wish to change 2 Click on the Options menu and choose Scrolling Tabs T
125. LogPlot User Manual RockWare Inc 2221 East St Suite 101 Golden Colorado 80401 USA TEL 303 278 3534 FAX 303 278 4099 www rockware com Copyright Notice This software and accompanying documentation are copyrighted and contain proprietary information Duplication of the original diskette s is for the sole use of the purchaser Copyright 1983 2007 by RockWare Inc All Rights Reserved 2221 East St Suite 101 Golden CO 80401 USA 303 278 3534 fax 303 278 4099 www rockware com email rockware rockware com first edition May 2007 Improvement Notice RockWare Inc reserves the right to make improvements in this product at any time and without notice Limited Warranty This software documentation and other provided material are provided as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and non infringement of third party proprietary rights In no event shall RockWare Inc be liable for incidental damages consequential damages lost profits lost savings or any other damages arising out of the use of or inability to use the software Notwithstanding the foregoing in the event that the software contains any defect which adversely affects the use of the software your sole remedy shall be limited to either a refund of all or part of the purchase price or replacement of the software w
126. Multi Interval Data tab are used to match the data to particular Bar Graph Bar Graph Value and Interval Text columns in the log design For example the data in the Gold column will be plotted in the Bar Graph column named Gold in the log s design and the data in the Core Count column will be plotted in the Core Count Interval Text column in the log s design To change the names of the headers or to add or remove headers right click on any cell in the Multi Interval Data window and select the Edit Multi Column Headers command The Data Listing To enter the actual data into the data page cells you can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of one row to the beginning of the next If there is no data for a depth interval you may note this with a non numeric entry such as ND or you may leave the interval blank That bar graph interval or text label will just be omitted from the log 173 Entering Your Data Shortcut If you already have this data in a tabular format in another application you can copy the data there and then paste it into the Multi I nterval Data tab using the Edit Paste command You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row in the tab See also Importing Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Orientation Tab Use The Orientation tab is use
127. OGPlot 7 ccceeeaees 2 open data UE eege 141 142 ee Bette gee ere rare 24 Dee EE 236 237 239 Bee MT 235 MDB EE 143 lge EE 19 REDON e LEE 262 Orientation data tab cena ees 174 Page Printer Setup 27 page lay OWE EE 264 page numpefS eeren gege ENNEN 52 Page Setup Commande 262 page SIZ6 eestor drat ietdnn nies eieiiaasewd 27 pattern library cccccceee eee e eens 264 285 Pattern Percent 005 105 175 200 patterns gl e VE 256 Till BAF COMM retscctccne icin 118 159 header amp footer cece eceee cece eeeee eens 48 INCE FOCUS 4 06 vacances E AEN 162 lithology pattern column 78 166 Reference MISSING BEE 288 pattern percent column 105 175 SEET 253 well construction column 121 185 percent COMM icicaciciateie crevices eraciniades 105 Percent data tab 175 200 petroleum mudlog designs 298 pictures SXDOMUING costess totenatnsatocatoruteretoneton 240 header amp footer cece eee eeee eens 46 lOG DOV EE 119 152 PNG files 46 119 152 240 263 269 polygons IN REPOrtWOrkS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeaees 266 polylines IN REPOrtWOrkS cceeeeeeee eee eeeaees 266 el ge 27 283 print ag Et eee err creme merece tree 146 OG E 235 ReportWorke issnin aa 262 LLEN DE 27 287 e E 291 292 Print Setup Commande 264 lge E 285 299 Project ele EE 19 raster images SXDOMILING ege ees 240 inserting into ReportWorks 269 270 lOG vele K
128. Other LogPlot tools Editing Symbols for these additional topics View and select vector symbols Move vector symbols within the current table Open a different vector symbol file Save the vector symbol file under a different name Combining symbol files Create a printable vector symbol index Access the Vector Symbol Editor The Select Symbol window lets you access the Symbol Editor where you can edit vector symbol designs or create new symbols 1 Select a symbol that you want to edit by clicking on its design in the listing You can choose a blank one 2 Click on the Edit button at the top of the Select Symbol window to edit the current symbol L Select Symbol RockUtil Sym ep Vector Symbols Bitmap Symbols File Edi ylz EE Go Ss P eA Ai A H SEA Click on the symbol you wish to edit then click on the Edit button to access the Symbol Editor Bs VU YM SM MO YO L5 DN ze l gt Editing Vector Symbols I ntroduction Symbols are small graphic pictures that can be plotted at user specified depths in a LogPlot symbol column using the Symbol data tab where they are often used to display water level drill stem tests and sampling locations down the log Symbols can also be displayed in the log headers and footers LogPlot 7 supports two types of symbols e Vector symbols composed of lines and dots to form the design 258 Other LogPlot Tools e Raster sym
129. Outline tab to select the outline color and style if any Refer to the help messages for more details Click Close to close the Scalebar Options window You can resize the scale bar by first single clicking on it to see its handles Then click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or edges and drag to the new position Release the mouse button when the rectangle edges are in the correct position The program will automatically extend or shorten the bar and labels accordingly Reposition the entire scale bar as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on it and dragging it to the new location 271 ReportWorks Inserting a Pattern Symbol or Color Legend into a ReportWorks Page Use the Pattern Legend Symbol Legend and Color Legend menu commands or toolbar buttons to insert an index to patterns symbols or colors on an existing ReportWorks page You can specify the program table to be placed as well as dimensions and other appearance settings 1 Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary 2 Create a new layer as necessary 3 Click on the Pattern Legend Symbol Legend ECH or Color Legend toolbar button or choose the Tools Pattern Legend Symbol Legend or Color Legend menu command 4 Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the legend s rectangular area is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it 5 With the button still pressed in drag to
130. P ap Lem at d we e Pre rn per e SI L PLA ve LAN a a Sa it Bird 4 S Ta Eirg E baes E Beni an r i TEEN T i L Lite a H ml nin I E Wa aaron Ber en ap Fe LA EA em HTE L Ji om AS Kn wel pel e 294 Reference Left Enviro geotech5 dat Enviro geotech5 Idfx Lithology soils boring completion Right Enviro geotech6 dat Enviro geotech6 ldfx Tr ktor Environmental FIELD BOREHOLE LOG eirgraird r msm mirila Sobsloors BARH H HFF HE PROJECT POAT FAD B mmisjir iim erop HE Lido Tee Jeu Hagen ema j i iL OPH HF DRL LUNG PORATION CALL OS 3le ie oe 8 ig e CL EF Lag babes Pa TR cmb a BETHOD Of DSU o he F Gagn SE Teele ad a pe HMMA gel oe ini at SOIL TEST BORING 8YMBOUE LO BOTH BORITOP WELL MST ALLA TION AMES PROECT BRIR Wi BOR iHu DATES BTH OF DRELLIFE kil ir Kon Of MATER MFH R CkYiMG DEPTH errn m FAT UEF u iiaa se p Bisi AHi ee T a a Lithology soils well construction l reat Wal mental Ine Tibnin eee mrmi GATE KLEsszim KRPIEICIAL FELL Me S IF ees erh si i teed an bre Een age bri A i EMS OOLCEFIFEA Ra PI bt D I mim mri L m are gg rr saran my pis naa m Cmm free nir BE Left Enviro geotech7 dat Enviro geotech7 Idfx Lithology strength dip RQD Right Enviro geotech8 dat Enviro geotech8 ldfx Simple well construction DRILL MOLE ja Ea aa Ta Dir lad bya apaan Lig and m chee ir rim
131. Peabody LITHOLOGY o Logger DEPTH Log Designer E SG Ge DECAN de 22 fe al Wi xv SE H Page p oft i ac 4 30105 HDLEC Documents and Seting Dorumertsilogot 7 Semples Lithology 1 kdr View Window The Log View window is used to display the compiled logs on your screen Each time you compile a log it will be displayed automatically in a new Log View window Here you can Save print and export the graphic logs See Chapter 4 page 223 for information about the process of compiling your data and Chapter 5 page 231 regarding displaying printing exporting your logs You can have multiple View windows open at once 16 EE Logview 7 untitled BAX Ele gdt wew RH o d a RH RS D az 39 79 C Elevation Simple Logging Company e Logger Sam Peabody DEPTH d LITHOLOGY Introduction File Manager Along the left edge of the main program window is a new pane used to display the LogPlot related files that reside in the current working folder for quick access open files and compile data with a click See the discussion of the LogPlot File Manager next L LogPlot 7 Maz CDocamegs and Setir Cal BU Desig Lithology idly FRE Data Lithology ll dat ebe D E Hssda Fool s BE Data fdat e 7 a Hockuiogks D I A E Le liezgen tv Create lich Eretocoeciech k ErsagoOgechi Erago opchech k E rengada h File Manager Simple Logging Company Lo
132. Rec Ft Deleting Edit Text Entries The Delete Edit Text command is available as a right click option from within an Edit Text tab It is used to remove the currently selected Edit Text entity from the tab It s advisable to use this option rather than the simple Rows Delete command because the Edit Text row contains an entity name How to Delete an Edit Text item 1 Click in the Edit Text tab in the data file containing the item to be removed 202 Entering your Data Click in the row of the item to be removed Right click in that cell Select the Delete Edit Text command from the displayed menu You can also choose the Delete Edit Text command from the Data menu The program will NOT warn you before deleting Be careful If you inadvertently deleted the item you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design command to re insert the item automatically Deleting Notes Entries The Delete Note command is available as a right click option from within an Notes tab It is used to remove the currently selected note entity from the tab It s advisable to use this option rather than the simple Rows Delete command because the Note row contains an entity name How to Delete a Note item Click in the N TEXT tab in the data file containing the item to be removed N Click in the row of the note you wish to delete 3 Right click in that cell 4 Select the Delete Note command from the display
133. Row Will look like this when printed on paper last Modified 2 26 07 Suggested vertical scaling 50 units inch Suggested design Lithologyl ldfx simple lithology Use LogPlot7 key RockUtil pat SETUP 0 450 0 0 0 lt COL_WIDTH gt 177 185 185 185 185 lt COL_WIDTH gt EDIT TEXT Logger Sam Peabody lt COL_WIDTH gt 160 740 lt COL_WIDTH gt LITH Lithology H 18 DOLOSTONE 18 40 SAND 147 Entering Your Data 40 45 SHALE 45 95 LIMESTONE etc 410 425 VERY COARSE SANDSTONE 425 450 BASEMENT END DATA lt COL_WIDTH gt 80 80 80 80 475 lt COL_WIDTH gt END LOG Close a Data Window LogPlot 7 allows you to keep multiple data files open at any time You can distinguish the data files by their names shown on the stick up tabs in the Data Editor window Follow these steps to close a data file 1 Access the data window you wish to close ya 2 Choose the File Close Data Editor command Or click the small fl button in the upper right corner of that data window If there have been changes to this file that have not been saved the program will prompt you as such Click No to discard any changes and close the window Click Yes to save the file enter a file name in the displayed window and click the Save button The program will close the indicated data file Entering the Data Data Tab Summary The LogPlot 7 program has a Data Editor window that uses data tabs to organize th
134. See Saving Data Files page 145 Here is a listing of the comparable data types LogPlot data Excel Worksheet LogPlot data SETUPGRD Setup tab MCR_GRID_MULTI_CURVE Multi Curve tab MHS_GRID_MULTI_HISTOGRAM _ Multi Interval MCR_GRID_MULTI_ curve CrossPlot eP ORD Name Orientation tab gt Curves tab 217 Entering Your Data CRV_GRID_name ves PPP_GRID_name ee Percent Edit Notes tab SCA_GRID_name Scale Table tab EDT _name_GRD Edit Text SYM_GRID_name Symbol tab FIL_GRID_name Fillbar tab TAD_GRID_name Tadpole tab HZL GRID name Horizontal Line TXT_GRID_name 8 8 tab INB_GRID_name Interbed tab VTX_GRID_name Vertical Text tab HST GRID name Interval Data WCN_GRID_name T T tab the name field is optional for edit text data If no group name is defined the worksheet name is EDITGRD See also Exporting Excel Data next Excel File Format Help Contents Entering your Data Importing Data NOTGRD T 4 cl S gt d Xx O CT oO O E ei o lt S c a 3 2 5 5 cr cr OI OI oO oO Exporting Data from LogPlot Exporting LAS Data The Data Editor s LAS export tool creates LAS Log ASCII Standard files version 1 2 2 for use in other software applications You can export curve interval data multi curve multi interval data orientation pattern percent and tadpoles This process requires several steps which are listed below Please refer to the Help messages for additional information How to
135. Select the Log Design LDFX File 275 Reference Log Design File This setting on the Main tab of the Compile a Log Compile All Logs and Log Settings windows determines the log design into which the data will be compiled to become the graphic log s The default name displayed in this prompt is that of of the current log design displayed in the Log Design window If you want to use a different log design for your log click on the button to the right of the file name to browse for a different log design file LDFX to use for compiling The file you select will now be default and will be displayed as default the next time you access the Log Design window Set the Vertical Scale Scaling This setting on the Main tab of the Compile a Log Compile All Logs and Log Settings window is used to define how many depth units will be displayed per vertical inch or centimeter of the log In other words it defines how compact or expanded the log will be Man Header Footer Fatter Symbols Scaling Depth Units Per Inch Depth Units per Centimeter Positive Depths 1 First choose your desired output units by clicking in the appropriate radio button You can select either Depth units per inch or Depth units per Centimeter 2 Next you have several scaling options Option 1 Scale If you know exactly how many depth units you want plotted per inch or centimeter on the plotted log just type that value into the Scale prompt S
136. Setup data tab We recommend leaving this setting turned on though experienced users may wish to deactivate it since they may already have existing DAT files to work with or their own preferred data template Check for Updates Insert a check here to have LogPlot look for an updated revision on the RockWare web site each time the program is started up and to display a message if an update is found Successful search for updates requires an internet connection Allow Log Design Undo Check this box to enable the undo feature within the Log Design window whereby incremental behind the scene saves of your design are created allowing you to step backward through editing changes Use the up down arrows to select how many undo steps are to be allowed Accept Reversed Lithology Depth Intervals This setting can be handy if you are creating measured sections and your lithologic information is entered into the Lithology tab in reversed order Typically LogPlot requires that all data be entered from the top of the diagram downward for example from an elevation of 3000 to 2500 This setting if activated permits you to enter your lithology data instead from elevation 2500 to 3000 Insert a check mark in this box if the data you have entered into the Lithology data tab has been entered in reverse order from the bottom of the log to the top If activated LogPlot will simply internally reverse the order of the lithology data This setting affe
137. USCS2 pat USGSlithos1l key USGSlithos2 key USGSlithos pat LogPlot 7 File Types program execution log configuration settings Large generic keyword library German keyword list Spanish keyword list French keyword list Italian keyword list Large generic pattern library Large generic vectory symbol table Large generic raster symbol library USCS specific keyword library USCS specific pattern library USCS specific keyword library USCS specific pattern library USGS keyword library USGS keyword library with numeric codes USGS specific pattern library DAT data files text Samples are installed in the My Documents LogPlot 7 Samples folder LDFX LogDesign files ASCII XML format Samples are installed in the My Documents LogPlot 7 Samples folder PREVIEW J PG LogDesign preview files binary JPEG format Created by LogDesign automatically Previews can be turned on off in Options System Settings ENM LogDesign entity type and name file text Created by LogDesign automatically LPT LogView files binary proprietary format Can also be read by free LogView program available on RockWare s web site 300 Reference Sample Files sample batch txt Sample batch file Sample las Sample LAS import file See also Sample Log Designs and Data Files page 292 for a listing of the DAT and LDFX files that are shipped with LogPlot Command Line Execution Running LogPlot with Comman
138. X coordinates O in or cm wf Bar Graph Text We lm A Vertical Symbol Text Leal Fi Ba Pictures lt gt ai a Well Horizontal Coste Line E e Vertical Tadpoles Line w og s gt 1 66 0 03 E el 1250 SN Heades 1 KM Foote 1 lt i gt 8 17 x 10 67m C Documents and Settings mb DocumentsiLogPiot 7 Samplesuntitled Fx You can turn on a reference grid at a user defined pixel density to aid you in placing log body items You can also activate snapping of items to that grid You can change the units that are displayed in the reference ruler by selecting the Inches versus cm s option in the printer and page settings File Page Print Setup command If you change the units in the page setup be sure to re compute the default page size The Reference Grid and Snapping Items To aid you in placing your design entities the Log Designer offers a reference grid If activated the program will display a grid of dots in the header footer and log body portion of the design screen The resolution of the grid e g spacing of dots in decimal inches or centimeters can be determined by you 69 Designing Your Logs FIELD BOREHOLE LOG o PROJECT NUMBER M99166 rr FELO BOOK EN ek Seet LOCATION QVERTHERAINBOW GROUND SL DRILLING CO MeFACHRAN amp SON DRILLING METHOD AIRROTARY FIELD PARTY ER ee Reference g
139. X or LDF file to be used Select the Data File s using the File Manager 1 Expand the File Manager s Data heading as necessary 2 Insert a check mark next to the name s of the DAT files you wish to compile You can select one DAT file or multiple DAT files in the current project folder 3 Right click in the File Manager Choose Compile Selected Files from the pop up menu fee mith Project S Ag Design borehe EG Smith Project Pe Data dat FE OS PU det K l El con T BH2dat op em M BH4 dat iv BHS dat iii Open Selecked Files i w DH dat Compile Selected Files 4 P Select All e ENEE Unselect All E Logs Ton Refresh Files Hide Set the Compiling Settings The program will display a dialog box where you can confirm a number of log settings These options are also established under the Options Log Settings menu See references for each step under topics below 227 Compiling Your Logs 1 Yerify the printer page settings Compile All Open Logs 2 Set vertical scale Man Header Footer Pattem Symbols Scaling Gei Depth Units Per Inch C Depth Units per Centimeter a Positie Depths 3 Yerify current log design LDFX file Log Design File WC ia C Documents and Seltings My Documerts LogPlet E Page Numbering Main_ Header Footer Patiem Sech Lal Starting Page Number 1 Gi Mag 4 Set starting age pag 01 Margin behveen Header Footer and Log Body S P
140. a TIFF format This file can then be opened in other graphics applications inserted into word processing documents etc Note that you cannot open the TIF version of the log within LogPlot Export Logs as HTML This export tool exports the log displayed in the View window to an HTML table It captures each page of the log in a JPEG JPG format and then inserts the JPG images into the HTML table When displayed in a web browser application the logs appear continuous This is a great way to share logs for display on the screen since JPG files are small in size and HTML documents are read universally by web browsers The only drawback to this export tool would be any viewing and especially printing limitations inherent to the browser you are using to open the HTML table For example you can t print a continuous log from the browser window even though it looks continuous on the screen 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 Select the Export command from the View window s File menu 3 Select the HTML Table option 4 Filename Click on the Open button ER the right edge of the prompt to enter the name to assign to the exported file accessing other folders or drives as necessary Click OK to return to the export dialog box The program will append the appropriate file name extension HTML automatically The linked J PG files will be assigned a variation of the name you enter see below
141. a window which will contain data tabs that are specific to the items in the active log design For example if the design contained a lithology pattern column named Rock Types and a curve column named Drilling Rate then these tabs would be added to the Data Editor a Lithology tab named Rock Types and a Curve tab named Drilling Rate 139 Entering Your Data 4 Add data to the existing data tabs Type it in copy paste it from another document import File Import into a single tab 5 Add new data tabs Data New Data Item as necessary 6 Save the data file File Save or Save As Note that LogPlot can also create a complete data template upon program startup Plan 4 Create a Data File from Scratch 1 Access the Data Editor window by clicking on the LogPlot Data Editor tab 2 Create a new data file File New Data Editor 3 Add data tabs for your different data types Data New Data Item See the Data Tab Summary page 148 for a listing of all of the different kinds of data you can enter into LogPlot Managing the Data Files Data Editor Files I ntroduction LogPlot data files that you create in the Data Editor window are stored on disk as ASCII text files with a fairly generic DAT file name extension Within the ASCII file the different kinds of log data are grouped into distinct blocks and that s how LogPlot distinguishes lithologic descriptions from curve data from downho
142. ab and select Fill Depth Column to fill the column with regular depth increments Azimuth In this column you enter the dip direction in 0 to 360 azimuth degrees The bearings will be represented by the tadpole tails which will be oriented straight up for north bearing dips and straight down for south bearing dips Dip In this column enter the dip angles where 0 horizontal and 90 vertical Dip angle is represented by the placement of the tadpole symbol within the column zero degree horizontal dip angles are represented with symbols plotted along the left edge of the column and 90 degree vertical dip angles are shown by symbols along the right edge of the column Color Optional Double click in this cell to select a color for the measurement s tadpole symbol If you choose to define specific colors for individual samples be sure to set the Tadpole column to a Column Based color scheme Value Optional This column is used to enter quantitative values for the measurements for use in scaling the tadpole symbols In the Tadpole column options you can specify that symbol size either is fixed and these values are ignored or is based on the numbers in this value column with a minimum and maximum size defined for the value range See also mporting Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Text Column Tab Use The Text Column tab is used to enter text and the de
143. able e You can request automatic min max scaling of the column to match the individual log s data range Alternatives Columns in which two curves are displayed with solid fill color where they overlap are designed with the Cross Plot Curves column LogPlot data tabs The data for a Curve Column can be read from a Cross Plot Curve tab page 154 a Multi Curve tab page 169 or a regular Curve tab page 155 in the data file This means that a single curve data listing can be plotted in several places on the log How to Insert a curve column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button S Log Body 3 Select the Curve button Kl the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Curve Column if necessary to display the log body buttons The pointer will change shape to a i for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the curve cursor where you want to position the left edge of the column and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the curve setup information Information about the Curve Column position and name data values appearance and grids can be found in the topics listed below 90 7 Designing Your Logs To accept the displayed settings click the Apply button You will see the Curve Column in the design screen with the requested color grid lines etc You may continue to adjus
144. activated automatic value labels they should be updated appropriately It s important to note that Automatic scaling will probably result in the curve column s min max value range varying from well to well based on the data range represented if it is important that the curve column represents the Same data range for all wells in a project you should use the Manual option If the data values are to be plotted from the left to the right e g the minimum value along the left column edge and the maximum value along the right column edge click on the Low to High button If the data are to be plotted from the right to the left e g the minimum value along the right column edge and the maximum value along the left column edge click on the High to Low button Set the appearance for Curve 1 and Curve 2 Line Insert a check in this box if you want to plot a line to define the curve If activated click on the box to the right to select line style line thickness and color Designing Your Logs Fill Click on this box to select a fill pattern and color If no fill is desired select the blank pattern Fill Direction If you have selected a non blank fill pattern you can choose whether the curve is to be filled to the left or to the right This setting operates independently of which direction the curve is actually plotting See below for some examples Here are some examples of how you can vary the curve direction curve fill and overlap
145. ader or footer by the same amount follow these steps 1 Select the Shift Header Report Items command or Shift Footer I tems command from the Edit menu The program will display this dialog box 40 Designing Your Logs e decimal inches or os ss Positive values will shift Shift Header 1 Items items to the right negative values will shift items to the left Shift 0125 amp Y shift is entered in Y Shift o i l A decimal inches or cms Positive values will shift items downward negative values will shift items upward Eliminate dead space at top If checked all header or footer items Will be moved up to eliminate any blank space at the top of the header footer Any Y Shift entry will be ignored 2 Enter the X horizontal and or Y vertical shift in decimal inches or centimeters for all of the header items or footer items Or you can insert a check in the Eliminate dead space at top box to shift all of the header or footer items vertically to the top of the page or the top of the footer Any y shift entered in the prompt box will be ignored 3 Choose OK to move the header or footer items the indicated amount or choose Cancel to cancel the operation Remember that the horizontal range of the header and footer depends on the default printer and page size File menu Page Print Setup command The vertical range of the header is defined by the page length The Shift H
146. age Settings 5 Establish the header footer pagination 1 C Continuous Qutput settings Click the Header Footer button EI Been l Frai Page Man Heade Footer Patten Symbol Headed Lal Footer gt Options i 6 Check pattern Ke Middle Pages amp symbol tani Fanio Header 2 me Footer2 settings Mo Solid Fill baten Last Page Click on the ge ait D Heade 2 Fooher2 Pattern Embed Patten and Symbol in compiled kog GG LA Symbol tab 7 When all of the settings are displayed to your satisfaction click on the OK button to have the program compile the data in all open DAT files into plottable logs That s it The program will read the data contained in the Data Editor windows and match the fields to the items that are declared in the log design you have selected When all data items have been processed the completed logs will be plotted in separate windows on the screen If the program encounters problems compiling your data it will usually let you know and show you the location in the data file where it has encountered a problem Topics Verify the page and printer settings page 287 Verify the current log design LDFX file page 275 Set the vertical scale page 276 Set the starting page number page 279 Establish the header and footer settings page 279 Establish pattern and symbol settings page 282 See also Errors During Compiling page 288 for tips on data and on pr
147. and Manipulating Your Logs For print output you should enter a greater value The resolution will affect the output file size You might start with a resolution of 150 pixels inch and if you find this inadequate too pixely or blocky in appearance try again at 250 or 300 7 Colors Choose from the drop down list box the color resolution you wish to use for the output TIFF image As you increase the color resolution the output file will increase in size For good color depth you should probably choose 24 bits pixel 8 Tiff Compression Click on the drop down box the desired compression for your TIFF image Packbits is default for color images 9 Entire Log New Insert a check here if your log occupies multiple pages and you wish to export the entire log as a single long image You can select the first page header and final footer to be included in the export the body of the log will be exported as continuous no breaks and no headers on intermediate pages Header Choose which header to include at the top of the log Header 1 Header 2 or No Header Footer Choose which footer to include at the top of the log Footer 1 Footer 2 or No Footer Scale Select the vertical scale number of depth units per inch or cm for the output image The default that is displayed will be the scale currently stored as default for the Compile settings 10 Click OK to proceed The program will store the current page of the log on disk in
148. andard Windows dialog box for the printer that you have selected 2 Choose the page range for the print job and the number of copies 3 Use the Properties button to access printer specific settings as necessary See your printer documentation for details 4 When you are ready to print choose OK Or to return to the LogView screen without printing choose the Cancel button See Printing Tips on page 291 if you need help Opening Accessing a LogView Window When the LogPlot program first starts only the Data Editor and Log Design windows are open If you proceed to compile a log the program will then automatically open a LogView window in which it will display the plotted log If you do not wish to compile a log but to open an existing log plot that you compiled earlier and saved on disk you can do so by first accessing a LogView window and then opening the saved log plot file LPT 235 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Because LogPlot lets you keep multiple LogView windows open at any time it s pretty easy to lose track of which windows are open but buried on your computer screen The second tip below offers instructions about finding already open LogView windows How to Open a new LogView window 1 To open a new LogView window click on the New View button E or choose the File New LogView option from the main LogPlot menu The program will display a new empty Log View window 2 Atthis time
149. ange shape to a Zu for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the column cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and click the left mouse button to place it 5 Enter the column settings in the displayed window Information about the Cross Plot Curve position name and data values appearance and grids can be found in the topics listed below 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Cross Plot Curve column displayed in the design screen with the appropriate horizontal and vertical grid lines etc You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Crossplot Curve Options window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Cross Plot Curve Column right click on the Column and select Edit Entity or find the Cross Plot Curve Column in the Edit View Entity List and choose the Edit button Set up the Cross Plot Curve position and over plot color 1 Click on the Main tab of the Crossplot Curve Options window 101 Designing Your Logs 102 Crossplot Curves Options Main Curve 1 Curve 2 Grid Position Left 0 5625 Right 1 8750 Overplot Fill Position These list the horizontal coordinates for the column The horizontal coordinates are expr
150. ange shape to a Le for placing the item 4 Place the cursor where you wish the upper left corner of the symbol to be in the header or footer portion of the design screen and click the left mouse button The program will display the Header Footer Symbol Setup window 50 Designing Your Logs Header Footer Symbol Setup Position Lett 08 TT T Select Bottom Options Frame Enter the requested information Select To select the symbol to be displayed in the header or footer click on the Select button in the Header Symbol Setup window Or just click on the symbol picture itself in the window The program will display the Select Symbol window You can select from vector or bitmap symbols To choose a vector symbol click on the Vector Symbols tab to bring it to the front To choose a bitmap symbol click on the Bitmap Symbols tab to bring it to the front Then simply click on one of the displayed symbols You may use the scroll bars as necessary to view additional symbols The symbol you have selected will be displayed in the preview box at the top of the window The vector symbol s index number will be shown in the lower left part of the window vector symbols the bitmap symbol name will be shown at the top Click on the color box to select a color for the vector symbol click on the foreground and background color boxes to choose those colors for bitmap symbols When you have selected the symbol and c
151. as Transparent with no background or Opaque If you select Opaque click on the color box to choose a color for the background of the text 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the text placed in the header or footer in the design window You may continue to adjust the text if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Static Text Setup window click the Close button The text label you specified will be displayed on the screen at the declared location Reposition the Text See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Text Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the text item right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the Static Text item in the View Entity List and choose the Load Item button Adding Changing Header Footer Text Edit T ext Use The Edit Text button is used to plot textual labels in the header or footer portion of the log It is used for text such as dates client company names and other information that will change from log to log project to project The actual text that is to be plotted for an Edit Text item is declared in the log data file unlike the Static Text entries with which the text for the label is declared in the log design file How it works During compiling if the LogPlot program finds Edit
152. as an upper margin However the program will not include blank space below the lowest header item it will start the log body wherever the header ends plus any header footer margin you ve declared and the lowest footer item will be placed at the bottom of the page Changing the Header or Footer Viewing Size You can change how much of the header or footer is visible at any time on the design screen by dragging the horizontal boundary line that divides the header or footer from the log body 1 Click on the Pointer tool to select it 2 Position the pointer on the header boundary or footer boundary and watch for the cursor as to change to 3 Depress the mouse button to grab the boundary line With the mouse button depressed drag the header or footer boundary up or down as desired The actual size of the header or footer is not changed using this process instead more or less of it is shown on the design screen You can for example have a very long header of which only a portion is visible within the design screen When compiled with data in LogPlot however the entire header shows up If the header or footer boundary will not move it may be that one of the design areas has reached a minimum display size Try increasing the size of the entire Log Designer window or making the log body portion of the screen shorter The physical size of the header and footer is limited horizontally by the printer and page size you have
153. ased symbols click on the Bitmap Symbols tab By contrast vector symbols are created with lines within the symbol editor This window is used to select the symbol to be inserted and to choose its foreground and background colors It is also used to manage the Symbol file Save changes open a different file and to import bitmap images into the library 259 Other LogPlot Tools current symbol name select foreground amp background color rename symbol current symbol Ug Select Sypbot Rocket TI Vector Symbols Bitmap Symbols Open save Symbol Name bitmap o 3 symbol file d sample l turn on off Add symbols J Border symbol border NU dm NIX SE MKN IMK delete symbols VEM e W I Ok Cancel a Help w x f See the LogPlot Help messages Help Contents Other LogPlot tools Editing Symbols for these additional topics View and select raster symbols Select the symbol color Open a different symbol file Save the bitmap symbol file under a different name Import Symbol Designs Renaming Symbols 260 ReportWorks Chapter 7 ReportWorks ReportWorks Overview The ReportWorks program is a page layout tool that s shipped with RockWorks and LogPlot It offers tools for laying out pages with RockWorks generated graphics LogPlot generated logs imported graphics text shapes and more For LogPlot it s a handy way to display multiple logs in cross section diagrams De
154. ata File Use this workflow for environmental logs geotechnical logs most mudlogs and mining logs Where you can get more information e A few tutorial lessons Compile a tutorial data set and Modify an existing log Access the tutorials through the Help Contents Tutorial menu e Sample Log Designs and Data Files pick one that looks like your company s log layout See page 292 e Where do I Start Designing See page 23 e Automatic Data File Tools create update your data templates automatically See page 191 e Compiling Logs page 223 e Viewing Your Log page 231 Workflow 2 Import LAS data create a log design compile your log LAS data Log View log design Use this workflow for generating geophysical logs from existing LAS files Introduction Where you can get more information e A tutorial lesson Importing LAS Data Access the tutorials through the Help Contents Tutorial menu e Importing LAS Data page 209 e Compiling Logs page 223 e Viewing Your Log page 231 System Requirements LogPlot 7 will run under the minimum system setup listed below with recommended operating parameters shown in parentheses e Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP Vista 2000 XP or Vista recommended e Pentium or faster processor e 128 MB RAM or more e 10 MB free disk space e Supports all Windows compatible printers and plotters Installing LogPlot To install the LogPlot 7 program you must follow th
155. ated to plot on top of your bargraphs curves typically if you are plotting filled curves so the fill won t obscure the grid lines or tadpoles insert a check here Plot Value Grid If you want value grid lines to be plotted within the column insert a check mark in this box These are vertical lines that plot across the column to note value divisions Linear Scaling If you have set up Linear scaling Main tab you can define both a major and a minor interval for the value grid lines Major Interval Insert a check in this box to define the number of major groupings across the column Click on the Style Color sample to select a line style thickness and color for the major grid lines Minor Interval Insert a check in this box to define the number of minor groupings WITHIN the major groupings Click on the Style Color sample to select a line style thickness and color for the minor grid lines Enter the number kr Plot Value Grid M Grids On Top of major disions Here there are 5 Value iw Major Interval Major Interval je oeae4e5 G Divisions Stile Color 5 AE Oe US iw Minor intervals Minor Intervals Within Major Interval FS Divisions Stile Color Enter the number S A of minor intervals WITHIN the major intervals Here there are 2 Logarithmic Scaling If you have requested Logarithmic scaling then the program will determine automatically the number of grid lines to plot based on the log cycles that
156. ates client names well locations and such B Static Notes Static Notes allow you to enter longer text information into the header or footer than is available using the Static Text item The text will wrap within the space defined for the note block The text to be plotted is entered into the log design and does not change from log to log B Edit Notes Edit Notes are like Static Notes above except that the text to be plotted in the block is entered in the data file so that it can easily change from log to log These notes might be thought of as wrappable Edit Text labels Column Legend This tool is used to insert a legend for a quantitative data column curve or bargraph automatically displaying the column s name graphic line style and value range See also Viewing a List of the Log Entities page 66 43 Designing Your Logs Adding Header Footer Lines Use The Header Footer Line button is used to draw a line at any angle anywhere in the header or footer portion of the log This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands How to Draw a Header Footer Line 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button Header Footer S if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Header Footer Line button Blerom the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Fo
157. ation you can copy the data there and then paste it into the Interval Data tab using the Edit Paste command You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row in the tab See also Importing Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information 165 Entering Your Data Lithology Tab Use The Lithology tab is used to enter a set of lithologic descriptions for a Lithology Pattern column and or Lithology Description column that have the same name LogPlot compares the declared keyword to those listed in the keyword file If a Keyword match is made the pattern declared for that keyword will be plotted in the Lithology Pattern column for that interval Any short or extended description text can be plotted in the Lithology Description column Alternatives If you wish to plot text that is not associated with lithologic information and has no keywords such as comments text measurements etc then you should use either the Text Column tab or the Interval Data tab Text that is to be plotted vertically in the body of the log is entered using the Vertical Text tab If you want to plot interbedded pattern blocks use the Interbed tab Corresponding log design component Keywords listed in the Lithology column of the Lithology tab are linked to graphic patterns These patterns will be plotted in the Lithology Pattern column page 78
158. ation for information about these files Link Choose Link to have ReportWorks store only the name and path of the table being inserted so that it reads the contents of the image from the external file location Note that the full path of the file is stored so that if the RW6 and image files are relocated you ll need to re browse for the table to re link it Benefits The ReportWorks file stays smaller and you can update the location or name of the table at any time Drawbacks You need to be sure to keep the linked table with the ReportWorks RW6 file so that the linking will remain intact This can be cumbersome Embed Choose Embed to simply store the contents of the pattern table in the ReportWorks document Benefits You don t have to worry about keeping the linked files available for the RW6 document Drawbacks The RW6 file size increases ReportWorks Appearance These settings define how the legend will look Columns per row This determines how many columns of samples there will be in the legend Pattern Symbol Color width height Type in a width and height in decimal inches or centimeters for the pattern blocks symbol samples or color blocks Horizontal margin Vertical margin Type in distance in inches or centimeters between the columns and legend edges Font Click on this tab to adjust the legend s label settings Font settings Use the Font Font Style Font Size Color and Effects settings to establish the
159. attern column Pal Interval Data tab Used to enter depth intervals and a single column of measured data to be plotted as bar graphs on the log and or as value labels in a bar graph labels column and or as alphanumeric text in an Interval Text column Replaces the Histogram tab cfr Lithology tab This tab is used to enter depth intervals and associated lithologic keywords and descriptions for those intervals to be plotted as patterns in a Lithology Pattern column and or as text in a Lithology Description column on a log E Multi Curve tab This tab is used to list depths and two or more columns of measured data to be plotted as point to point curves on a log in a Curve column or a Cross Plot Curve column Pal Multi I nterval Data tab Used to list depth intervals and two or more columns of measured data to be plotted as bar graphs on the log and or as value labels in a bar graph label column and or as alphanumeric text in an Interval Text column E Orientation tab This tab is used to enter any downhole survey for non vertical wells Though LogPlot always displays wells as vertical the depth elevation Scale Bar allows display of true survey elevations depths down the log instead of along with observed depths and Curve columns can display true vertical depth based on the survey data E Percent tab This tab is used to specify the keywords for the rock types to be represented in the Pattern column and to list the depth elevati
160. bargraph s minimum and maximum values to be determined automatically by the program based on the data values at compile time LogPlot will scan the data values and set the column scale to a reasonable min max range to accommodate the values For example if the data ranges from 1 6 to 8 2 it would set the bargraph column s linear Min Value to and the Max Value to 10 e If you have header footer column legends linked to the curve they should be updated appropriately e It s important to note that Automatic scaling will probably result in the bargraph column s min max value range varying from well to well based on the data range represented if it is important that the column represents the Same data range for all wells in a project you should use the Manual option Direction If the data values are to be plotted from the left to the right e g the minimum value along the left column edge and the maximum value along the right column edge click on the Low to High button If the data are to be plotted from the right to the left e g the minimum value along the right column edge and the maximum value along the left column edge click on the High to Low button Set up the Bar Graph appearance 1 Click on the Appearance tab of the Bargraph Setup window It contains a variety of settings that control the appearance of the Bar Graph column 109 Designing Your Logs Appearance jw Column Border Column Fill Color Bar Ou
161. be edited to make it active Click in the row in which the depth listing is to start Then right click in any of the tab s cells Select the Fill Depth Column command from the pop up menu aoe e Enter the requested information Starting Value Enter at this prompt the depth to be listed in the row at which the cursor is currently located This value may represent English or metric units Ending Value Enter at this prompt the lower most depth value to be listed on the data tab Depth Increments Enter here the increments at which the depths are to be listed in the tab Decimals Type in or select with the up or down arrows the number of decimal places to be represented in the depths Be sure the decimal places are adequate to represent the requested increments Depth Starting value 0 0 0 Ending Value 100 5 0 Interval S 10 0 15 0 Decimals 20 0 25 0 30 0 35 0 40 0 AC 7 198 Entering your Data Notes e In LogPlot depths can be entered as either positive or negative values this tool will comply with the current depth setting established under Log Settings e Any depth data already listed in the cells will be overwritten Fill Interval Column The Fill Interval Column command is available as a right click option from within many of the LogPlot data tabs It is used to It is used to populate automatically beginning and ending depth values at regular increments into two columns sta
162. below for information about the position of the handle relative to the text label The units inches or cms are defined in the File Page Printer Setup window Text Enter the text to be used as default for this Edit Text entry Options McEachran Son The text you enter here will be the default text for this Edit Text entry in the LogPlot data file The default text serves two purposes As a placeholder in the design window In this example McEachran amp Son will be displayed for this Edit Text field in the log design screen If the default text is typical of the length of the data you ll usually enter it s helpful for knowing how much space the text will occupy when the log is compiled As default text in the data template If you use the Create Data File Template command to create a new data file for your log design the program will suggest this text as the text to be plotted You may change the default entry as necessary Angle Enter the angle at which the Edit Text label is to be plotted The text angle may be any integer between 90 and 90 50 Angle Font Use this button to access the Font dialog box where you may set the Edit Text label s font type color and size Color Use this button to select a color for the text This can also be established using the Font button Alignment Settings Horizontal Alignment Click in a radio button to choose how the text is to be aligned horizontally re
163. bols imported from external BMP files The Symbol Editor in LogPlot is used to modify vector symbols A factory library of vector symbol designs is installed with the program stored in Symbol file The default vector Symbol file is declared in the Options Program Files menu LogPlot offers tools to view the current vector symbol library edit symbol designs create new symbols open a different Symbol file and more a Symbol 16 Preview of current symbol design symbol Design Screen itachi Jor Current e rd 16 of lines or segments dots The limit is 50 Erases the most recently i Clears the added item in r Design Screen n Template Design Screen j Clear Import Imports a repeatedly eg A symbol design stored under 2 Heie a different number Accepts changes Cancels changes amp exits Editor amp exits Editor See the LogPlot Help messages Help Contents Other LogPlot tools Editing Symbols for these additional topics Access the Vector Symbol Editor Create New Vector Symbols Import Existing Vector Symbols Edit Existing Symbols Draw Vector Symbols Exit the symbol editor Selecting Bitmap Symbols The Select Symbol window is displayed when you insert a symbol in a log design s header or footer or when you are entering data in a Symbol data tab It s also available when you select the Tools Edit Symbols menu option To work with bitmap or raster b
164. but not by as much as it does the BMP export You might start with a resolution of 150 pixels inch and if you find this inadequate too pixel y or block in appearance try again at 250 or 300 7 Colors For PNG 24 bit color is the only option 243 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs 8 Compression PNG files can be created with varied compression choose from Low Medium or High Generally the higher the compression the smaller the file size but image quality can sometimes be degraded Lower compression will result in slightly larger files but will assure the best image quality 9 Transparent Insert a check here if you would like to choose a color in the image to be transparent and select the color by clicking in the color box 10 Save Progressive nsert a check in this box to enable drawing of the image on the screen as it is being loaded in the destination application 11 Entire Log New Insert a check here if your log occupies multiple pages and you wish to export the entire log as a single long image You can select the first page header and final footer to be included in the export the body of the log will be exported as continuous no breaks and no headers on intermediate pages Header Choose which header to include at the top of the log Header 1 Header 2 or No Header Footer Choose which footer to include at the top of the log Footer 1 Footer 2 or No Footer Scale Select the vertical scale number of
165. buttons to insert remove automatically all of the check marks Finally you may edit the curve names if necessary either to assign them more intuitive names or to match curve names in an existing log design Simply highlight the curve name s text and type in a new name This is pretty important If you will using the LAS data in an existing log design then you should update the curve names to match the names of the curve columns in the log design Click on the Next button Step 3 Set up the import parameters On the third screen of the import window you can establish some header and filtering information At any time you can click the Back button in this window if you need to back track to the first screen to review header summary information or to the second screen to see curve summary and null value information 211 Entering Your Data 212 LAS Import E 1 Check here to i i record well J Select impot options oO Check here to start stop in Header Infomation record well LogPlot SETUP tab Fi Update SETUP information amp or TT e nOude as Edit et Lei well Inte LI Reverse Fields parameters d LogPlot EDIT TEXT C Parameters tabs 3 Check here to import selected Curve Data depths only Loi Filter Depth Mamm Minimum 4 Check here to convert depth L Convert Depth Urets units 5 Check here to replace nulls with selected values kel Convet Hul Values to MULI or text eci ZS Decimal Paces F Define dec
166. cale 10 For example if your log data s entered in feet and you ve selected Depth Units per Inch and you type in 10 for the scale then LogPlot will compile the data so that 10 feet are represented in each inch of your output log H SRENACEOUS LIMESTONE ER cray white very fine grained well Seel sorted firm to brittle blocky to sub ed platy salt and pepper glanconthe a pink fluorescence SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite filled en echelon frac tires 276 Reference If your data is entered in meters you ve selected Depth Units per Centimeter and you type in 1 for the scale then LogPlot will compile the data so that 1 meter is represented in each centimeter on the output log 0 0 Option 2 Fit Fit Log to Page If you don t need a specific scale but just want LogPlot to fit all of the data within the Top and Bottom of Interval at top of window in the available space on a single page select the Fit Log to Page option from the drop down box and then click the Fit button 1 Select Fit Log to Page 2 Click the Fit button Scale a 3 The computed scale will be displayed LogPlot will determine how much data will fit in how much space and update the scale displayed in the prompt box Printable length of page Scale to fit Ht page Top of interval Base of interval LogPlot reads Header amp footer page size and size are read from printable area the log de
167. can adjust the diagram s scaling clipping outline and fill pattern color See the Bitmap tool for inserting more generic graphic images 1 Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary 2 Click on the RockPlot RK6 toolbar button or choose the Tools RockPlot RK6 menu command 3 Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the image is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of the diagonal corner point and release the mouse button As you drag you ll see a rubber band image of the shape s outline 4 The program will display the RockPlot Options dialog box Click on the RockPlot RK6 tab to define the RockPlot2D image to be placed on the page and to define its scaling and settings File Browse for the RK6 file to be inserted into the space you defined You can also choose whether the RK6 file will be linked to the ReportWorks document or embedded within it Scaling Choose from Best Fit horizontal scale vertical scale Stretch the image will be stretched to fill the available space or Custom you can define map units per inch or cm on the page Establish other diagram settings clipping margins etc Click on the Outline tab to define any outline color and line style Click on the Fill Background tab to define any color or pattern background fill for the image 268 ReportWorks Clic
168. change for these scale changes e Automatic value legends will be updated for these scale changes Direction If the data values are to be plotted from the left to the right e g the minimum value along the left column edge and the maximum value along the right column edge click on the Low to High button If the data are to be plotted from the right to the left e g the minimum value along the right column edge and the maximum value along the left column edge click on the High to Low button If you have set the curve appearance to be filled as specified under appearance settings and you want the solid fill to be to the left of the curve click on the Left to Right button If the solid fill is to be to the right of the curve click on the Right to Left button This operates independently of the actual min max direction of the curve Set up the curve appearance Use the settings on the Appearance tab of the Curve Column Setup window to define a variety of settings that control the appearance of the curve and curve column 93 Designing Your Logs 94 Curve Column Setup Style Line Lire C Une and Symbol Symbol E C Symbol Block a O Filed E C Filled and Symbol Wrap Ze None C Truncate e Wrap C Wrap 10x jw Frame Le sw x Close Help Click on the Appearance tab of the Curve Column Setup window Set up the curve Style Line Click on this large line sample to select the style
169. column or an Interval Text column LogPlot data tab Bar Graph columns are linked to data entered into an Interval Data tab page 164 or Multi I nterval Data tab page 171 How to Insert the Bar Graph column into the log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button is Log Body 3 Select the Bar Graph button Pirom the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Bargraph Column if necessary to display the log body buttons The pointer will change shape to a EH for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the cursor where you want to position the left edge of the column and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the Bar Graph setup information Information about the Bar Graph Column position and name data values appearance and grids can be found in the topics listed below 6 To accept the displayed settings click the Apply button You will see the Bar Graph Column in the design screen with the requested color pattern grid lines etc You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Bar Graph Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Bar Graph Column right click on the Bar Graph Column and select Edit Entity or find the Bar Gra
170. cts Lithology tab data only Break descriptions on space This setting by default activated would need to be changed only if you are entering descriptions using a language character set that does not separate words with spaces If activated with a check mark LogPlot will wrap the text in a lithologic description column or a text column so that the line breaks occur at the spaces between words If deactivated no check mark LogPlot will wrap the text at any character location based on available space Reference Program Files Settings The Program Files tab is accessible by clicking on the Options toolbar button and then clicking on the Program Files tab Or you can select the Program Files command in the LogPlot Options menu This tab is used to select the name of the Keyword Pattern and Symbol files to be used in the program LogPlot permits you to maintain different copies of these files for use with different data sets or in different project areas For example for a geotechnical soil boring log you might wish to use the USCS keyword and pattern library that are shipped with the program For a water well you may wish to use the USGS keyword and pattern tables Many users find it handy to keep active keyword pattern and or symbol files right within the directory in which their data files are stored so that all project data can be kept together You can also select the name of the active file from within the Keyword Editor
171. current program defaults The completed log plot will be sent to the printer and or saved on disk as requested If another item is listed in the batch the program will process it next 230 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Chapter 5 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs LogView Introduction View save orintiexpaort the log When LogPlot compiles a new log it does the following 1 It reads the data file 2 It looks at the log design the vertical scale the printer page size and other compile settings to determine how much of the data will fit on each page 3 It compiles the data into the design and displays the first page of the log on the screen in the LogView window The LogView window is used to display the compiled logs on your screen From this window you can view print and export the graphic logs ce D s Ee fer op a A ARLASH HM an IER U UO prinlsrasas Foland Bislig Bai RH BEL 20010 io oP a0 ae e 1 S Peale Ba Raup LE Penta a hte Zo LS ee ae Kat S os FEF 100 amen 2 Hry Deeg nection D aep Inet tian emer J 5 H IL 2000 20 LD a0onlzo RHOS 30 1000 ET 0g keem emm em mm om om Lamm emm emm mmm mmm P Lei 231 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs A new LogView window is displayed each time a log is compiled in LogPlot Multiple LogView windows can remain open at the same time thus enabling you to compare logs display them as a pse
172. d This should also be the name of an Interval Data or Multi Interval Data listing in the data file where the data will be located If none exists you can type ina name Entity names can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Bar Graph Value column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 This Bar Graph Value column can overlay a Bar Graph column if desired Font Click on this button to access font type style size and color for the value labels If after you compile your data for this log design within LogPlot you find that the description characters are too large or too small for the given log scale you may adjust the text font and size via these dialog box items Color Use this button to select a color for the text This may also be selected using the Font button above Decimals Click on the up or down arrow as necessary to set the number of decimal places for the value labels Think about this one if the bargraph values are small be Sure to set an adequate number of decimal places Similarly large integer values won t require any decimal places Alignment Choos
173. d Line Parameters LogPlot supports command line processing and command line batch file processing The implications of this range from simple loading of a data file upon program launch to automatic display of the data file and establishment of program settings and or compiling of data files and display of a log These command line tools are used for a single data file only See also Compiling a Log Batch page 229 if you wish to compile multiple data files within the program itself using menu settings Option 1 Load a Data File at Program Startup If you want a particular data file to be loaded when LogPlot is started simply list the name of the LogPlot data file DAT including its full path after the program name on the command line For example to start up LogPlot and load the data file named project_a dat you would use the following command line LogPlot7 exe c data project_a project_a dat If there are any space characters in the path such as for the directory Documents and Settings be sure to enclose the information in quotation marks LogPlot7 exe C Documents and Settings user My Documents data DH 01 dat Option 2 Load a Data File and Establish Settings at Program Startup If you want to automate the steps of starting the LogPlot program automatically loading a particular data file AND establishing a number of program settings you can do so by creating a batch file This file contains a list of batch co
174. d drag it out of the way if you have more keywords to enter If you are working in a Lithology tab you will be returned to the tab to enter the description information If you are working in a Well Column tab you will be returned to the tab to enter any offset or caption If you are working in a Fillbar tab you will be returned to the tab to enter the next interval If you are working in a Percent tab you may make additional keyword selections by highlighting a keyword and choosing Select Once you have selected all of the desired keywords you can return to the Pattern Percentage Editor window by clicking the Close button Open a different keyword table Follow these steps to open a different keyword table L Click on the Edit Keywords button in the Lithology Selector window The program will display the Keyword Editor 2 Click on the File button at the bottom of the Keyword Editor window 195 Entering Your Data 3 Choose the Open option See below From the displayed dialog box select the name of the keyword file that you wish to display in the Editor accessing other drives or folders as necessary Note that keyword files have the file name extension KEY 5 Click the Open button to accept the selected keyword file name The program will load the information in the selected keyword file into the Editor 6 Click the OK button to return to the Lithology Selector window 7 Choose the keyword for that interval
175. d to enter downhole survey information for non vertical wells This information can be reflected on a strip log scale bar that s linked to the Orientation data tab or displayed in a Curve column showing true vertical depth LogPlot logs are always plotted as vertical but the true elevations for any well deviation can be reflected on the scale bar Corresponding log design component Downhole survey information will be represented on the log in a scale bar page 86 that s linked to this data tab It can also be represented in a Curve column page 90 set up to display true vertical depth Restrictions There can be only one Orientation tab per file How to enter the Orientation data 1 To add an Orientation tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Scale Bar or TVD Curve Column in the current log design that is set up to display true vertical depths or elevations with a name defined you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert an Orientation tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Orientation command to manually insert a tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name that has been defined in the Scale Bar settings in the log design or the TVD Curve Column to which this data page is to be
176. d with depths you can leave the depth column s blank and then enter the depths manually or automatically using the Fill Depth Column or Fill Interval Column tools Importing LAS Data The Data Editor s LAS import tool reads LAS Log ASCII Standard files version 1 2 2 for import into a Multi Curve data tab You can select the curves in the LAS file to be imported and you can request that the header information be imported into Edit Text fields using the standard Mnemonic names as the entity names This tool now also offers automatic creation of a very basic log design for the LAS file This process requires several steps which are listed below Please refer to the Help messages for more detailed instructions Help Contents Entering Your Data Importing Data Step 1 Select the LAS file to import 1 Create a new Data Editor window 2 Select the Import command from the Data Editor s File menu 3 From the pop up menu select the LAS option The first import window is used to specify the name of the file to be imported 209 Entering Your Data 1 Select a file LAS Fil name Click here to browse for the LAS file to be imported CADocumerts and Setingsueertdy Documents Loge lot Ob amples ample las Header Summacy VERS WRAP STOP STEP F NULL COMP WELL FLD LOC CHT PROV STAT a 1 20 N STRT Yerify this is the file yo F MIL LAC OIL AND GAS WORLD CLASS 1 ELE HUNT W
177. d you have licensed the program as described in the previous topics the program will now display an introductory startup screen that lists your license name and registration number la Single Users and Multi Users If you wish to hide the splash screen upon future launchings insert a check in the Skip this menu the next time the program is started check box or once LogPlot has launched use the Options System Settings Skip Intro Screen setting 12 Introduction 1b Network users only will be prompted to enter Default User ID This is typically your name or other unique identifying string The ID string is limited to 20 characters including spaces Your ID will be stored in the network Certificate File while you are using the program When you exit LogPlot using the program s File Exit command your ID will be logged out of the Certificate File The Certificate File will allow a specific number of unique users to log in at a time for example if you purchased a 5 seat license then 5 unique D s are allowed to be logged in at any one time 2 Click OK to continue The program will be displayed A sample log design will be loaded automatically into the Log Designer window and a blank data file will be loaded into the Data Editor window You will also see a tutorial window pop up onto the screen This contains lessons about the program in general and about specific tools within the program We highly recommend that you go thr
178. data file creation Open a Data File To open a LogPlot data file DAT that exists already on disk you have a few options Using the LogPlot File Manager 1 Open a project folder into the File Manager 2 Double click on the DAT file you wish to open Using the LogPlot menus 1 Click in an existing Data Editor window or if none are open create a new Data Editor window 2 In that Data Editor window select the Open button L from the Data Editor s toolbar or the Open command from the Data Editor s File menu The program will display a prompt window in which you may specify the file to open The default file type when you select File Open from the Editor window is DAT ASCII text If you are opening an old DAT file be sure to set the Files of Type to Space Delimited Data You may also specify TXT files If your text file has another file name extension select the All Files file type and the program will display all located files 141 Entering Your Data 3 Select the file you wish to open accessing other drives or directories as necessary by clicking on the name to highlight it 4 Click on the Open button The program will read the file and display the data in the appropriate data tabs in the Editor window Notes e LogPlot 7 will open data files that were used in LogPlot v 1 or LogPlot97 and will create the necessary data tabs in which to display the data However if your data blocks have
179. depth units per inch or cm for the output image The default that is displayed will be the scale currently stored as default for the Compile settings 12 Click OK to proceed The program will store the current page of the log or the entire log as requested on disk ina PNG format This file can then be opened in other graphics applications inserted into word processing documents etc Note that you cannot open the PNG version of the log within LogPlot Export Logs as TIFF This export tool exports the current log page or the entire log NEW to a TIFF format 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 If you will be exporting a single page only advance to the page you wish to export as necessary by clicking the Page Down Page Up or Go To Page buttons in the View window toolbar 3 Select the Export command from the View window s File menu Select the TIFF option 5 Filename Click on the Open button lat the right edge of the prompt to enter the name to assign to the exported file accessing other folders or drives as necessary Click OK to return to the export dialog box The program will append the appropriate file name extension TIF automatically 6 Pixels Inch In this prompt type in the number of pixels you want per horizontal and vertical inch of the TIFF image For display on screen the default settings of 96 your screen pixels per inch should work fine 244 Viewing
180. don testing log with curves and bar graphs PRDRE 7 GAA Pree Here a Pci Lia jora WY Tii Casen RW See VERT Voten Cir ug Radon Testing Inc iso pes D IFT PEZH IL cee PFE SCE LS bis ELT Voss gg Siit miii AE Gae Sta DE PERTO COMPLETE Dei Ges CALL CORTE PH Ciel Ceiri DERLER Lo s HILAR H EI sl IR Be a Hi CN RGF foes EIEN SP kussen ber j DERLAR ETE friig kitisa ee M aM Des Pih PYAR Cep ig Tyrs Cree Te Oe Ley ees f ACA BS ge ALANE TPI L eg ET agn DESP Crop ij l i I i mi A D se Boos Ta LE Dee eee jpn A hys Spee Poe dee Geen Dam i I FEEF AMPLIFI COPE ee TYPI Mrk litis mE is 1 t GETS HEE rem Ergan kom mar Dopor ez i i SE LG PH e eet ME Tes Beri iu A i pag SU a e E E 3 FTH moe Hoe LH E EPET cl erry RN l I l E 7 ra al hn SAL Seiten R 1 8 DSP oun SZ d i L LU ss een P pure mr re base ke ig BAH Wiis moh rerni ei Ba US d E E E E f Li D i SE SS E E DA SS vR a sl f d di pa i EDER hD Eirg Rock Hiara War i PHN Baar Se Fmt 3 el f 4 Gaigen CO A BL Ae Com Lit LS em Ram AN weit wegen Range i e E RR E a d 296 Reference Geophysical log designs Left Geophysicall dat Geophysicall ldfx Gamma resistivity sonic log curves Right Geophysical2 dat Geophysical2 ldfx Lithology caliper resistivity sonic curves ez Whurlse ml dente sc s z ST we i Ar F T al ml Lach P S sre H Fabia H
181. dth shown in the Printer Info section 12 Click OK in the Print Setup window to return to Log Designer 13 The program will prompt you whether you want to save the changes made click Yes 14 Compile your data into the log design 291 Reference 15 With the completed log displayed in the Log View window select File Print click OK and the printer should plot continuous logs Design J et Tips If you are printing your log to a HP Design et plotter and are getting an incomplete plot check the following 1 Access the Designjet driver in the Start Settings Printers option 2 Right click on the Design et driver icon and select Properties 3 Click on the Paper Size tab and change the Zoom Smart setting from No Scaling default to Use this scaling factor and set the scaling to 100 Click the OK button at the bottom of the plotter s Properties dialog box 5 Try printing again from LogPlot Sample Log Designs and Data Files The LogPlot program is shipped with more than 20 pre designed Log Design Files LDFX and associated LogPlot Data files DAT Note Check our web site for new log samples General log designs Left Lithologyl dat Lithology1 ldfx Simple lithology Right Lithology2 dat Lithology2 ldfx Simple lithology with descriptions GEPTH LIT HALEY DE Sh Ted Simple Logging Company 8 S PEET E DEST LMHATIF 292 Left Lithology3 dat Lithology3 ldfx corey ning Ce Preg rg Fi
182. dy a Note item in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Note entity in the current data file The program will know how to name the item based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Edit Note command to manually insert a new tab or a new entry into an existing tab Only one Notes tab is permitted Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Note item in the log design to which this entry is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Note items in the current log design Or just type in a name for the item Click OK 2 Enter the information Name The names displayed in this column are used to match the text items to a particular Edit Note entity in the log design For example the text on a row labeled Driller s Notes will be plotted in the Note block named Driller s Notes in the log s design This name is declared when you first add the Note item above and can be edited by right clicking in the body of the Notes tab and choosing Edit Entity Name Text In this column you enter the text to be plotted Double click in the cell to display a Description Editor where you can type in the text LogPlot allows you to format your text with spaces and paragraphs In the Description Editor window simply add spaces or ca
183. e Let s say you created a Well Column in Log Designer and established its diameter at 15 inches If you then declared a pattern interval in the Well Column data tab to have an Outer Diameter of 15 the pattern block would be plotted all the way to the edge of the column You may refer to the widest block in the above diagram Inner Diam The value entered in this column determines how far to the center of the Well Column that the interval will be filled with the pattern block In the widest interval Shown above for the gray gravelly looking pattern the block is plotted to an inside diameter of 11 Material In this column you type in the keyword for the well construction interval These construction keywords are listed in the same keyword library as the lithology keywords and are associated with particular patterns Keywords may be comprised of one or more words and are limited to 60 characters including spaces Shortcut Rather than typing in the keyword name just double click on the Material cell to bring up the Lithology Selector window Here you can pick from the available keywords in the current keyword file and view the pattern that is associated with them See the Lithology Selector Window page 194 for information Offset Optional This setting is used to declare the offset from the center of the well that this material block is to be plotted enabling multiple borings within a single construction diagram Negative values
184. e different kinds of information that can be plotted on the graphic log This section discusses how you set up the data tabs themselves and enter data into them These are discussed in detail in the following topics Setup tab Required Used to enter the depths represented at the top and base of the data and the XYZ location coordinates for the drill hole Bitmap tab Used to enter the name of one or more graphic image files to be inserted into a Bitmap column in the body of the log and the beginning and ending depths at which they should be plotted E Cross Plot Curves tab Here you may enter depths and two columns of measured values to be plotted in a Cross Plot Curve column E Curve tab In this tab you enter depths and a single column of measured values to be plotted in a Curve column or a Cross Plot Curve column in a log Edit Notes Tab Used to enter extended wrappable text in the header or footer of the log 148 Entering your Data Edit Text tab Used to enter the text to be plotted in the changeable text fields in a log header or footer names dates locations etc Fillbar tab In this tab you can enter depth intervals at which vertical pattern bars will be plotted on the log H Horizontal Line Tab Used to enter specific depth s at which one or more horizontal lines are to be plotted on the log Interbed Tab Used to enter specific depth interval s for interbeds that will overplot an existing Lithology P
185. e image file cannot be located it will be omitted from the log image when opened If you have set up the Bitmap Column to embed the image file in the log then the image files can be listed either by file name only or with the full path It will only be at compile time that the program will look for the image once saved in the LPT file it will not be linked 153 Entering Your Data You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the Bitmap data page See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for details Cross Plot Curves Tab Use The Cross Plot Curves tab is used to enter depths and two columns of measured data to be plotted as point to point curves in a Cross Plot Curves column Cross Plot Curves columns can also read data listings from Curve or Multi Curve tabs Corresponding log design component Data entered into the Cross Plot Curve tab will be plotted within the Cross Plot Curve column page 100 and or Curve column page 90 of the Same name if any How to Enter the Cross Plot Curve Data 1 To add anew Cross Plot Curves tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Cross Plot Curve column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Cross Plot Curve tab in the current data file The pro
186. e replaced by a specified number character etc The null values Such as 999 25 can be replaced by a numeric value such as 0 by a non numeric value Such as ND or NO DATA or by a blank just leave the prompt box blank When LogPlot plots curves numeric null replacements will be plotted at their true value Non numeric replacements and blanks will be skipped Resample Data Insert a check here to skip some of the lines of the input file and specify the sampling interval For example if the LAS data is recorded every 0 2 feet but you prefer a resolution of 1 foot for use in LogPlot you would set the interval to every 5th line Entering your Data Decimal Places Type in the number of decimal places to be listed for the curve data values 4 Click Next Step 4 Set up the log design On this final import screen LogPlot offers the option of creating automatically a very basic log design based on the imported LAS data 1 Check this box if you want a LAS Import X basic log design to be created for this data 4 Create LogDesign and mech Create LDFX 2 Click here to enter the name C Documents and Settings molly My Documents LogPiot Samples ias_design KN 3 for the LDFX 3 Choose which file type of header Curves labeling you want Include Header InfoAs Legend Static Text Omit LogDesign Filename Width m 4 Set up the curves See text for details
187. e Left to align the first characters of the value labels along the left edge of the column defined above Or choose Right to align the last character of each label along the right edge of the column also defined above Opaque Text Background Insert a check here if the labels are to block out any background items or leave this blank to leave the text transparent so that any background items are still visible Draw column outline Insert a check here if you want the Bar Graph Value column to be bounded by a solid line rectangle If this column is overlaying another column that already has a frame you may wish to disable this outline 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Bar Graph Value column placed in the design screen You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Bar Graph Value Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Bar Graph Value Column right click on the Bar Graph Value Column and select Edit Entity or find the Bar Graph Value Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding a Text Column Use A Text column is used to plot in the body of the log any miscellaneous text that is NOT associated with a lithologic pattern Text columns can be used to plot comments or other labels they are defined wi
188. e able to drag the line up or down in the design screen its representation should be used to determine horizontal placement only Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Horizontal Line in the design screen right click on the Horizontal Line and select Edit Entity or find the Horizontal Line in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button 126 Designing Your Logs Adding Vertical Log Body Lines Use The Vertical Line tool is used simply to plot a vertical line anywhere on the body of the log It can be used to darken column boundaries and to create a solid line border around the log How it works This is a log design item only it will be represented in the compiled log like it is in the log design There are no corresponding data file commands LogPlot data tabs None How to Insert a vertical line into the log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod ke Se if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Vertical Line button Prom the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Vertical Line The pointer will change shape to a for placing the line on the design screen 4 Place the at the horizontal location in the body of the log design where the line should be placed and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the line setti
189. e also established under the Options Log Settings menu See references for each step under topics below 225 Compiling Your Logs 1 Verify the printer amp page settings Compile All Open Logs emm Log Settings 2 Set vertical Scale 10 scale Man Header Footer Patter Symbols Scaling Depth Units Per Inch Depth Units per Centimeter C Positive Depths 3 Yerify current Log Design File Val log design C Documents and Settings My Documerts LogPlot LDFX file e Page Numbering Main Header Footer Pater Symbols 4 Set starting Starting Page Number 1 DI Magne page 11 Margin between Header Footer and Log Body A T e Page Settings 5 Establish the header amp footer pagination Pi Continuous Dutput settings Click the Header Footer button F Report First Page Main Header Footer Patter Symbols Header Footer x Options 6 Check pattern e i Middle Pages amp symbol Panem Denely Facts Header2 Footer2 Click on the C No Solid Fill Pattems Last Page e amd Ginirali e Heade 2 Footer 2 v Pattern Embed Pattems and Symbols in compiled log h Symbol tab 7 When all of the settings are displayed to your satisfaction click on the OK button to have the program compile the data in all open DAT files into plottable logs That s it The program will read the data contained in the Data Editor windows and match the fields to the ite
190. e button to place it Tip You can place a Text Column right on top of another log design entity For example when placed on top of a Curve Column a Text Column can be used to mark items of note at specific depths 5 Enter the column settings in the displayed window 113 Designing Your Logs Text Column Options Name Sampling Method Position Lett 1 Right 1 5 Options lf Frame Column Font E Test Alignment e Left 0 05 C Center f Right Margin Name Enter the name for this Text Column Any text entered in a LogPlot Text Column data tab with the same name will be plotted in this column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Text Column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Frame Column If this box is checked the column will be bounded by a solid line rectangle Font Use this button to retrieve the Font dialog box where you can establish the font type style size and color to be used for the text column If after you compile your data for this log design within LogPlot you find that the characters are too larg
191. e coordinates You can also use the dialog box to change font type and sizes for text items line styles etc de 2 Click on the pointer button in the Designer toolbar Double click on the text item to display its dialog box Or right click on the item and select Edit Entity Or double click on the item in the Edit View Entity List screen 39 Designing Your Logs 3 Edit the x and or y coordinates for the item 4 Click the Apply button to see the effect of the position change 5 Click Close to close the Settings window and return to the design screen It is typically easier to use the manual method since it involves working right on the design screen and you can see what you are doing And with the reference grid and snapping features it s easy to line things up However you might find it valuable to use dialog box coordinates if you need to align items at a resolution different than that of the snapping grid For example if you have a column of header text that you want to be lined up along the left edge you could use each item s dialog box to set the horizontal x coordinate to the same value PROJECT NUMBER 1991 66 PROJECT MAME TAC LOCATION OVER THE RAINBOW DRILLING CO McEACHRAN amp SON DRILLING METHOD AIR ROTARY FIELD PARTY Minden Hartley GEOLOGIST McEachran coordinate for all of these Edit Text items is the same Shifting Header Footer Items To shift all of the items in the he
192. e description characters are too large or too small for the given log scale you may adjust the text font and size via these dialog box items Color Use this button to select a color for the text This may also be selected using the Font button above Horizontal Alignment Choose Left Right or Center for the alignment of the description text within the column Margin Type in a margin in screen pixels to be enforced along the left right upper and lower edges of the column and interval You should probably start with o0 and then increase it as necessary Interval Decimals Here you can type or use the prompt s up or down arrows to define how many decimal places you want displayed for the depth intervals if you ve requested the intervals be plotted see below The appropriate number to define will depend on the number of decimal places defined within your actual depth entries in the Lithology data tab For example if your lithology depth intervals are entered as integers you should set this to 0 If your lithology depths are entered to 1 decimal place you should set this to 1 and so on Options Note that these options will apply to all of the intervals being plotted in the Lithology Description column Interval Expand this heading to select whether the depth at the top of the interval and or the depth at the base of the intervals are to be included in the description text The first example below shows the description text
193. e eg aa sii Hys Se ri mpe zB Tha DEH V Bop Eege L a t S Dihi kitl wt al ge Volcanol dat Volcanol ldfx Reference Lithology with descriptions and cuttings Right USCS dat USCS ldfx Simple reference log displaying some USCS soil classifications bipi iinr Firmen ae Lire Wie rude gris e green recite Nora up Dat pisi pesi geval tnedemotuen Bi cy re freer Sis ee pee h mira CH PEHI goth artis rd ie deed vee oppen needs ile o oo ira Past pisi mrii o es eed Ei ce pa Bra oi Dar ree ae eae Chen Geren H a epee ap eed sey eae eck bey cp a dite di diyip r e n rd pai y ea can eee is ads ply Capri ein eed ee i lie iy hep ee oe ee Peed m rE ikii miia ili kva peni cirya m high piaia Te chrys Tapk G apie e bight partc r sr py Pagi ard pies high is poppei r ga is Volcano log Veh Misir dur gie ircsl Sart Elease Loes Cherri I less la reg 1 emm r ee ee 1 BLI LOTIT E f Tr i E Keel be E Be ir U V el LE 7 wi aa ES D i 8 Li P i TI ieii i LEE H i E E iT Pt F zelt kb 293 Reference Environmental Geotechnical Log Designs Left Enviro geotechl dat Enviro geotechl ldfx Soils hydrocarbons lithology Right Enviro geotech2 dat Enviro geotech2 ldfx Lithology VOC curve ALFA EN YIROMMEN DAL IN Project Sine my i I Project We 25m bow fei CLIT Butt HiL HEGE P Ze Ge Ge Bar Tarra PROMIT Su 37 48 MORH ATIC
194. e it but it will plot as default Should you choose not to e If your Curve column is set up for display of automatic value labels within the column itself they will be updated automatically for this scale change You may use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Symbol Tab Use The Symbol tab is used to enter depths and symbol numbers for plotting graphic symbols in a Symbol column in the body of the log Note that we use the term symbol to mean a single graphic item such as this Ww In contrast we use the term pattern to mean a repeating graphic block usually used to kt represent roc 178 ype such as these 44a K Zoe Entering your Data If you wish to insert symbols in the header or footer of the log that is done within the Log Designer using the Header Footer Symbol tool Corresponding log design component Data listed in this tab will be plotted on the log in the Symbol column page 116 of the same name How to enter the Symbol Column data E To add a new Symbol tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Symbol column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Symbol tab in the cu
195. e lithology and text options reversed lithology intervals See page 283 Program Files Select the active keyword pattern and symbol files for the current log See page 285 Printer Settings Double check the selected printer and the current paper size type and orientation See page 287 Compiling a Single Log The process of compiling a single log involves selecting the data file that contains the data to be displayed on the log and establishing the compiling settings How to Select the Data File 223 Compiling Your Logs 1 Click in the Data Editor window containing the data you wish to compile into a log 2 Select the Compile button SI from the Data Editor toolbar Or you can select the Compile a Log command from the Data Editor s Log menu Set the Compiling Settings The program will display a dialog box where you can confirm a number of log settings These options are also established under the Options Log Settings menu See references for each step under topics below 1 Yerify the printer amp page settings Top Bottom Settings 2 Yerify starting Depth Interval and ending Top of Interval 0 vw OK depths for log Bottom of Interval EL x e i i Bebe 3 Set vertical Scale 6 F Fit Lo Ei gloFage scale m Sealing Depth Unite Per Inch O Depth Units per Centimeter L Positive Depths 4 Verify current log design LDFX file Log Design Fie UC h
196. e log header body and footer This will tell the LogPlot program where all of your different data types will be plotted This is a new file type since LogPlot2005 which used binary LDF files e LogPlot 7 will open both LDFX and LDF format files e It will save only LDFX format The LDFX file that is displayed in the Log Designer is considered to be the default Log Design to be used in LogPlot when you compile your log The name of the current log design is also displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window 23 Designing Your Logs See also The LogView window page 231 for information about how to save export completed compiled graphic logs Create a New Design File To create a new blank work screen for designing a log format 1 Access the Log Designer window as necessary 2 Click on the File menu and select New LogDesign or click the New File toolbar button Since the Log Designer permits only one design to be open at a time if an existing log design file is open and has not been saved when New is selected the program will ask you whether you wish to save it Answer as appropriate The program will then display a window in which you must give the new log design a name 3 Inthe File Name prompt type in the name to assign the new design you will be creating Log Design files must be given the file name extension LDFX 4 Click the Save button The Log Designer screen will be cleared dis
197. e or more new keyword s from the Lithology Selector window You may declare up to 20 keywords in Pattern Percentage Editor window See the discussion of the Lithology Selector window earlier in this section To delete a keyword that is currently listed in the Pattern Percentage Editor window click on the keyword and press the Delete button The keyword will be removed from the display To move a keyword up or down in the listing click on the keyword drag it to its new location and release the mouse button 5 When you are done declaring all of the keywords to be displayed in order in the Percent tab click on the OK button at the bottom of the Pattern Percentage Editor window You will be returned to the Percent tab with the requested keywords displayed as column headers Edit Multi Column Headers The Edit Multi Column Headers command is available as a right click option from within the Multi Curve and Multi Interval Data tabs This command is used to change the entity name s to which the Curve Bar Graph Bar Graph Value or Interval Text data listings will be matched The names are displayed as column headers in the Multi Curve and Multi nterval Data tabs How to Edit the multi column headers To modify any of the column headers of a Multi Curve or Multi nterval Data tab follow these steps 1 Click in the tab to be modified to make it active 2 Right click anywhere within the tab 3 Select the Edit Multi Column
198. e or too small for the given log scale you may access the font settings again using the Font button Color Use this button to select a color for the text This may also be selected using the Font button above Margin Type here the number of screen pixels to act as a margin along the left and right edges of the text column Text Alignment Choose Left Center or Right by clicking in the appropriate radio button 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Text column placed in the design screen labeled Text Col You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Text Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Text Column right click on the Text Column and select Edit Entity or find the Text Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button 114 Designing Your Logs Adding a Vertical Text Column Use A Vertical Text column is used to plot vertical text labels within the body of the log How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate text listed in a Vertical Text Column tab of the same name and plot it in the Vertical Text column at the indicated depth or elevation range Vertical text can be used to note interpreted stratigraphic units geologic time units etc Alternativ
199. e prompt will also allow you to type in a name This must match character for character the name that is assigned to the corresponding item in the log design The match is not case sensitive 5 Click OK to continue The program will display the new name at the top of the data tab For the Edit Text tab the entity names are listed as the first entry of each row See also Automatic Data File Tools page 191 Edit Percentage Headers The Edit Percentage Headers command is available as a right click option from within the Percent tab It is used to change the name and or number of lithology keywords to be represented in the tab A Percent tab is used to enter depth intervals and relative percentages of up to 20 rock types to be displayed as graphic patterns in a Percent Column 200 Entering your Data How to Edit the percentage headers To add change the lithology keywords listed in the Percent tab follow these steps 1 Click on the Percent data tab to be modified to make it active 2 Right click in any cell within the tab 3 Select the Edit Percentage Headers command from the pop up menu The program will display the Pattern Percentage Editor window In this window is listed the keywords currently declared for the Percent tab 4 Here you may add delete or reposition the keywords To add a keyword to the listing displayed in the Pattern Percentage Editor window click on the Add Keyword button You can then select on
200. e same data file answering NO to the prompt that asks whether you wish to save the current changes Be warned however that any other editing changes you had made since the last time you saved the file will also be lost Save a Data File Changes you have made to the current data file displayed in the Editor can be saved on disk using the Save command 1 Select the Save button Kl the Data Editor s toolbar or the File menu s Save command If the data file already has a name as shown in the program title bar selecting Save will save the current version on disk under the same name 145 Entering Your Data 2 3 If the data file is untitled as shown in the program title bar the program will display a standard Windows Save As dialog box in which you can specify the name under which the file is to be saved The default file type is ASCII text with the file extension DAT Type in the name for the file accessing other drives or directories as necessary Choose the OK button The program will save the data in the current Editor window on disk If you wish to save an existing data file under a different file name use the Save As command L 2 3 Select the Save As command from the Data Editor s File menu The program will display a standard Windows Save As dialog box in which you can specify the name under which the file is to be saved The default file type is ASCII text with the file extension DAT T
201. e same file name since the extension will be changed to LDFX For example your file borehole log Idf will be saved as a LogPlot 7 compatible file borehole log Idfx To save a log design file LDFX or LDF that is displayed on your screen under a different file name 1 Select the Save As command from the File menu 2 Enter the new name to assign to the design file accessing necessary drives and or directories and choose OK The Log Designer permits only one log design file to be open at any time The LDFX file displayed in the Designer screen is automatically set as the default log design file in LogPlot Save Design Previews Any time that you select the Save or Save As commands from the Log Designer s File menu or click on the Save toolbar button the program will save any changes you have made in the current log design on disk under the existing or specified LDFX file name It will also automatically save a preview of the log design using the J PEG J PG graphic format The JPEG preview will be assigned the same file name as the LDFX file with preview PG added on and will be stored in the same folder on your computer as the LDFX file For example when the Lithologyl ldfx file is saved the preview file Lithologyl preview jpg is created or updated automatically The preview file is displayed within the Log Designer s Open File dialog box making it easier to determine which design file you wish to open
202. e structure or command syntax of these files is invisible to the user because of the Data Editor which loads the blocks of information into data tabs We include this information here so that if you are familiar with the program and wish to construct the data files in another application you will know the required structure for each data block in order to compile the log using a command line batch or to load the data into the Data Editor s data tabs Please see Help Contents Reference Data Format for details 302 Index alignment tools 38 72 automatic data tools 191 axes S Callin DEE 268 270 Bar Graph Value Column 64 111 164 171 Bar Graph Curve Legende 64 Bar Grapbes 64 107 164 171 Datch COMPING aerer 229 Bitmap GOlLUM DE 119 Bitmap data tab EE 152 BMP files 46 119 152 240 263 269 270 Check Data Against Log Design 193 close data Eege 148 columns data 200 201 203 elei e re EE 301 compiling logs ai Denn 229 Compile alog 223 227 COMPING EE 225 227 COLORS ssa vv EE vie ia 288 GEN geet 223 SELINO ee 275 construction column 121 185 Create New Data Template 192 Cross Plot Curves 64 100 154 155 169 Cross Plot Curves data tab 154 Curve data Tabirini ai aaa 155 Curve Bar Graph Legend 64 CUVE S airen ue 64 90 155 169 177 Eeer 41 75 197 cuttings see Percent Column 105 DAT files 140 148
203. eader Items and Shift Footer I tems commands are not affected by any Snapping settings you may have established Cut paste or copy paste header footer items To cut or copy header or footer items and then paste them follow these steps 1 Click on the item s in the log header or footer to be cut or copied They should appear with handles in the upper left corner static text on either end lines or on all corners other header footer items 2 If you wish to remove the selected item s click on the Cut toolbar button ah or select the Cut command from the Edit menu The item s will be removed from the header footer and placed in the Log Designer clipboard If you wish to make a copy of the selected item s click on the Copy toolbar button H or select the Copy command from the Edit menu The item s will remain in the design and a copy will be placed in the Log Designer clipboard 3 Click in the region into which the item s should be pasted Remember to toggle between the active header and footer panes using the drop down list at the bottom of the program window 4 Paste the cut or copied item s into the selected header or footer by clicking on the Paste toolbar button 2 or by choosing the Paste command from the Edit menu 41 Designing Your Logs Log Designer will insert the item s If the item is pasted into the same region footer2 to footer2 or header 1 to header 1 then the coordinates will be offset sl
204. eader are expressed as decimal inches centimeters relative to the top of the paper or design screen At the top of the header the y coordinate is 0 It extends down to the length of the currently selected printer page The vertical coordinates of the footer are recorded in decimal inches centimeters relative to the top of the footer Ruler units will represent inches or centimeters based on the units established under File Page Printer Setup 802 045 Ea 0 0984 d Header 1 sl Foote gt 7 You can turn on a reference grid at a user defined pixel density to aid you in placing header items You can also activate snapping of items to that grid 33 Designing Your Logs The entirety of the header or footer may not be visible at one time you may use the scroll bars to view hidden portions or you may increase the size of the visible header or footer pane You can change the units that are displayed in the reference ruler by selecting the Inches versus cm s option in the printer and page settings File Page Print Setup command If you change the units in the page setup be sure to re compute the default page size You may use as much or as little of the available header and footer space as you wish When you compile your data into the log design within LogPlot the program will honor any white Space at the top of the header and footer assuming you ve left that space there
205. ed in order for the tabs to be draggable e Once you get the tab sequence as you want it you might want to de activate the Allow data tabs to be dragged option so that they don t get re arranged by accident Wrapped versus Scrolling Tabs By default LogPlot displays all of the data tabs in a wrapped manner so that multiple rows of tabs can be visible You can toggle this to a scrolling display of the tabs using the Options Scrolling Tabs option Scrolling Tabs On In the first example shown below there is only one row of visible data tabs with some tabs hidden from view The program allows you to scroll to the left and right to view hidden tabs using the arrow buttons along the right edge of the window e gang 3 s H D Aa Design Mining2 Idfx Se SS Data Mining2 dat Click here to view hidden tabs tA tA pm gege ES SETUP E TEXT Fossils fi Mo s Lithology Mineralization FG Alteration El Recovery k20 Top Base Lithology Contact Description up to 2000 Characters A 0 00 6 00 LIMESTONE medium gray to dark gray thinly bedded no visible Fossils secondary 6 00 10 00 CHERT cryptocrystalline bedded alternating black gray and white 1 4 inch bi 10 00 14 00 ARGILLACEOUS LIMESTONE buff minor echinoids 14 00 19 00 SANDSTONE white orthoquartzite very well rounded well cemented silica matrix Fr 19 00 23 00 Quartz Latite crystal Fragments in DEVITRIFIED glass matrix 23 00 28 00 DOLOM
206. ed interval The closer value will be weighted more than the more distant value Closest Point This option simply selects the point closest to the resampled interval 3 Additional Information Positive Depth Insert a check here if the depths are to be exported as positive values Null Value Type here the value to be used to represent null values in the output file For LAS files this is typically set to 999 25 and this value will be used to represent any blank cells in the data file 219 Entering Your Data Depth Decimals Use the up or down arrow to set the number of decimal places to be used in the recorded depth values Data Decimals Use the up or down arrow button to set the number of decimal places to be used to record the curve percent interval and other data Note that this will be used for all exported columns be sure to use an adequate number Use Fixed Column Widths Insert a check here if all of the columns are to be set toa fixed width Use the up or down arrow to define the number of spaces to allot to each column LAS files use lt Space gt characters to pad the columns Fixed Width off DEE 55 gt 2 0 0 At EE suk 62 00 Eh Fixed Width on set to a width of 8 characters ER Ek 39a O T000 Ceol 8 00 JE KD 4 Click Next Select the data to export On the next screen is listed all of the data in the current LogPlot DAT file that can be exported into the Curves section of the LAS file This can inc
207. ed you should access the Log Designer window and use File Open to open that LDFX file To cross check the files you might click back into the Data Editor window and select Data Check Data Against Log Design This will give you a report of mis matched items in the data and design files You can update either as necessary or go ahead and compile anyway 3 Compile the data into the design Click into the Data Editor window where the LAS curves are stored Click the Compile button SL choose Log Compile a log 214 Entering your Data Accept the default log top and base Set the scale to an appropriate vertical scale for the data range in depth units per inch or cm Be sure Positive Depths is checked if the log top and base are listed as positive values Be sure it is not checked if the top and base are entered as negative values In the Header Footer tab you will probably want to check the Continuous Output checkbox a typical setting for long elog displays Click the Print Setup button along the right to double check your printer settings See Compiling Logs page 223 Click OK The program will compile the available data into the current log design and display the graphic strip log in a Log View window If you see a message The bottom must be lower than the top of a boring log click OK and then check or un check the Positive Depths setting and try again 4 Use the scroll bars and PgUp and PgDn buttons or keys to move
208. ed Fields corresponds to the fields in the DBF file Also listed to the right will be each DBF field s type C for character N for numeric length and number of decimal places Starting with the first DBF field in the first row click on the first cell to select from the pop up list the data tab column in which this field s data is to be listed If you wish to Skip the first DBF field set the Column to None You may need to scroll up in the pop up list to locate None Continue with the second DBF field Click in the first cell of the second row to select the data column in which this field s data is to be listed Again if you don t want this information imported into the tab select None Continue in this manner for all of the DBF fields as shown below Entering your Data import DBF Select the Fields to Import tram C Project 21 Zvroect 21 3 dbt SYMBOL These DBF fields will not be imported into the data tab since EASTING then columns are set to None NORTHING K E GOLD N E SILVER H 13 LEAD 10 hl These DBF fields will be imported ZINC into the selected data tab columns TIN MERCURY ANTIMONY 9 Click Finish to proceed with the import The program will extract the selected fields in the DBF file and list them in the requested columns in the data tab LogPlot data tabs require that the first one or two columns list point depths or top bottom depth intervals If the imported DBF file isn t liste
209. ed menu You can also choose the Delete Note command from the Data menu The program will NOT warn you before deleting Be careful If you inadvertently deleted the item you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design command to re insert the item automatically Inserting Appending Deleting Rows When you right click on a LogPlot data tab a pop up menu will appear The following Rows tools are available Rows Append is used to add rows to the end of the active data tab Rows Insert is used to add rows within the data listing in the active data tab Rows Delete command is available as a right click option from within all of the LogPlot data tabs This command is used to delete rows in the active data tab Rows Go to command is available as a right click option from within all of the LogPlot data tabs This command is used to advance the cursor to a particular row in the active data tab See also Deleting Data Items page 145 for information about deleting entire data tabs See the program help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data Entering the Data Other Data Tools for more information Manipulating Columns of Values When you right click on a LogPlot data tab a pop up menu will appear The following Columns tools are available 203 Entering Your Data Columns Math is used to perform arithmetic operations with the values in one of the data columns in the active data tab LogPlot offe
210. efine any outline color and line style 6 Click Apply to apply the settings you ve chosen Click Close to close the World Options window 7 You can access the image s options at any time by double clicking on the image or by right clicking and choosing Properties 8 You can resize the image block by first single clicking on the image to see the boundary handles Then click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or edges and drag to the new position Release the mouse button when the boundary s edges are in the correct position The raster image will be redrawn within the new boundary using the scaling you ve selected 9 Reposition the image as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and dragging it to the new location 270 ReportWorks Inserting a Scale Bar into a ReportWorks Page Use the Scalebar menu command or toolbar button to insert a scale bar on an existing ReportWorks page You can adjust the style and scaling L Z 3 Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary Create a new layer as necessary 1 Click on the Scalebar toolbar button E or choose the Tools Scalebar menu command Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the scale bar s rectangular area is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of the diagonal corner point and release the mouse button As you d
211. ells arted firm to brittle Salt and pepper glauconitic Small fracture C14 at 1627 and this on the compiled log Cut Copy Paste These three commands are available as right click options from within any of LogPlot s data tabs They are also available as commands within the Edit menu and with the keyboard shortcuts shown These commands are used as follows Cut Ctri X This removes any highlighted information from the active data tab and stores it in your computer s Clipboard memory for later pasting Copy Ctri C This places a copy of any highlighted information in the active data tab and places it in your computer s Clipboard memory for later pasting 197 Entering Your Data Paste Ctrl V This places into the active data tab any text information in the Clipboard The information will be inserted starting in the highlighted cell and will extend downward in the tab Note that any existing information will be overwritten Select All Ctri A This selects all of the data within the current tab Once highlighted you can use the Cut or Copy commands Fill Depth Column The Fill Depth Column command is available as a right click option from within many of the LogPlot data tabs It is used to populate automatically a single column of depth values at regular increments into a tab s Depth column starting at the current cursor position in the tab To add depth values to a tab follow these steps Click in the tab to
212. ements ccceeeeeeeeeee eens 7 system settinges 283 tables Gel EE 251 285 DEES gn EE 253 264 285 SVMDOIS eege ge 257 264 285 tabs data 144 145 148 204 205 283 Wad te EE 128 181 Tadpoles datatab eens 181 text header amp footer 52 56 59 62 64 157 158 in log body 81 111 112 115 130 164 166 171 182 184 IN REPOrtWOrkS ccc ce eeceeeeeeeeaees 267 ext COMM isis ceacnchnanseanisareennens 112 182 Text Column data tab ssnesnneenrennn 182 FOAME S cerere eae a EA 269 TIFF files 46 119 152 240 269 270 troubleshooting 288 289 290 291 292 Hie e 264 Update Data Template from Log Design 194 VEN ELC all LINE EE 127 Vertical TeX EE 115 184 Vertical Text datatab es 184 View Entity Uert 66 133 Well Column data tab 185 Well Construction Column 121 185 well LOCATION ccc cccec cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 150 WMF files 5 46 119 152 240 269 A dE 217 221 xyz coordinates of well 150
213. ength including spaces Position Use the Left and Right boxes to define the horizontal positioning for the line If for example you want the line plotted from the far left side of the log to the far right side you would enter coordinates that correspond to the left most and the right most log items The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the line s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the line itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 The depth of the line will be defined in the data file or using Automatic Intervals below Line Click on this box to choose the line style thickness and color for the horizontal line Automatic Intervals Insert a check here if you want the horizontal line to be plotted at regular intervals down the log If activated you can enter the depth intervals in the prompt box If not activated you ll need to specify the depth s at which the line is to be plotted via the data file You can request both automatic intervals AND enter customized depths To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the line displayed in the design screen You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied To close the Horizontal Body Line window click the Close button will not b
214. er 1 Use your mouse to position the screen pointer on an item and click the left button once 2 Then hold the Ctrl key down while you select another item 36 Designing Your Logs 3 You may continue in this manner to select multiple items All selected items will appear with handles on their corners OR 1 Use the screen pointer to draw a rectangular region within the header or footer Any items in whole or in part within that bounding rectangle will appear selected with handles To select all of the items in a log header or footer 1 Use your mouse to click in the pane of the items to be selected 2 Choose the Edit Select All in Pane option The program will select all of the items in the pane To select an item using the lt lt and gt gt buttons LogPlot offers two buttons at the bottom of the design screen that can advance sequentially through the log entities ee s nmr oes 1 Any time that a log design is displayed on the screen you can click on the forward or backward arrow buttons at the bottom of the design screen to advance sequentially through the log entities changing the highlighted focus of the entities in the order they were added to the log design The selected item should appear with handles on either end if it is a line or on all four corners all other header footer items Use the Entity List to access a design item and its settings 1 With a log design dis
215. er use this macro d Inserts today s date in the text area when the log is compiled Text Alignment Click in the Left Center or Right radio button to choose the alignment within the defined block Font Use this button to access the Font dialog box where you may set the Note s font type size and color Color Use this button to change the color for the text This can also be selected using the Font button Border If you want the Notes block to be outlined insert a check in the Outline check box and choose a line color Fill If you want the Notes block to be filled with color insert a check in the Fill check box and choose a fill color 61 Designing Your Logs 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the text placed in the header or footer in the design window You may continue to adjust the text if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied For the Static Notes block it s possible that the Position settings don t allow enough Space to see the text once you ve clicked Apply you ll either need to modify the Position coordinates or close the Note Setup window to resize the block manually 7 To close the Note Setup window click the Close button Reposition the Notes Block See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Text Settings If you need to access the Setup
216. er I mage into a ReportWorks Page Use the Georaster menu command or toolbar button to insert into a ReportWorks page a raster image that has an associated world file for geo referencing its coordinates You can adjust the image s scaling and outline See the Raster tool for inserting generic non geo referenced raster images 1 Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary 2 Create a new layer as necessary 3 Click on the Raster toolbar button G or choose the Tools GeoRaster menu command 4 Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the image is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of the diagonal corner point and release the mouse button As you drag you ll see a rubber band image of the shape s outline 5 The program will display the World Options dialog box Click on the Raster tab to define the image to be placed on the page select its world file and define its scaling and settings Raster File Browse for the BMP J PG or TIFF file to be inserted into the space you defined World File Browse for the World file associated with the raster image Embed Link Choose whether the file will be linked to the ReportWorks document or embedded within it Scaling Define the number of map units per inch or cm of paper Establish other diagram settings margins etc Click on the Outline tab to d
217. er permits you to view a listing of all of the items that are currently included in the open log design 1 Select the View Entity List button from Log Designer s left hand toolbar S or the Same command from the Edit menu The program will display a window that looks like this Each item that you ve inserted into the log design header footer amp body items will be listed here Click on any column heading to sort the list by that column Entity Listing E Hame Enhly Type Loestion Lett Top Book Humte d Tea Headed 7 50625 0 4689 Borehole Number Edt Teri Hsadz 1 6 634 DU 2083 Company Edit T ext Header 1 1 543 1 0334 Completan d Tea Headz 7 21746 LZ Drill Method Eds T ext Hewes 1 153 Lad Feld Faily Ecd Tea Headers i 1 5935 1 5104 Geologet Edt Text Haades 1 CET 1 7183 Locahon Ed t Text Hesje 1 KE D PA Project Mame Ed Tea Headew i 1 5335 EFT Project Mumbe Edt T exi Headz 1 1 553 04683 Start Dae d Tea Heades 1 1 2768 1 9277 Gunlare Ed t T ext Haades 1 d 016750 Total Depth Edt Teg Heades 1 DE Z DEST Ciil Fill Bar Leg Bady Organic Yapa Fill Bar Log Boch Samples Fill Bar Lee Bock Header Lire Heades 1 Header Lire Header 1 Header Le Haades 1 Header Lire Hewes 1 1 4167 Closes the Deletes the Cre ates a GSW report Entity List highlighted item of the Entity List Accesses the Options window of the highlighted item 66 Designing Your Logs How to View the Current List of Log Entities L With the Enti
218. er to be able to poll the data ranges and display colors and styles 64 Designing Your Logs Position These coordinates determine the placement of the edges of the legend block in the header or footer of the log The X coordinate represents the horizontal left to right placement and the Y coordinate the vertical placement in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the top of the header or footer The defaults reflect the location where the block was drawn step 4 above You may change the legend placement by editing these values or by moving resizing the block itself on the design screen often easier Units inches or centimeters are declared under the File Page Print Setup option Outline Insert a check here to display a solid line border around the legend Fill Insert a check here to fill the legend block with a color and choose the color from the color box Plot Graphic Insert a check here to display a sample of the curve line style and color or the bar graph color in the legend as shown below RMF gt RV Ea Se L a Shadow Aaa 2000 Sch a i ee Titles tab Primary Title This generally defaults to the name of the curve or bar graph selected on the Main tab You can type in the desired text for the legend title Click the Font button to choose a font type style and size Use the Color button to choose the color for the text Secondary Title This generally defaults blank You can type i
219. errors in their syntax you may get unpredictable results as the program tries to put them into tabs e LogPlot 7 will open LogPlot98 LogPlot2001 LogPlot2003 and LogPlot2005 data files seamlessly though it will translate any lt Space gt delimiters to lt Tab gt characters when the DAT file is saved You may need to specify Space Delimited Data as the file type to be opened e In LogPlot 7 you can open a DAT file from within any of the program windows such as the Log Designer but you will need to be sure to specify DAT as the file type The program will open the file into a new Data Editor window Open Data Files using the File Manager How to Open a Single Data File 1 Expand the File Manager s Data heading as necessary 2 Double click on the DAT file you wish to open LogPlot will open the selected data file into the Data Editor window You can have multiple DAT files open at the same time Open Multiple Data Files 1 Expand the File Manager s Data heading as necessary 2 Insert a check mark next to the names of the DAT files you wish to open 3 Right click in the File Manager 4 Choose Open Selected Files from the pop up menu 142 Entering your Data C Smith Project Ell BA Design boreh E Smith Project iE Data fdat BH1 det KR El con T BH2dat ml mr wv BH4 dat M BHS dat Compile Selected Files M BH dat Open Selected Files R 4 RockWorks D Select All ES LogDesign h Unselec
220. es Le diriwt ste rH fei 5 Sep t pd Fsh H en SR EST HEEN ee al s sp ken Leeren zik Jabe bebe LEd HHEH oft Ei EE phe a WE H bz Lantan RW Logging CO SAMPLE WELL CONSTRUCTION Ui Parine Hele wh Bodb able epp E Serben forme Chegted A babhi 6 VE Ben Hei Thiania iiaia Erminia Hoa Cam gl Pack Sommer Laima Dag 20 je G Beker aap ur of Bateau final Conte Flog 295 Reference Left Enviro geotech9 dat Enviro geotech9 Idfx Well construction with 2 borings Right Enviro geotech10 dat Enviro geotech10 ldfx Lithology hydrocarbons well constr SAMPLE WELL CONSTRUCTION Beep Dom Ceri Prope Cimi FF Loris Ha EH e Sys Pimi i Mein Louie bes Lep HE DW bi kr ie Pi sihi Ti Er kri y Defi hm Dera mi 1D d kK HEED eiis CA ES I D f Frin rimm z d npa Open Vtt GRO e eg Ex rire i I US batnr Sieg F amit Lb d a E Km Si gt 1 5 ng pe eg d E D e r H mi F b b 2 i mei Hi mI Taare ep der ER ra an RW ET Uist dl hH ii Pr vw am LG gg a Lo ia i k i u Kg bh rh a key As E 7 ij ik en Si H iH A H da H Eh d vw Ven wi d IR 7 d In CH oF ay ai eH Pet vs ep d 1 an i a 2 Ral Sean rhi ap d PP a kd ni ahi rk all iH dll He t E HI Ka E F mg IC 4 mei 8 m be i Hi Ip WE E m m m Sera ehe Pa EN a Page 1 ep een EI LAT i IL Left Penn DOT dat Penn DOT Idfx PA DOT geotechnical log Right Radon dat Radon Idfx Ra
221. es Vertical text labels in the header or footer of the log are inserted using the Static Text tool Horizontal text listings in the log body are inserted using the Text Column or Interval Text Column tool LogPlot data tabs Vertical Text Columns are linked to data entered into Vertical Text data tabs page 184 How to Insert a Vertical Text Column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod bs e if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Vertical Text Column button UE from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Vertical Text Column The pointer will change shape to a El for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the column cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and click the left mouse button to place it 5 Enter the column settings in the displayed window Vertical Text Column Setup Name Formation Name Position Left 3 875 Right 4 375 Options jw Frame Column Fill Background i e Text Down C Text Up Vertical Text Col IY Plot Arrows Font mm Name Enter the name for this Vertical Text column Any text entered in a LogPlot Vertical Text data tab with the same name will be plotted in this column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces
222. es column is a specialized type of curve plotting column in which two curves are displayed in the same column Distinct colors can be selected for the curves themselves and for the region where the curves cross How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate curve data flagged with the same names as the curves set up in the Cross Plot Curve column in the design The data may be plotted from left to right or right to left linear or logarithmic scale with or without horizontal or vertical reference grids You may vary the line color thickness line style solid fill and cross fill for the curves 100 Designing Your Logs Alternatives Columns in which individual curves are displayed are designed with the Curve Column tool LogPlot data tabs The data for a Cross Plot Curve Column can be read from a Cross Plot Curve tab page 154 a Multi Curve tab page 169 or a regular Curve tab page 155 in the data file This means that a single curve data listing can be plotted in several places on the log How to Insert a Cross Plot Curve Column in the log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button is Log Body 3 Select the Cross Plot Curves Column button EI the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Crossplot Curves Column if necessary to display the log body buttons The pointer will ch
223. es on all sides New tools Undo added to the Log Design window The LAS import tool offers resampling of the curve data Handy if the LAS file resolution is 0 02 feet and you only need downhole measurements every foot The Excel import tool can import data for more than one borehole from a single XLS file Raster exports TIFF PNG etc of the entire log as a single page Very handy if you need to import a raster image into another software program or print to a long PDF Compile multiple data files at once using the File Manager check boxes and the right click Compile Selected Files option Import RockWorks lithology and stratigraphy types directly from the MDB database Keyword editor accepts mixed case entries previously stored all caps only If you have upgraded from LogPlot2003 LogPlot2001 or LogPlot98 please refer to the Help messages for additional information Where Do I Start The sequence of steps to take in using LogPlot depends a lot on what kind of data you have and what kind of log you are creating LogPlot is used in a variety of industries to display shallow soil borings monitoring wells hard rock drill holes geophysical logs mud gas logs and many more Introduction Here we list some sample workflows for LogPlot Workflow 1 Choose a log design enter your data compile your log Create Hew Data Template Pick creale a Data File Log View Log Design Enter Field Notes into D
224. es will simply be ignored You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the Cross Plot Curve tab See also mporting Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Curve Tab Use The Curve tab is used to list depths and a single column of measured data to be plotted as a point to point curve Each Curve Column established in the log format requires a separate Curve tab If you wish to list multiple columns of data for each depth see the Multi Curve tab page 169 Corresponding log design component Quantitative data declared with this command will be plotted on the log in the Curve Column page 90 or Cross Plot Curve column page 100 with the same name How to Enter the Curve Data 155 Entering Your Data 156 To add a new Curve tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Curve column or a Cross Plot Curve column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Curve tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Curve command to manually insert a Curve tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of t
225. ese steps L 2 3 Start up Windows if you haven t already To avoid possible conflicts exit any other Windows applications that may be running Follow the instructions shown below to launch the installation program from a CD ROM or from an internet download CD ROM Insert the RockWare supplied CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of your computer On many systems the installation program will start automatically If it does not select the Run command from the Windows Start menu Type the following in the displayed dialog box x SetupCD and choose OK where x is the letter of the drive that contains the CD ROM the CD menu program will display a variety of different programs that you can install as demos or trialware in addition to LogPlot For now however simply select LogPlot 7 from the menu along the left You should see a description about the program in the pane to the right Click the Install Software button in that pane to start the installation Downloaded from the I nternet LogPlot can be downloaded from RockWare s web site www rockware com by selecting the Download item on the home page filling in the requested information selecting the LogPlot 7 program and following the remaining instructions In fact we recommend that registered owners download an updated program from time to time to take advantages of new features and fixes we implement on a regular basis Save the downloadable LogPlot installation file to y
226. esigner you can modify our library of designs or create new ones from scratch See Chapter 2 page 21 Entering your data Mini spreadsheets handle all the different types of data LogPlot can process See Chapter 3 page 135 Ka Al Compiling the data Establish a few program settings and click a button to plot the data into the design See Chapter 4 page 223 RO viewing your log View the log on the screen print it export it See Chapter 5 page 231 Additional topics Other LogPlot tools Keyword pattern and symbol libraries See Chapter 6 page 251 ReportWorks A built in page layout program for logs images text etc See Chapter 7 page 261 Reference Trouble shooting sample logs other miscellaneous information See Chapter 8 page 27 5 Introduction If you have upgraded from LogPlot2005 If you have upgraded to LogPlot7 from LogPlot2005 here are some things you should know Window menu modifications There is a new File Manager pane along the left edge of the program window You can quickly and easily open data design and plot files by double clicking or open several data plot files at once using check boxes Z LooP lot 7 File Edit Data Log Tools Options Window Help Ic Smith Project el AG Design borehole log fu oe Data BH1 dat Ey ASmith Project Active project tolder 3 BE CC EN Consistency Organic vapor E LogPlot data files DAT M BH2 dat SETUP E e rext
227. essed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Overplot Fill Click on this box to select the color and pattern to be used to fill the region where Curve 1 and Curve 2 overlap If no fill is desired select the blank pattern Here are some examples of how you can vary the curve direction curve fill and overlap fill to achieve different results Curve 1 gt e Curve 2 Overlap In this example the curves are plotted in opposite directions Curve 1 is plotted in blue filled or not Curve 2 is plotted in red filled or not with the overlap color set to solid green Curve 1 gt Curve 2 gt Overlap es In this example the curves are both plotted left to right Curve 1 is plotted in blue no fill Curve 2 is plotted in solid green with red outline The overlap zone is plotted in solid red 2 Designing Your Logs Set up the Cross Plot Curve names data range scaling and appearance 1 Click on the Curve 1 and Curve 2 tabs in the Crossplot Curves Options window to establish the data scaling and appearance options for both Curve 1 and Curve 2 Crossplot Curves Options Man Curve 1 Curve 2 Grid Entity Name Gamma Ray Note 20 character limit Scaling Options F Logarithmic Manual Mi
228. established in the Labels tab discussed below Style The Elevation and Depth radio buttons are used to identify what the labels on the scale bar will represent Your log data may be entered in either depths or elevations See page 189 for more information If you are displaying depths and if you want to display depths as positive values on the bar insert a check in the Positive Values check box If your well is deviated or inclined you can elect to have the labels represent downhole Survey Elevation Orientation data tab name Type in the name of the tab in the data file that contains the downhole survey information typically called Orientation and specify whether the data is entered as dip from vertical 0 straight down and 90 horizontal or as dip from horizontal 0 horizontal 90 straight down 90 straight up as entered in RockWorks See the Orientation Tab page 174 for more information Convert Insert a check in this box if you want the scale bar to convert your depth or elevation units from feet to meters or from meters to feet Example Let s say your data units are feet You could insert one Scale Bar in the log design with no conversion and the units would represent feet You could insert a different Scale Bar with a Feet to Meters conversion and the labeled units would represent meters An example is shown below 87 Designing Your Logs 88 DEPTH EI M LITHOLOGY 0 0 25 Sit 100 125
229. f necessary by grabbing and dragging the window s lower left corner There is no limit to the number of characters in the Notes field other than the available Space in the header or footer in the log Macros To insert the current page number and or total number of pages in the header or footer use the following macros p Inserts the current page number in the text area when compiled in LogPlot t Inserts the total number of pages in the text area when compiled in LogPlot You can insert these macros as Static Notes either alone or together as well as along with regular text Designing Your Logs When compiled in LogPlot this field will be replaced by the number of the current page Text This field will Page p of t be replaced by the number of total pages in the log On a compiled log this might look like this DEPTH LITHOLOGY DESCRIPTION Page 1 of 2 16720 16730 E To insert the well location in the header or footer use these macros x Reads the Easting coordinate defined in the data file s Setup tab and inserts that coordinate in the text area when the log is compiled y Reads the Northing coordinate defined in the data file s Setup tab and inserts that coordinate in the text area when the log is compiled z Reads the Elevation value defined in the data file s Setup tab and inserts that value in the text area when the log is compiled To insert today s date in the header or foot
230. f the pattern and symbol libraries to be used to draw patterns symbols pattern legends and symbol legends inserted into the page or those that are included in inserted RockPlot graphics Neither RockWorks nor ReportWorks stores the actual pattern and symbol designs in the drawings but instead links 264 ReportWorks pattern and symbol numbers to a reference library use this option to define which library to use LogPlot graphics by contrast are inserted as exported bitmap or metafile images these symbols and patterns are no longer linked 1 Select the Options RockWare Program Files menu command 2 Establish the file names Patterns Click on the small open file button to browse for the pattern library to be used to display patterns in RockPlot logs and cross sections and in inserted pattern legends If you installed RockWorks using the recommended settings the default library will be found in My Documents RockWorks2006 System RW_pat pat If you installed LogPlot using the recommended settings the default library will be found in My Documents LogPlot 7 System Rockutil pat Symbols Click on the small open file button to browse for the symbol library to be used to display symbols in RockPlot maps and diagrams and for inserted symbols and symbol legends If you installed RockWorks using the recommended settings the default library will be found in My Documents RockWorks2006 System RW_sym sym If you installed LogPlot using
231. f the symbols can be fixed or variable depending on how the data is entered LogPlot data tabs Tadpole Columns are linked to data entered in Tadpoles data tabs page 181 How to Add a tadpole column to a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 128 Designing Your Logs 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod kd SE if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Tadpole Column button from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Tadpole Column The pointer will change shape to a fe for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and press the left mouse button The program will display the Tadpole Column Setup window 5 Click on the Main tab to enter the tadpole specific information Tadpole Options Main Grid Name Position etf 1235 Daul 235 Appearance jw Frame Column Size Style fe Fixed e Solid i 0 1 Circle C Crossed Circle C Value Based a Gase Minimum Size Column Base 0 1 e Fixed Maximum Size Fixed or Default 0 25 LCE Si Name Enter the name for this Tadpole column Any tadpole data in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this Tadpole column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coo
232. for the current log design Example Your company likes the logs you have already been generating with the program and they want you to add 2 new items to the log s design You add them to the design use Update Data Template from Log Design to update the existing data file complete the new data items and compile the data into a log design Here s a diagram of this workflow Update Data Template from Log Design Update Log Update Log View Design Data File How to Update an existing data file for the current log design L If necessary click on the Log Designer tab and open the log design you wish to use 2 Click on an existing Data Editor tab or if none are showing create a new Data Editor window 3 Open the existing data file you wish to update 4 Choose the Data Update Data Template from Log Design command from the Data Editor s menu The program will check the contents of the current data file against the entities in the current log design For any design entities which have no corresponding data tabs it will create these tabs in the Data Editor window 5 Enter the data into the new data tabs See Data Tab Summary page 148 for details 6 Save the data file Other Data Tools The Lithology Selector Window Lithologic keywords are used in LogPlot to make a match between rock types and the graphic patterns used in logs to represent them Keywords are entered in both Lithology and Percent data tabs t
233. formation including the name of the active design file printer paper size and compiling settings such as vertical scale and single page versus continuous logs See also The LogPlot File Manager page 17 Where Dol Start Designing With the LogPlot program started and a Log Designer window open follow these steps to either modify an existing log design OR create a new design from scratch Modify an Existing Log Design 1 Open the existing design Select the File menu from the Log Designer menu Select the Open command and select the design LDFX or LDF file you wish to modify See the log samples shipped with the program 2 Establish the printer and page size if necessary 3 Add items to delete items from the log body and save the design 4 Add items to delete items from the log header and footer and save the design Create a New Log Design 1 Create the new design Select the File menu from the Log Designer menu Select the New Log Design command and assign the new design a name Establish the printer and page size if necessary Add items to the log body and save the design Add items to the log header and footer and save the design Log Design Files LDF Log Design Files I ntroduction Log designs that you create in the Log Designer are stored on disk as XML style Log Design Files with the LDFX file name extension An LDFX file can be thought of as the blueprint for the log It contains the layout for th
234. g Compile All Logs and Log Settings windows L 282 Pattern Density Factor A value of 1 will keep all lithologic patterns at their original densities A value of 2 will make the patterns appear twice as big half as dense A value of 0 5 will make the patterns half as big twice as dense You may enter any real number value in this prompt as it is used as a multiplier for the original pattern densities Pattern density 2 This makes the patterns Original lo g g twice as big ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white very fine grained well GAREN ACE OU S HN LIMESTONE gray white very fine grained well sorted firm to brittle block ta sub platy alt and pepper glauconitic pink fluores cence SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcte tilled en echelon fractures ANH YGRITE light gray 1 with minor brecciation 4 throughout interval F sorted firm to brittle p blocky to sub platy alt and pepper glauconitic H pink fluores cence SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite filled en echelon fractures ANH YODRITE light gray with minor breeciation throughout interval SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite Cep minor chlorite 31 The pattern density change will affect Lithology Pattern columns Pattern Percent columns and Well Construction columns in the body of the log and Header Footer Pattern blocks No Solid Fill Patterns If activated
235. g design component Horizontal line depths declared in this tab will be plotted on the log in the Horizontal Line column page 125 of the same name How to enter the Horizontal Line data 161 Entering Your Data 1 To add a new Horizontal Line tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Horizontal Line item in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Horizontal Line tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Horizontal Line command to manually insert a Horizontal Line tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Horizontal Line item in the log design to which this data page is to correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the Horizontal Line entities in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Horizontal Line tab labeled with the selected name 2 Enter the data Left Depth default Here you enter the depth at which the horizontal line or lines is are to be plotted If for example you wanted a single horizontal line plotted at the final depth of your log you would type in that depth here This example corresponds to the sample log s
236. gPlot Corresponding log design component Quantitative data listed in this tab will be plotted on the log as bar graphs in the Bar Graph columns page 107 The data values themselves can be plotted as text labels in the Bar Graph Value columns page 111 Alphanumeric data can be displayed in Interval Text columns page 130 171 Entering Your Data How to enter the Multi I nterval Data de 172 To add a new Multi Interval Data tab to the current data file select the Data New Data Item Multi nterval Data command The program will display a window in which you can define the names and order of the data to be entered Because this data page references multiple columns each with its own name the data names are listed as the column headings in the tab rather than the tab heading There is no automatic means of inserting Multi nterval Data tabs the Update Data Template from Log Design tool creates individual I nterval Data tabs for all Bar Graph Bar Graph Label and Interval Text columns For each type of data to be listed in this tab click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Bar Graph Bar Graph Value or Interval Text column to which each is to correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the applicable columns in the current log design Li Top Base ample SPT Blows Rec Ft SPT Blows Rec Ft Click OK when the column names are selected The program will add to t
237. ge 107 and or the Bar Graph Value column page 111 of the same name Alphabetic or numeric data listed in this tab can be plotted as labels in the Interval Text column page 130 with the same name How to enter the Interval data 1 To add a new Interval Data tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Bar Graph Bar Graph Value or Interval Data column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Interval Data tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item I nterval Data command to manually insert an Interval Data tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Bar Graph Bar Graph Value or Interval Text column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the linkable columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet an Interval Data tab labeled with the selected name 2 Enter the interval based data The example shown below is from the sample file mining3 dat 164 Entering your Data Interval data identifier to match the Bar Graph Bar Ge Yalue or Interval Text column name in the
238. gger S Ferber DEPTH LITHOLOGY o Erzegoccbech k Eregp gech k Erein gechi h Envrogectech lr Gengac at ki Geophpsic 2 kd Geophpucell Ka Lesage el Ke Ia 2 amalker Lite las design 1 iv L pgeeu ie Lpvgooz ke L tvgoo2 lie Mining K Here bh Hininga ky Mudiog 1 ich parvada Idle Findon Vis gt we e we e e FRochiwWeke BH lk Set 490 105 EE mm Hasja 1 EI Eaotei 1 el CW kv ED omen 32 fe fe G 7 a Zo a Page pp ofgi L perin MRT 8 17 x 10 67 in Ceocmerte and Sethngsyely Docmertzlcetiot 7 Semples Lithology 1 ka The LogPlot File Manager The File Manager is displayed in a pane along the left edge of the LogPlot program window It is used to display the LogPlot related files in the current project folder and allow you to open them and for DAT files compile them LogPlot data files DAT opened into the Data Editor window LogDesign files LDFX and LDF opened into the Log Design window Log Plot files LPT opened into the Log View window RockWorks borehole well files contained in an MDB opened into the Data Editor window 17 Introduction File Edit Data Log Tools Options Window Help C ASmith Projet sl ch Design borehole og Idfx EJ Data BH1 dat Active project folder EI SE Data ID dat BH1 dat BH2 dat DHA dat BH8 dat BHO dat I A Rockworks DB BHI BH2 BH4 BHS El Consistency Organic Yapor
239. gic Description columns if activated the program will move conflicting descriptions downward or upward Log Designer contains a Lithology Description tool for disabling the plotting of the extended description should there not be enough space This allows plotting of short keywords only saving lots of space Recompile the log at a less compressed scale to give each interval more room To make the scale less compressed enter a lesser value in the Scale prompt in order to plot fewer 289 Reference log units per inch or cm of output The vertical scale settings can be set right in the Log Compile a Log window or In the Options Log Settings window Ifthe font established in the log design is not available on the current computer at compile time or during re opening in LogView LogPlot will substitute the first available True Type font that it finds on the system If this is unacceptable update your font suite or change the log design Incorrectly Positioned or Formatted Log Components The log s design is created within the Log Designer screen which you can access by clicking on the Log Designer tab in the LogPlot window The active log design will be loaded automatically Check and modify the design entities as necessary and resave the log design LDFX file To access any item s settings in the Designer window just double click on the item in the design screen or find it in the Edit View Entity List display and clic
240. gram will know how to name the tab s curve headings based on the log design Manual Choose Data New Data Item Cross Plot Curves The program will display a window in which you can define the names and order of the curves to be entered In this list the program will show the names of all of the Curve columns and Cross Plot Curve columns in the current log design Because this data page references two separate curves each with its own name the curve names are listed as the column headings in the tab rather than the tab heading For each curve to be listed in this data tab click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Curve column or Cross Plot Curve column to which each is to correspond Or just type ina name Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Curve tab labeled with the name you selected 2 Enter the curve data as shown in the example below Curve column identifiers to match column names E in the log design 0 00 36 06 2 50 1 00 36 07 ZOU 2 00 36 08 ZOU 300 36 09 2 00 4 00 35 01 2 00 5 00 34 95 2 00 depths hMeasured values 154 Entering your Data Depth In this column you must list the depth or elevation at which the measurements were taken Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Cross Plot Curves tab and select Fill Depth Column to fill the column with regular depth increments If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either
241. gs 9 Click OK to proceed The program will store the current page of the log or the entire log as requested on disk ina Windows Bitmap format This BMP file can then be opened in other graphics applications inserted into word processing documents etc Note that you cannot open the Bitmap version of the log within LogPlot Export Logs as J PEG This export tool exports the current log page or the entire log NEW to a JPEG JPG format 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 If you will be exporting a single page only advance to the page you wish to export as necessary by clicking the Page Down Page Up or Go To Page buttons in the View window toolbar 3 Select the Export command from the View window s File menu Select the J PEG option 5 Filename Click on the Open button ER the right edge of the prompt to enter the name to assign to the exported file accessing other folders or drives as necessary Click OK to return to the export dialog box The program will append the appropriate file name extension J PG automatically The Log Designer window saves log design previews in a J PEG format using the design name plus preview jpg You might want to be sure you don t assign the export file this Same name 6 Pixels Inch In this prompt type in the number of bitmap pixels you want per horizontal and vertical inch of the JPEG image For display on screen the default
242. gs such as page size and orientation 4 To send the document to the printer click the OK button in the Print window Exporting ReportWorks Documents The ReportWorks program saves plot files on disk in a binary RW6 format If you want to Save the plot in a BMP Windows Bitmap JPG JPEG or PNG format you can do so with the Export command File menu 1 If necessary open the RW6 file you wish to export 2 Select the Export command from the File menu A pop up menu will display the export options 3 Select the desired option Enter the requested information in the displayed program window File Name Click on the small open file button to type in the name to assign the exported file Color Depth Choose from the drop down list box the color resolution you wish to use for the output raster image As you increase the color resolution the output file will increase in size For good color depth you should probably choose 24 bits pixel Changing the pixels per inch and or colors per pixel does not change the printable size of the graphic but instead the resolution of the image and the size on disk of the output file Resolution DPI This setting defaults to 96 and will determine the resolution of the output graphic in dots or pixels per inch As you increase the number of dots per inch the disk size of the output file will increase If you want to display the image on screen only a resolution of 96 will probably be adequa
243. h of the intervals you can establish their appearance 83 Designing Your Logs Positive Depth If your depths are entered as negatives you can check this box to display the depth intervals as positive values Elevations Check this box if you prefer to display the true elevations for the interval Parentheses Insert a check here to display the intervals inside parantheses as shown in the example New Line Insert a check here to display the start of the descriptive text on the line below the intervals Keyword Insert a check in this box to plot the keyword that s listed in the Lithology tab Although the keyword is needed to link a description to a graphic pattern in the Lithology Pattern column you may omit the plotting of the keyword s text in the description column by clearing this check box Colon If you ve activated the plotting of the Lithology tab keyword above you can select here whether the keyword is to be separated from the extended description if any with a colon character Note that if the colon is activated but there is no extended description for an interval the colon will be omitted APENACEOUS LJ LIMESTONE gray white very fine grained well Sorted SHALE gray to dark gras blocky dense ANHYDRITE light gray with minor brecciatior throughout interval ALT gray white Massive minor anhydrite lt 55 minor chlorite AREWACEOQUS LIMESTONE SE Se ee Ss Sons nan
244. h this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the applicable columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Tadpoles tab labeled with the selected name Enter the data as described below This example is extracted from the sample file Geophysical3 dat Tadpole Column identifier to match the column name Te Tadpoe 7 in the log design Depth Azimuth Dip Color Value o 245 30 Ld 4 1 5 235 32 Lid 3 8 10 224 35 LH 4 0 15 233 39 eg 4 3 20 225 42 ss 4 1 25 237 44 as 4 3 30 213 30 Ed 3 9 35 225 23 Ld 3 8 40 210 25 TI 3 9 45 212 23 TS 3 8 50 213 24 has 4 2 Depth Dip Angle Other value Dip direction SE Color optional 0 360 azimuth deg optional 181 Entering Your Data Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Tadpoles column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited by right clicking in the body of the data tab and choosing Edit Entity Name Depth In this column you must list the depths or elevations at which the measurements were taken If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either positive or negative depths just be sure to be consistent throughout the data file Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Tadpoles t
245. he Curve or Cross Plot Curve column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the applicable columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Curve tab labeled with the selected name Enter the data as described below This example is extracted from the sample file mudlog1 dat Curve column identifier to match the column name in Log Design Diling Rate E Total Gas 1672000 3200 16720 00 140 16771 00 35 00 16721 00 1 30 41672200 32 00 16722 00 1 80 16723 00 34 00 16723 00 1 80 46724 00 136 00 16724 00 1 80 46725 00 37 00 16725 00 1 40 ech Measured value Depth Measured value Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular curve column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited by right clicking in the body of the data tab and choosing Edit Entity Name Depth In this column you must list the depth or elevation at which the measurements were taken If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either positive or negative depths just be sure to be consistent throughout the data file Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Curve tab and select Fill Depth Column to fill the column with regular depth increments Value In this column
246. he data sheet a Multi Interval Data tab Because this data page references multiple columns each with its own name the data names are listed as the column headings in the tab rather than the tab heading Enter the quantitative or text data An example is shown below Entering your Data Data names to match Bar Graph Bar Graph Yalue or Interval Text TR column names in the log design Top Base Sample SPT Blows Rec Ft 0 0 1 0 5464 5 7 1 3 1 0 2 0 5465 5 8 1 3 2 0 3 0 5466 47 36 oF 3 0 4 0 5467 i7 ii MR 4 0 5 0 5466 22 11 1 6 5 0 6 0 5469 3 5 1 6 RN 7 0 5470 14 9 MR 7 0 5 0 547i 7 6 0 6 5 0 9 0 547z 6 6 1 7 ae Depths at top amp base Data to be represented as of intervals Bar Graphs as text in Bar Graph Labels or as text in Interval Data columns Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and base of the intervals at which the measurements were taken Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Multi Interval Data tab and select Fill Interval Column to fill the columns with regular depth increments If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Columns 3 42 These columns list the actual measurements sample numbers or other notes recorded at the listed depth intervals The Column Names The names displayed as column headers within the
247. he log You may change the rectangle s position by editing these values or by simply moving or resizing the item on the design screen itself The vertical coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the top edge of the design screen 3 Adjust the rectangle s appearance by clicking on the line sample and choosing style thickness and color Click OK to close the line properties window 4 Fill Insert a check in this box if you want the rectangle to be filled with color Then click on the color box to the right to select the fill color 5 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the rectangle displayed on the screen according to your settings You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 6 To close the Rectangle Setup window click the Close button Inserting Header Footer Pictures Use The Header Footer Picture button is used to insert a picture into the header or footer of the log This would typically be used to insert a company logo into the log design but could also be used to insert a picture of a site map etc T he picture may be in any of the following graphic formats BMP JPG Windows Metafile WMF or EMF PCX PNG TGA and TIFF This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands How to Insert a Picture into the Log Header or Footer 1 Access the Log Designer window
248. hen be opened in other graphics applications inserted into word processing documents etc Note that you cannot open the WMF or EMF version of the log within LogView You may find that the appearance of the WMF or EMF file can vary greatly depending on the application being used to view it Export Logs as BMP This export tool exports the current log page or the entire log NEW to a Windows Bitmap BMP format 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 If you will be exporting a single page only advance to the page you wish to export as necessary by clicking the Page Down Page Up or Go To Page buttons in the View window toolbar 3 Select the Export command from the View window s File menu Select the BMP option 5 Filename Click on the Open button lat the right edge of the prompt to enter the name to assign to the exported file accessing other folders or drives as necessary Click OK to return to the export dialog box The program will append the appropriate file name extension BMP automatically 6 Colors Select the number of colors you wish to have stored in the exported file Bear in mind the greater the color depth the larger the output BMP file For your reference the program will display in the window the output file size under current settings Note that some of the other bitmap type exports in LogPlot such as JPG or PNG will create much smaller output files usi
249. hey are linked to Lithology Pattern columns 2 Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Lithology Pattern column to which this entry is to correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the Lithology Pattern columns in the current log design This is important Unless you link this Interbed data with a particular Pattern column they won t plot The Interbed tab and the Lithology Pattern column must have the same name If you don t have a design selected or if your design s Pattern column names aren t displayed click the Cancel button Access the Options menu from the main program toolbar select the Log Settings option and select the log design to be used Then try adding the Interbeds tab again The Entity Name prompt will also allow you to simply type in a name 3 Click OK The program will add to the data sheet an Interbed tab labeled with the name you entered 4 Enter the data as described below Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Lithology Pattern column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and the base of the interbed interval being described on that row If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevatio
250. hich determination shall be made in the sole discretion of RockWare Inc Trademarks Owners RockWorks LogPlot RockWare RockWare Inc Microsoft Windows Microsoft Corporation All other company and product names are or of their respective trademark owners Table of Contents NAV TC el EE 1 If you have upgraded from LOGPIOt2Z005 cccceccee cece aa a 2 e IDOI Salt EE 5 System EES 7 Wis Callin O LOO Te EE 7 Te wie Eeler EE 8 Staring fl Ro tel EE 12 Starting LogPlot with a Command Le 13 Changing the Licensing Removing the Licensing 14 The LOGPIOE SCreenS wi cvecthcussesstcneninwiasit asin eiadeeebieietbiariai eee aie 14 The LogPloU File Manager eer 17 Chapter 2 gt Re Te ale YOUR e e EE EN Log DesigNeEr hn lg ge e E En WEE EN Accessing the Log DeSIGNer wi eege ENEE 21 hee Desgner Sree acta eal ee te a it i 21 Where Do I Start D SIQNING c cece aa cece eee renee ee eUSA ete seed eee e AAA EES 23 Log Design Files EDF EE 23 Designing the Log Header and Footer sssssssssrssrrersrrrrerrrresrrrrsrrrrorrrresrrrrsreree 29 Designing the Log Eessen 68 ole BOG ITEN EE 76 Chapter 3 Entering your Data 135 ee Ee eg Data Editor Be gg ell de EE 135 Managing the Data Files cccccc cc cceee cece eee ee eee eee e eee A EEEE DEA AEA aE E EAA DEAN KEIEN 140 Entering the RE 148 AUETA e RN E 191 other ID aber Tools win het tai d ate aT T a T 194 nei afeigglele Datainmto Wee Ee EE 206 Expor
251. his is a toggle item If it s displayed with a check mark then scrolling is activated If it is not displayed with a check mark then the tabs will wrap Changing the status from checked to not or from not checked to checked is done simply by selecting the item from the menu Importing Data into LogPlot If you have log data stored in another software program LogPlot offers several data import tools for bringing data into a single data sheet or importing entire files Importing Text Data The Data Editor s ASCII Text import tool reads text files into a single data tab of your choice For example a RockWorks99 LIT file listing could be imported into a LogPlot Lithology tab Or a file containing rows and columns of quantitative values could be imported into a Multi Curve tab How to Import the text data 1 Click on the tab into which you wish to import the text data You can insert a new data tab if necessary Select the Data Editor s File menu and choose the Import command From the pop up menu select the ASCII Text command Enter the requested information File to import Click on the open file button to the right of the prompt to select the name of the ASCII text file whose contents are to be imported 206 Entering your Data The program will display the first 10 lines of this file in the scrolling window You can verify that this is the text data you wish to import Skip lines Enter here the number of initial l
252. his is commonly used to indicate stratigraphic or geologic age groupings Symbol Column Plots specific symbols such as water level at user declared depths Fillbar Column Fills user declared intervals with a specific pattern often used to note core samples or qualitative information good porosity etc Bitmap Column Plots raster images BMP TIFF JPG WMF EMF PCX PNG TGA pictures in the body of the log Well Construction Column Illustrates the structure of the construction materials in the body of the log Horizontal Log Body Line Plots horizontal lines across a portion of or the entire log at user declared depths and or at regular depth intervals ca Vertical Log Body Lines The Line button is used simply to plot a vertical line anywhere on the body of the log Tadpole Column Displays structural readings azimuth and dip with tadpole symbols in the body of the log El Interval Text Column Displays text defined within a depth interval within the column Text can be centered within the interval with intervals bounded by borders See also Viewing a List of the Log Entities page 66 77 Designing Your Logs Adding a Lithology Pattern Column Use A Lithology Pattern Column is designed to contain graphic patterns that are associated with keyword declarations The patterns can also be clipped based on hardness or other values in a curve column resulting in a lithology profile How it wor
253. his operation is not undo able Export the List as a CSV Report 1 Click on the Report button The program will display a standard Windows Save As dialog box 2 Enter the name under which the comma separated variable text file should be saved such as entity csv The default file name extension is CSV 3 Click Save The program will save a text listing of the log design entities in a text file of the name you entered and will load this text file into the default application for this file type on your system often Microsoft Excel You ll see a series of columns listing the same information as displayed in the Entity Listing window 4 From Excel select the File Exit command to close that application You will be returned to the Log Designer with the Entity Listing dialog still displayed on the screen 5 Choose Close to return to the main Log Designer screen 67 Designing Your Logs Designing the Log Body Log Body Introduction The body of the log is displayed in the middle portion of the Log Designer screen and is where the quantitative descriptive and other data stored in your data file will get plotted during log compilation in the LogPlot program Although the log body is a fixed length in the Log Designer its vertical length on the compiled graphic log can be varied by the user by setting a desired vertical scale Within the Log Designer work screen the log body is completely separate from the header and the
254. hologic Patterns If you see incorrect lithologic patterns displayed in the Lithology Pattern Pattern Percent or Fillbar columns on the log body check that you have the correct keyword file and pattern file specified in Options Program Files LogPlot needs to know which library of keywords and patterns to use when making the match between your data keywords and the graphic patterns to be plotted in the log If you see incorrect lithologic patterns displayed in the header footer pattern blocks then the program is probably using the wrong pattern file Since these pattern blocks are not tied to keywords and are inserted right into the log design they specify a pattern index number only If the pattern file is not embedded in the LPT file and if you are using a different pattern library than the person who created the log design that index number might display a different graphic pattern For this reason it s a good idea to compile by embedding the pattern file Or just be sure to note in the comment area of the data file s Setup tab the correct pattern file name to use with the data file and its design Crowded Lithologic Descriptions If your lithologic description text appears crowded try the following Increase the width of the description column and or decrease the size of the column s font in the Log Designer save your changes and try compiling again in LogPlot Log Designer also offers a description offset feature for Litholo
255. hown above End of Log Left Depth Default Depths at which Enter the right depth left edge of lines only if the line is not will be plotted to be horizontal Right Depth Optional If this column is left blank the program will assume the line is to be plotted horizontally at the depth declared in the Left Depth column If however you want the line plotted at an angle between two depths you can enter the depth for the right side of the line here Note that the horizontal placement of the lines is determined by the placement of the Horizontal Line Column in the design screen You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row in the tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Interbed Tab Use The Interbed tab is used to define interbed zones to plot as patterns within a Lithology Pattern column that has the same name The interbeds are declared with keywords just like the Lithology intervals However interbed text is not displayed 162 Entering your Data Corresponding log design component Interbed patterns will be plotted on the log in the Lithology Pattern column of the same name page 78 How to enter the I nterbed data 1 To add a new Interbed tab to the current log design select the Data New Data I tem Interbeds command There is no automatic method of inserting Interbed tabs because t
256. ieve single sheet logs remove the check mark from the Continuous Output box If there is only one header and footer in the log s design specify those for all pages Page Settings C Continuous Output mea First Page E Middle Pages First page Middle pages Last page Last Page If you have created a distinct Header 2 and or Footer 2 you can specify those in any combination Page Settings C Continuous Output H t Header 1 Header 2 Header 2 Ee Middle Pages First page Middle pages Last page Last Page If you have created a report header insert a check in the Report check box and it will be plotted before the first log page 280 Reference Page Settings L Continuous Output Report Em es Middle Pages Last Page Report page Firstpage Middle pages Last paqe Continuous log If you are printing on continuous paper or simply wish to omit headers and footers from intermediate pages insert a check mark in the Continuous Output box You can then select a header for the first page and a footer for the last page only Fage Settings Continuous Output Report First Page Middle Pages Last Page Continuous logs can contain a Report sheet by checking the Report box Page Settings Continuous Output Report First Fage Report Middle Fages Last Fage Report page 281 Reference Establish Pattern and Symbol Settings These settings are located on the Pattern Symbols tab in the Compile a Lo
257. iew the Picture Settings If you need to review the settings you established you can Double click on the picture and the program will retrieve the dialog box right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the picture in the View Entity List and choose the Load Item button If the picture that you insert is large it may exceed the width of the log page making its resizing handles inaccessible In this case you will need to use the dialog box Position settings above to adjust the size of the picture Reposition or Resize the Picture See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Inserting Header Footer Patterns Use The Header Footer Pattern button is used to insert a square or rectangular block into the log s header or footer filled with the pattern of your choice This is typically used to build an index to the patterns that will appear in the body of the log This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands This pattern block does not automatically link to any lithologic keywords See the Lithology Pattern Column page 78 Pattern Percent Column page 105 or Fillbar Column page 118 for information about plotting patterns in the body of the log How to Insert a Pattern Block into the Log Header or Footer 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool B
258. ighted layer See also Moving Items below e To select a layer to be active simply click on its name in the data pane Subsequent items that you add to your document will be added to that layer 265 ReportWorks e To rename a layer simply click on the layer in the data pane along the left side of the window to highlight it Then click on the layer s name so that you see the blinking cursor in the name s text Edit type in a new name This can help you to be more specific with layer items such as company legend items rather than Layer2 e To move items between layers you need to use a cut and paste procedure First click on the layer name to which the item to be moved is currently associated Left click on the item to be moved to a different layer and choose Edit Cut or type in Ctrl X Then click on the name of the layer to which it is to be associated and select Edit Paste or type Ctrl V The item will be re inserted into the document and associated with the specified layer e To copy items between layers use a copy and paste procedure similar to that described above for moving items but using the Edit Copy command rather than the Edit Cut command e To display a layer s items insert a check mark in the layer s check box To hide a layer s items from the display remove the check mark from the layer s name Inserting a Symbol into a ReportWorks Page Use the Tools Symbol menu command or toolbar button
259. ightly so that you can see the pasted item If the item is pasted into a different region header 1 to header 2 the location coordinates will be honored exactly If you pasted a single item the program will display its dialog box for confirmation of coordinates and or entity name If necessary edit the entity name and or the positioning coordinates for the item Click on the Apply button to accept any changes you have made to the item s settings and press Close to close the dialog box You can also reposition items within the same header or footer by dragging them to the desired location Header Footer Items He ader Footer Item Summary Here is a summary of the items that you can include in a Log Design header and footer Remember that the log header and footer sections share the same tools The tool buttons are found in the Log Designer tool pane to the left of the program window These items are discussed in the remainder of this section 42 Click here to display the header amp footer tool buttons k HeaderFooter g SN Select Line tion Windows Ten Deion Erao gpotpcht Ka ER Daa Lirika E DRILL HOLE Drill Hole Rectangle Picture Location Defaut Liding Direction Defaut Listing Drilling Contractor Defaut Listing Logged By Default Listing Date Deiauclt Listing al Patten Symbol E siais Teed Edi Tied Static Text Edit Text
260. ile which contains a table listing the J PG image names storing the file on disk under the name you specified For example if you named your export file ProjectA html and the log consists of two pages the graphic representation of these pages would be stored in files named ProjectA_page_1 jpg and ProjectA_page_ 2 jpg which would be listed in the HTML table If requested the HTML table will be opened into your web browser and displayed on the screen Please see your web browser s documentation for details about viewing and printing your logs If you wish to send this exported log to a co worker be sure to send the HTML file and the JPG images that are linked to it representing each page of your log Export Logs to ReportWorks This export tool exports the log displayed in the View window to a bitmap or metafile for placement in a ReportWorks document ReportWorks is a page layout tool shipped with LogPlot which you can use to display one or more logs with maps titles etc You can export either the current log page it uses a BMP format or the entire log it uses an EMF format ReportWorks will be launched automatically and the log displayed This is a great way to display logs for reports and presentations particularly if you want to include other images such as cross sections or maps from RockWorks or other programs 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 Select the Expor
261. iles LPT se LogPlot key Ford bp Check boxes are used to open multiple files at once 19 Designing Your Logs Chapter 2 Designing Your Logs Log Designer Introduction The Log Designer is a tool used to design your logs Using Log Designer you create the layout of the log like a blueprint Once a design is completed you can use LogPlot to compile your data into the design to result in a graphic log Log Designer is built right into LogPlot Just click on the Design tab to bring the Designer window to the front Log Designer contains the tools to design these parts of your log The log header Log headers are positioned at the top of the log optionally at the top of each page and can contain text graphics symbols patterns lines and rectangles A new special header called a Report can be a full page long and precede the first page of your log The log body The main portion of the log which can contain columns for lithologic patterns and descriptions curves bar graphs fill bars general and vertical text well construction diagrams raster images symbol columns and more The log footer Log footers are placed at the bottom of the log optionally at the bottom of each page and can contain the same information as the header text graphics symbols patterns lines and rectangles Accessing the Log Designer The Log Designer is built into LogPlot To access the Log Designer screen follow these steps
262. ill be listed here Glick on any column heading to sort the list by that column Name Enhly Type Locstion Lett Book Numba Edit Tent Heads 7 506235 Borehole Number EdtTear Header 1 bw Compare Completar Dud Method Feld Party Geologet Location Project Name Project Number Stat Date Swfacs d few Edt Taxt Edi T ext Edit Tent Edt Taxt Edat T ext Edt Taxt Edt Teri Ed few Edt Taxt Header 1 Headed 1 Heades 1 Header 1 Headed 1 Meader 1 Heade 1 Heades 1 Hesje 7 Haades 1 1 5538 31146 1 5939 1 5938 1 5939 1 5538 1 5933 1 5939 1 2163 SEI Total Depth Edit T ext Headers 1 5 0625 CG Fill Bar Lee Body 30723 Organice apor Fill Baw Lo Boch 26458 Samples Fill Boar Lee Boch 06250 Header Line Heades 1 0 2063 Header Lire Heada 3 806250 Header Lire Heades 1 1 0704 Header Lire 1 4167 Closes the Deletes the Creates a GSY report Entity List highlighted item ofthe Entity List Accesses the Options window of the highlighted item See page 66 for more information 133 Entering your Data Chapter 3 Entering your Data LogPlot Data Editor I ntroduction The LogPlot program contains 3 different windows The Data Editor used for entering data This is discussed in this section The Log Design window for creating or editing the layout of the log The Log View window for viewing and printing compiled graphic logs The LogPlot Data Editor is the first window that you will see when
263. ill show the names of all of the Text columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Text tab labeled with the selected name Enter the text information as shown in the examples below E uscs Text Column identifiers to match the column names Depth Text in the log design 0 0 CL 2 5M zl Sample Number S OL Depth Tex 17 0 DC 4 1 1 22 0 CL 6 1 2 5 1 3 WE 1 4 15 1 5 20 1 6 Depth at which text Text type in or is to be plotted double click Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Text Column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Depth In this column you must list the depth or elevation at which you want the text to be plotted Placement of Text Column text is done similarly to descriptive text The declared depth will represent the top of a box that the program creates for the text entry If your data are entered as depths as opposed to elevations they can be entered as either positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Text In this column you enter the text to be plotted The text can be short abbreviations as in the above examples or lengthy descriptions up to 2048 characters The program will wrap the text automatically
264. imal 6 Check here to C Resample Data sample every 4 GI th line 2 w places for the Ki resample data curve values Update Setup Insert a check here if you want the depth at log top and depth at log base in the Setup tab of the current LogPlot DAT file to be updated with the Start and Stop depth listed in the header of the LAS file Include as Edit Text Well Info Insert a check here if you want the well information company name well name field name etc to be extracted from the LAS header and be listed as Edit Text entries for inclusion in your log s header and or footer Parameters Insert a check here if you want the well parameters elevation temperatures etc found in the Parameter Information Block of the header to be imported as Edit Text entries for inclusion in the header footer Curve Data Filter Depth Insert a check here if you wish to import a subset of the entire depth range represented in the LAS file If activated you can type in the top and bottom depth to be imported This filter will apply to all of the curves Convert Depth Units Insert a check in the Convert box if you want the depth units to be translated from Feet to Meters Meters to Feet or converted using a customized conversion factor Click in the appropriate radio button and if Custom type in the value by which the LAS depth units are to be multiplied Convert Null Values Insert a check here if any null values in the LAS file should b
265. in the body of a log in order to illustrate core sample images scanned logs fossil pictures special sampling symbols and more Alternatives Bitmaps that you wish to include in the header or footer of the log are inserted using the Header Footer Picture tool How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate a Bitmap data tab with the same name as the Image column in the log s design Any BMP JPG TIFF PNG PCX TGA WMF EMF images listed in the data tab will be plotted in that column The images can be plotted at real size or stretched to fill the column width and depth interval length Each Image column on the log must have a separate Image tab in the data file LogPlot data tabs Image columns are linked to data entered into Bitmap data tabs page 152 How to Insert an I mage column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod kd SE if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Pictures button from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Image Column 119 Designing Your Logs The pointer will change shape to a E for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the cursor where you want the left edge of the Image column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and press the left mouse button The program will display the I
266. ine tabs in the data file You may request both LogPlot data tabs Horizontal Lines can be linked to depth listings in Horizontal Line tabs in the data file page 161 Log design example s Log design My Documents LogPlot 7 Samples Enviro geotech8 ldf contains examples of the use of horizontal lines matching text with a well construction diagram How to Insert a horizontal line into the log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod ke EE if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Horizontal Line button E from the tool pane or command from the Tools Log Body Items menu The pointer will change shape to a for placing the line on the design screen 4 Place the at the horizontal location in the body of the log design where the left edge of the line should be placed and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the line settings in the Setup window 125 Designing Your Logs 7 You Horizontal Body Line Name end of log Position Left 0 25 Right H Options Automatic intervals Name Enter a Name to identify the line This will only be used if you define specific depths for the line in the data file in this case the name in the Horizontal Line data tab would need to match this name The name match is not case sensitive The name can be up to 60 characters in l
267. ines that are to be omitted from the import choose 0 if none is to be ignored Delimiter Specify here the column delimiter used in the imported file Import to This determines the data tab into which the data is to be imported The default will be the current front most tab but you may click on the arrows to advance through the list of tabs The selected tab will be brought to the foreground of the Editor The tabs will be listed by their names except for Multi Curve and Multi nterval Data tabs which have multiple names If necessary you can move the import window to the side as you scroll through the tab names to see which tab is on top Starting at Row Enter the row number in the specified data tab at which the imported data listing should start Note that the imported data will always start in the first column though you can manually select the import column order Manually Select Columns Insert a check here if you wish to specify a particular tab column for each column in the text file Leave this setting cleared if the text file s columns of data can imported as is same column order and same number of columns If manual selection is activated you ll need to match up the number of the data column in the text file with the column names in the current data tab as shown below Import Data To Page File to Inport Skip Lines J Delimiter u A k T d 1i Za Ae CAP reject 27 Project bat Gel la SeS Tab No
268. ing rate values that are to be plotted from O to 60 feet per minute you would enter 0 for the Min Value and 60 for the Max Value 103 Designing Your Logs 104 Logarithmic Scaling For the Min Value enter the non negative and non zero real number to represent the minimum value of the logarithmic curve column You may then select the appropriate Max Value using the up or down arrows next to that prompt You are restricted to even logarithmic cycles such as 0 2 to 2 000 1 to 10 000 etc Scaling w Loganthmic f Manual Min Value ON Max Value 1 000 Type in the minimum value for the curve column Then use the arrow buttons to select from one of the displayed Max Values logarithmic cycles If Logarithmic Scaling is selected and the program encounters a zero or negative value in the data file that value will be plotted at the minimum value edge of the column Automatic New Choose this option if you want the curve s minimum and maximum values to be determined automatically by the program based on the data values at compile time LogPlot will scan the data values and set the curve scale to a reasonable min max range to accommodate the values For example if the data ranges from 1 6 to 8 2 it would set the curve column s linear Min Value to 0 and the Max Value to 10 Direction If you have header footer column legends linked to the curve they should be updated appropriately If you have
269. ing the Data Editor If you cannot see the Data Editor because it is hidden behind the Design or Plot window follow these steps to access it 1 Click on the Data Editor tab to bring that window to the front This tab is labeled Data BY Looplot 7 Bax File Edit Data Log Tools Options Window Help CASmith Project El gA Design borehole kat SZ Data BHaidat Active data file CH Smith Project AE Data dat EE 7 DUT deit ES Sample Number Moisture a consistency Col Well Column DH3 dat SETUP E TEXT Organic Vapor Lithology E Samples Sampling Method DH det Rockworks DE Gravel and Sand with trace of silt gray to bra Sand with trace gravel trace silt f BH8 dat E E o 2 0 LogDesign zl i Logs Ipt D Sand and Silk with trace clay very fine tor Gravel with trace sand Fine sand ler Silk with trace sand Soft very mi Clay and Silt Clay Gravel and Sand Clay and Sand Colluvium 2 50 perin SINGLE 8 1 x 10 67 in Cam Project borehole log dr 2 If there are no Data Editor windows open use LogPlot s File New Data Editor command to open a new Data Editor window LogPlot 7 allows you to keep more than one data file open at atime All are accessible by clicking on their stick up tabs labeled with the file s name 136 Entering your Data The Data Editor Window Here is a sample of how the Data Editor screen looks with a sample data file loaded D LoePlot
270. into the data tabs See Data Tab Summary page 148 for details 4 Save the data file Check Data Against Log Design LogPlot s Data Editor uses data tabs to organize the different kinds of information that can be plotted on the graphic log The program matches these tabs their types and their names to items in your log s design to know what data items to plot where on the log If you have a log design for which you wish to enter new data you can easily create a blank template of data tabs for that design using Log Designer s Create New Data Template command If you have an existing data file you can use the Data Editor s Update Data Template from Log Design command to update the data for new design items But what if you still get blank spaces on your log when you compile your data Use the Data Editor s Data Check Data Against Log Design command The program will scan the current log design and data files and compare the entities in both It will open a text window and display a summary of its findings similar to the example below Note that the items are listed by their names displayed on the data tabs and assigned to items in the design Drilling Rate 193 Entering Your Data Cross Plot Curve Updating Your Data File for a Log Design The Data Editor s Data Update Data Template from Log Design option is used to update an existing data file so that it will contain all of the necessary data tabs
271. ion e Be sure that the keyword file KEY and pattern file PAT that the program should use are correctly defined using the Options Program Files command 288 Reference e Be sure there are not duplicate keywords in the current keyword file which can result from appending keyword files or from simple oversight When searching for keyword matches LogPlot will use the first keyword it finds in the keyword file and ignore any additional identical entries If you are missing ALL of the lithologic patterns it s probably a name problem e Access the Log Designer window and double check that the item whose patterns are missing has the same name as the data tab containing the keyword and depth intervals For example if the patterns are missing from a Lithology Pattern column check that column s name in the log design against the Lithology data tab s name in the data editor Or you might want to access the Data Editor window and use its Data Check Data Against Log Design option which will give you a report of which items in the current LDF and DAT files don t match Partial Fills for Lithologic Patterns If in a lithologic pattern column a pattern is filling only part of the column check the Fill setting for that interval s keyword in the Keyword Editor If set to a value less than 100 the pattern will not fill the entire pattern column Pattern fills less than 100 can be used to illustrate eroded strata Incorrect Lit
272. iption up to 2000 Characters 0 SHALE r i00 SAT Lithology Selector C Documents and Settings m 150 ANHYDRITE Grout a Grouted Arewlus 200 LIMESTONE i GW ET Gypsum 330 DOLOMITE Jasperoid Kaolinzed 350 SHALE Latite Limestone Edit Keywords Soo SANDSTONE Limestone and Shale Interbeds Limestone Mudstone 520 SHALE Limestone wath Shale Interbeds e Limestone with Shale Stringers Click to access 80 COAL Limestone Dolomitic the Lost Circulabon i emm SHALE merir Keyword Editor een SANDY SILT tren Gen ES S pox fi ML 3 e 3e i Gan Oolitic Limest ee v 4 Click the Edit Keywords button to access the Keyword Editor The Keyword Editor Window Delete current keyword 252 Add a new keyword Edit current keyword Find a keyword Current keyword file uments and Settings user My Documents Keyword Listing Adularia Albitized Alluvium Andesite Anhydrite Anhydritic Dolostone Archimides Arenaceous Dolostone Arenaceous Limestone Arenaceous Shale Argillaceous Argillaceous Dolostone Argillaceous Limestone Argillaceous Sandstone Araillic Arqgillite Argillized Plot Border Pattern tools Current keyword open import save export append keyword files cancel or save changes Other LogPlot Tools The list box on the right side of the Keyword Editor lists the keywords in the current keyword file whose name is displayed at the top of the window Ke
273. ithin the Notes block They are defined in decimal inches or centimeters the same units and the Position coordinates Text Enter the text to be used as default for this Edit Notes entry You will likely press the button i in order to enter more lengthy text into the displayed pop up window You can resize the pop up window if necessary by grabbing and dragging the window s lower left corner There is no limit to the number of characters in the Notes field What is default text The text you enter will be displayed for this Notes field in the log design screen In addition when you use the Update Data Template from Log Design or Create New Data Template commands the program will Suggest this text as the text to be plotted You may change the default entry as necessary The default text serves two purposes e As a placeholder in the design window by actually entering a textual note as you might in your data file you ll be able to see how much space the text will occupy with the log is compiled e Ae default text in the data template If you use the Create Data File Template command to create a new data file for your log design the program will suggest this text as the text to be plotted You may change the default entry as necessary Text Alignment Click in the Left Center or Right radio button to choose the alignment within the defined block Font Use this button to access the Font dialog box where you may set the
274. k Apply to apply the settings you have selected Click Close to close the RockPlot Options window You can access the image s options at any time by double clicking on the image or by right clicking and choosing Properties You can resize the image block by first single clicking on the image to see the boundary handles Then click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or edges and drag to the new position Release the mouse button when the boundary s edges are in the correct position Reposition the image as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and dragging it to the new location Inserting a Raster I mage into a ReportWorks Page Use the Raster menu command or toolbar button to insert into a ReportWorks page a BMP JPG PNG EMF WMF PCX TGA or TIFF image You can adjust the image s scaling and outline See the RockPlot RK6 tool for inserting RockPlot generated graphic images and the Georaster tool for raster images with world coordinates de 2 E Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary Create a new layer as necessary Click on the Raster toolbar button or choose the Tools Raster BMP J PG TI FF menu command Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the image is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of the diagonal corner point and release the mouse button As
275. k Load Item You must re save the log design file before trying to recompile the log within LogPlot as the design entities are read from the saved file on disk Blank Log Components There can be several explanations of why no data may appear within certain columns in a log design Ifyou have less data than is declared for the log design you are using then those log entities will simply be left blank Example If your data file contains only lithologic descriptions while the log design also includes curve and bar graph columns those columns will be left blank on the compiled log An item in the compiled log will also be left blank if its data is flagged with a different name Example Ifthe data in the Curve tab in your data file is named Drilling Rate while the corresponding curve column on the log s design is named Drill Rate the program will not be able to match the data to the log column You ll need to edit the name in either the data file or the log s design Use the Data Check Data against Log Design tool to show you a list of discrepancies between the data file and the log design If no data is being displayed at all in the compiled log check the Top Bottom Settings that you have declared for the compiled log being sure they include the range of the data in the data file Example If the depth at the log top and log bottom displayed and accepted in the Compile dialog box are 0 and 100 respectively
276. ks As the LogPlot program compiles your data file it will locate keywords listed in a Lithology data tab scan the keyword table for these keywords and if found plot the associated pattern for that interval in the Lithology Pattern Column that has the same name The text descriptions themselves will be plotted in the Lithology Description Column on the log There can also be an associated data tab for displaying interbedded patterns in this column It is not required that each Lithology Pattern Column have an associated Description Column Data Tab Lithology patterns are linked to data entered into a Lithology tab page 166 or Interbed tab page 162 How to Create a Lithology Pattern Column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod ke iota if necessary to display the log body buttons Tar 3 Select the Lithology Pattern Column button Erom the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Lithology Pattern Column The pointer will change shape to a of Now it s time to place the column on the design screen 4 Place the lithology cursor where you wish to position the column s left edge and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the requested information in the Main tab Name Enter the name for this Lithology Pattern column Each pattern column item must have a unique name so that you can refer to
277. l C Documents and Settings My Documents LogPtat Page Numbenng Header Foote 5 Set starting al Stating Page Number 1 im page EN Margir D 7 Margin between Header Footer and Log Body Page Settings C Continuous Output 6 Establish the header amp footer pagination Cl Report settings Click the Header Footer button First Page Header Footer had Middle Pages Wan He Ber Foote D i 7 Check pattern Heade Fone Pater zeen Header m Footer2 me B symbol KS Last Page settings 1 Patter Deko Factor Header lal Footer kel Click on the C Ne Solid Fill Pater ffe Pattern EE Symbol tab Embed Patleme and Symbols in compiled lag 8 When all of the settings are displayed to your satisfaction click on the OK button to have the program compile the data into a plottable log That s it The program will read the data contained in the Data Editor window and match it to the items that are declared in the log design you have selected When all data items have been processed the completed log will be plotted in a new window on the screen 224 Compiling Your Logs If the program encounters problems compiling your data it will usually let you know and Show you the location in the data file with which it is having problems Topics Verify the page and printer settings page 287 Confirm the starting and ending depths for the log page 275 Verify the curren
278. l Text Options Name Sample e Position Lett 1 5438 Right 1 5333 Options Iw Frame Column w Frame Sample Eont E Vertical Alignment Horizontal Alignment t Top C Lett a Center e Center Bottom C Right Margin 0 0625 Name Enter the name for the Interval Text Column Any text entered in a LogPlot Interval Text data tab with the same name will be plotted in this column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Interval Text Column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Frame Column If this box is checked the column will be bounded by a solid line rectangle Frame Sample If this box is checked each interval will be separated from the next by solid lines 131 Designing Your Logs Font Use this button to retrieve the Font dialog box where you can establish the font type style size and color to be used for the interval text If after you compile your data for this log design within LogPlot you find that the characters are too large or too Small for the given log scale you may access the font settings again using the Font
279. l display a listing of all of the items in the current log design 2 To access a specific item scroll down the list as necessary until you see it and left click once to select it When selected it will appear highlighted The entities can be listed by name type or other parameter 3 Click on the Edit button to display this item s settings 4 Edit the settings as you wish or simply press OK or Cancel to close the settings window The item will remain active when you are returned to the design window Options Once an item is selected you can view or change the item s settings by right clicking on the item and selecting Edit Entity Edit Entity Send To Batk Delete Entity Del Move or Resize Log Body I tems You can move and resize log body items using several methods Manually You can reposition log body items by grabbing left click and hold and dragging them on the design screen itself The program also offers a reference grid and a Snapping feature to make it easy to line things up You may select items individually or in groups 1 Click on the pointer button in the Log Designer toolbar 2 Click on the item to be moved to select it It will contain small round handles on each corner or each end if a line To select multiple items hold down the Ctrl key and click on additional items 72 Designing Your Logs 3 Keep the mouse button depressed and drag the item to its new location If you need to
280. l export tool creates an Excel file with individual worksheets for each datasheet in a single or multiple LogPlot DAT file s Each worksheet will be labeled with the data type text versus symbols versus lithology etc and with the specific entity name Note that at the time of this writing Excel limits worksheet names to 31 characters If your LogPlot entity names are lengthy they might exceed this limit when combined with the data type see the Excel File Format in the online Help for details The worksheets can be created with data or with column headings only to act as a template The file is loaded automatically into the Excel program upon completion of the export process The exported file has the same format as required for importing Excel data into LogPlot You can use this tool as a means of getting your LogPlot data transferred to another software application via Excel You can also use this as a means of formatting field data in Excel for future import into LogPlot This tool requires that Excel be installed on your computer How to Export a LogPlot DAT file to Excel format 1 Be sure the DAT file s containing the data you wish to export is are currently open in LogPlot For a single file export be sure it is in the visible data window Select the File Export Excel menu option 3 Inthe displayed window enter the requested information Template Only no data Choose this if you want to generate worksheets in Excel
281. l now use the selected symbol table when displaying raster symbols in the compiled logs Establish Printer Settings Using the Page Print Setup command you can establish a default printer and page size which the Log Designer window uses to dimension the active design area and which LogPlot will use not only in printing but also in laying out your log pages on the screen Page Print Setup can be accessed from the Data Editor or Log Designer File menu or Setup Page Setup Printer Info WSeANDESITESHP Laselet 4100 PCL 6 using the Setup button from any of the Settings dialog boxes Your current Page 11 00 6 50 printer s settings vice Lesen ae Printable Width 8 17 Km Page Setting Units Inches The current 10 67 917 log page settings l O CM s At the top of the displayed window you will see a summary of the current printer information the printer name the current paper size the printable area on that paper for that printer In the bottom portion of the dialog box you will see the current length and width dimensions for your log page If any of the dimensions are shown in red then they exceed the available dimensions for the page as shown at the top of the window 1 Verify printer name paper size paper format e g single sheet or banner paper orientation Click on the Printers button to see a standard Windows Print Setup dialog box where you can establish these settings Typically you can press the Proper
282. lative to the insertion handle In the graphic examples below the Edit Text labels are set to Top vertical alignment they show the difference between left center and right aligned text Designing Your Logs Location Beat Listing Location DefauiPListing Get ting Location Direction gt gt Default Listing Direction Default Listing Default Listing Direction o Drilling Contractor berau Listing Drilling Contractor Des isting Default Listing Dritling Contractor left justified center justified right justified Vertical Alignment Click in a radio button to choose how the text is to be aligned vertically relative to the insertion handle In the examples below the six Static Text labels are set to Left horizontal alignment and show the difference between Top and Bottom vertical alignment Location gt Bepgteamg oe H Direction Bega Us eat ng Drilling Contractor Datault Listing Drilling Contractor dE Verical Alignment Vertical Alignment e Top C Bottom C Top e Bottom Transparency Click in a radio button to set the text as Transparent with no background or Opaque If you select Opaque click on the color box to choose a color for the background of the text 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the text placed in the header or footer in the design window You may continue to adjust the text if necessary remember to click
283. le The changes you make to pattern density colors and line thickness are all stored in the Keyword file and will be displayed in the upper preview only In this way the same generic pattern can be used for many keywords with the differences in density color and line thickness stored with the specific keyword in the Keyword file Select a Pattern The Select Pattern window lets you select a pattern to be associated with the current keyword 1 Simply click on the pattern sample to be active It will be displayed in the preview box at the top of the screen Le Select Pattern C Documents and Settings Mer My Doc um Colors Fore E GER Ge 3 es eee eee 2 Help Help Lb Create Printable index Printable Index 255 Other LogPlot Tools As you make changes to this pattern s density colors and or line width these will also be reflected in the preview box Tip If you need to plot a particular lithology as a solid color with no pattern simply choose a blank pattern block for that keyword scrolling down to find one and set the pattern s background color to the desired color for the lithology type Editing Patterns Introduction Patterns are repeating graphic designs that can be associated with keywords in LogPlot to represent lithology type to illustrate fossils or mineralization and to represent materials used in well construction columns LogPlot is shipped with a factory library of pattern de
284. le is shown below with the top of the log listed at a depth of 0 189 Entering Your Data Top of log in depths Base of log in depths D 20 1106 225 x coordinate location of well not used y coordinate location of well not used Z coordinate e g collar elevation of well Depth Lithology Descriptions Oo How the depth CTT Limestone bar looks when the log is L compiled in i LogPlot EE EE You may also plot a subset of the entire data set In this example you could request within LogPlot a plot of only the 20 to 80 portion of the log and the depth bar would be labeled accordingly See also the Absolute Value check box in the Scale Bar Setup if you prefer the depth labels be stripped of their sign Depth Data Elevation Scale If your LogPlot data are in depths and you select an elevation Scale bar the uppermost tick mark will be equal to the z coordinate of the well also listed in the data file in the Setup tab An excerpt is shown below with the top of the well listed at an elevation of 4033 Top of log in depths Base of log in depths E 106 Ending Depth Easting Nothing Elevation KE 20 295 coordinate location of well not used y coordinate location of well not used 7 coordinate Te o collar elevation of well Elevation Lithology Descriptions How the 40304 Limestone elevation bar looks when 4025 the log is EE compiled in 4020 EE Ge LogPlot 4
285. le symbols etc The internal structure of the files is discussed in the Reference section LogPlot lets you keep more than one data file open at any time Create a New Data File Follow these steps to create a new data file in LogPlot 1 From either the Log Designer window or from an existing Data Editor window click on the File menu and click New 2 Inthe pop up window click Data Editor LogPlot will display a new data window with an unnamed data tab 140 Entering your Data H LogPiot 7 oka Fie Edit Dats Leg Toole optio window Help C Documents and Seting Ei d Design borehole log Mix EE Gerd Ent New data tab Samples sen BE Daat del DR dat M DH 4 dat DH 7udat Start Depth Nobeg Elevahon FB DROgat Erritexgeotech Erritcxgeotech Erepp aeotech T Erepp aeotech Erpp oeotech Erpp oeotecht Erspp oeotech Emtp oeotech Emtp oeotech Ervtoegeotech Geophysical Geophysical Geophysical d l Geophysical d M Litholagy dal M Lithology dat M Lithologya dat IT Morengi dsl T Mao da T Mao dsl l kakalia ele ln Row Z 50 per Wm SINGLE S17 x 10 67 in Ci Smith Project borehole log lds 3 At this time you can type or paste in data add new data elements and save the file LogPlot also creates a new data window automatically upon program startup See also Updating Your Data File for a Log Design page 194 for information about automatic
286. le using the View window s Export command Export Logs as a Metafile WMF or EMF This export tool exports the entire log to a metafile format You can select the first page header and final footer to be included in the export the body of the log will be exported as continuous no breaks and no headers on intermediate pages The maximum plot length is 340 inches 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 Select the Export command from the LogView File menu 3 Select the Metafile wmf emf option The program will display the export dialog box 4 Enter the requested information 240 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Windows Metafile wmf Enhanced Metafile emt Click in one of these radio buttons to determine the export metafile type Filename Click on the Open button GL the right edge of the prompt to enter the name to assign to the exported file accessing other folders or drives as necessary Click OK to return to the export dialog box The program will append the appropriate file name extension EMF or WMF automatically Header Choose which header to include at the top of the log Header 1 Header 2 or No Header Footer Choose which footer to include at the top of the log Footer 1 Footer 2 or No Footer 5 Choose OK to continue The program will store the log on disk in the selected metafile format under the declared file name This WMF or EMF log can t
287. linked Or just type ina name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet an Orientation tab labeled with the selected name 2 Enter the downhole survey data Depth Enter here the depths at which the downhole survey measurements were taken These must be entered as depths rather than elevations You can enter either positive or negative depths but you must be consistent with the format of the other log data Bearing Type in the bearing of the well at the listed depths The bearings must be expressed in azimuth degrees 0 to 360 with 0 north Inclination Type in the inclination of the well at the listed depths The inclination data follows either a 174 Entering your Data dip from horizontal convention in which 0 is a horizontal line 90 points straight down and 90 points straight up ora dip from vertical convention in which 0 is straight down and 90 is horizontal The data convention is established in the log design This example illustrates dip from horizontal data format E Downhole Survey Depth Bearing Inclination 2000 270 DU 2347 270 55 2561 263 79 212 60 75 et it 248 60 2818 240 45 Depth at which Inclination angle survey measurement of well In this example was taken D horizontal and 90 straight down Bearing of well dip from horizontal D to 360 degrees D north There is no limit to the number of survey points you can list for the well
288. listed in its column If you requested replacement of null values with a particular replacement these should be visible in the curve listings The program will also store on disk an LDFX file if you requested one Some LAS files list measurements by elevation rather than depth You can probably tell by the Start and Stop values in the file LogPlot usually expects data to be listed as depths If you need to convert elevations to depths use the right click Column Math Constant tool to subtract the surface elevation value Start from the elevation listings in the Depth column re storing the new depth values in the Depth column What Next 1 Save the imported data Choose the Data Editor s File Save command and type ina name for this file LogPlot data files use the file name extension DAT See Saving Data Files page 145 2 Access the log design If you requested an automatic log design during the import access the Log Designer window and you ll see the LDFX file created by the importer You ll probably note at this time that it s a very basic design No fancy stuff You can take some time at this point to jazz up the design add header information depth scale curve grid lines and legends change the curve appearances etc See Log Designer Introduction page 21 Or you can proceed to 3 to compile the data as is into the log design as is If you have an existing log design into which this data is to be plott
289. ll be opened upon program startup The Data Editor is used to enter or import the descriptive textual quantitative or other data to be displayed on the log Within the Data Editor the different types of data are organized into tabs The data structure is discussed in Chapter 3 page 135 You can have multiple data files open at any time 7 LopP lo Ble Edt Data Leg eck Ontions Window Hap 1 S ampiles A ai BE Daa fdat Bockuiagr DB j Lediezep iii comdate lich Last Modified 22907 Suggested vertica scalinge 50 uprtsbnch Suggested dean Litholegyl Kr simple Rheology Use Logeiot key Pech H pat 15 Introduction Design Window The Log Designer window contains the design tools to create or modify a log design This is discussed in Chapter 2 page 21 L LopPtot 7 Come and Selir j 5 amples ai BE Daat ett 3 Reckhorke DE zj Legbecp Tu comelate lich Ersgooesc ech be Eringa E rarinongeotecki be Envancageobsch ih Eriga k Ervppopcbech k Erzegtooechbech k Eregpegcdech be Eragpopcbech ik E naroste h ipaiphyratan Ka Geophysical ka Geophpsicela Ka Georg acel Ka Jas maer idis las_ design1 Mix Lige Idie Litho ke Lithology3 ke Minngl Ka Hiring ki Mrerce ka Mudogl ki parre ke Radon ty Fock torke BH k L t Ku gt LO per in BULTI 8 17 x 10 87 in Eez Degi Lilhokagi idik E Das L dee a EN VEER Se VS Se Se Simple Logging Company Sam
290. ll selected items will appear with handles on their corners OR 1 Use the screen pointer to draw a rectangular region across the log body area Any items in whole or in part within that bounding rectangle will appear selected with handles Is Ti pp S 5 ee m ee Weg R a Sege 7 n Jf 8 za B a Keyword Description Jl and drag Select all of the items in the log body 1 Use your mouse to click in the log body pane of the design window 2 Choose the Edit Select All in Pane option The program will select all of the items in the pane Select an item using the lt lt and gt gt buttons LogPlot offers two buttons at the bottom of the design screen that can advance sequentially through the log entities gt 1 Any time that a log design is displayed on the screen you can click on the forward or backward arrow buttons at the bottom of the design screen to advance sequentially through the log entities changing the highlighted focus of the entities in the order they were added to the log design 71 Designing Your Logs The selected item should appear with handles on either end if it is a line or on all four corners all other log body columns Use the Entity List to access a design item and its settings 1 With a log design displayed on the screen select the View Entity List command or click the View Entity List button H The program wil
291. log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a LIthology tab labeled with the selected name 2 Enter the data as described below 166 Entering your Data Lithology Description Column and or d ES E Lithology Pattern Column identifier 2 thinly haddad no Ee SE Observed Lithology to match the name s in the log design secondary CALCITE filling en echelon fractures Lithology Description up to 2000 Characters by 3 Chert cryptocrystalline bedded 2000 2006 Limestone medium gray to dark gray thinly bedded no visi alternating black gray and white 1 4 inch KA beds 2006 2010 Chert cryptocrystalline bedded alternating black gra Argillaceous Limestone buff minor 2010 2014 Argillaceous Limestone buff minor echinoids echinoids 2014 2019 SANDSTONE white orthoquartzite very well rounded well cer SANDSTONE white orthoquartzite very well rounded well cemented silica 2019 2023 Quartz Latite crystal Fragments in DEVITRIFIED glass matrix matrix frosted no visible alteration to 2023 2028 Calcareous Dolomite gray to cream Finely crystalline no visible miner Gei Lat ten ll Quartz Latite crystal fragments in AKK j DEVITRIFIED gl trix 2028 2031 LOST CIRCULATION NO SAMPLE RECOVERED PETO BEE 2031 2036 Dolomite light gray fine grained quartz stringers minor Feieren rata ter r inely crystalline ho visible mineralization 2
292. log scale they always remains the same size no matter how condensed or elongated the log body is If you need to change the size of the text characters themselves in the header or footer you can do this by adjusting the font size in the Log Designer This entails double clicking on the text item itself clicking on the Font button in that item s Setup dialog box and changing the font size there 32 Designing Your Logs To change the size of any images JPG BMP TIFF etc in the log header or footer you must resize the picture itself in the Log Designer See Moving or Resizing Header Footer Items on page 38 Header and Footer Coordinates The placement of any header item is stored in terms of horizontal x and vertical y inches or centimeters LogPlot2003 and earlier versions stored placement in screen pixels The Log Designer will open older design files and automatically translate the pixel coordinates into inches centimeters for you The horizontal coordinates start at 0 along the left edge of the screen and increase to the right in decimal inches or centimeters The horizontal range of the design page is dependent upon the currently selected printer page size and orientation established under the File Page Print Setup command since a printer with 15 paper will allow more design space wider logs than one with 8 5 paper The paper s right edge will be shown with a red line The vertical coordinates of the h
293. lot Tools Pattern that is currently selected Pattern number where the cursor Adjust the pattern density Le Select Pattern C Docum Name of current Pattern file Select foreground Adjust thickness of amp background colors pattern lines dots nts and Setting sn Docum oes gt sl Z SS ec mal VV ES el arrow is currently pointing Cancel changes and exit Accept changes and exit eos aes e oe Create a graphic index to the patterns Edit current pattern in Pattern Editor Open new or Save current Pattern file Import other Pattern files The Select Pattern window and the Pattern Editor are also accessible using the LogPlot Tools Pattern Editor option Display the Pattern Designs The Select Pattern window displays all of the pattern designs contained in the current Pattern file whose name is listed at the top of the window 1 To view pattern samples that are not currently visible drag the scroll bars up or down as appropriate 2 To view the index number for a pattern simply move the pointer to that pattern Sample and see the pattern s index number shown in the reference bar at the bottom of the window 254 Other LogPlot Tools SJ es Ill Ze jg ES A SE ZE The pattern samples are always displayed as black lines on a white background at a density of 3 and a thin line width That s because that s how the patterns are stored in the Pattern fi
294. lto this software End User val be uang the product op this machpe Administrator am orbe ir taling the product fee ar endhe Licensing Options Single Ueer Soltware wall be used by only one meron Cp Biz machite Multi User Solbasre wall be used mone than one penon on Dasz machine Network Sothvare all be used by any uses irom this machines Remove LogPlot Licensing Options Contents Single User version Multiple User One Computer Version Network wersion Single User Version The Single User version is designed for users who wish fo use this software on a single machine that is not shared by others or on a machine that is shared by others who wall not be using this software This version requires an unlocking code in order to operate Otherwise the program will operate in Trial Mode The trial version will run for 10 days or 25 uses whichever comes first The clock starts running upon installation of the program At any time during the trial period or after the expiration of the tral period the program may be converted to D 1 First you need to specify who you are click in the End User button if you will be using the software Click in the Administrator button if you are installing the software for someone else This makes a difference in the licensing process Remove heenaing rom thie machine You must be the End User to unlock a Single User license You mu
295. lude data listed in the following LogPlot data tabs 4 e Curve and Multi Curve e Interval Data and Multi Interval Data e Orientation e Pattern Percent e Tadpoles Each of the data listings will be checked by default Remove the check marks from those you don t want to export Name This column will be populated automatically by the names assigned in LogPlot You can change the names as necessary Additional information the Units API and Description cells can be left blank or you can type in necessary information for listing in the Curves header block in the output LAS file Use the Fixed Width column to specify the number of characters for the column if required by the software that will be reading the LogPlot generated LAS file Click on the Next button Fill in the Well Information and Export On the fourth screen of the import window you can establish some miscellaneous header information L 220 Fill in any of the fields for which you have data to be included in the exported file This information is stored in the well information block in the output file Entering your Data 2 Click OK The program will read the data in the current DAT file and using the setup parameters you ve established export the data to LAS format The output LAS file will be saved on disk under the file name you specified You will be returned to the main LogPlot program window Exporting Excel Data The Data Editor s Exce
296. mage Column Setup window 5 120 Enter the requested settings Name Scanned Logs Position Left 2 2917 Right 3 2917 Options Insert Picture as C Link to file Imbed in LPT Stretch images jw Clip to column width Border around images Sam jw Frame around column Name Enter the name for this Image column When you compile your log if LogPlot finds an Image data tab with the same name it will plot the referenced image file s into the column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Image column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Insert Picture as Choose Link to file if you don t want the image s themselves to be saved within the compiled LPT file instead the program will save a link to the image file s This will keep the LPT file smaller in size but you ll need to be sure to keep all referenced images in the same folder as the LPT file so that they will display when you open the log in the future See additional notes in the Bitmap data tab page 152 regarding file name paths Choose I mbed in LPT if you want the prog
297. mand is available as a right click option from within many of the LogPlot data tabs This command can also be selected from the LogPlot Data menu It is used to change the name of the data item displayed on the tab or as a row heading The entity name is used to match the data item to an item in the log s design For example the data in a Curve tab with the name drilling rate will be plotted in a Curve column also named drilling rate in the log s design Or the Edit Text row labeled date will be matched to the Edit Text field named date in the header of the log How to Edit the entity name To change the name displayed on a data tab follow these steps Click on the tab to be modified to make it active 2 Right click in any of the tab s cells 3 Select the Edit Entity Name command from the pop up menu 4 Enter the requested information Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the item in the current log design to which this data page is to correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the entities in the current log design that match the tab type If you don t have a design selected or if your design s correct column names aren t displayed click the Cancel button Access the Options menu from the main program toolbar select the Log Settings option and select the log design to be used Then try changing the entity name again The Entity Nam
298. manually insert a new tab or a new entry into an existing tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Edit Text item in the log design to which this entry is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Edit Text items in the current log design Or just type in a name for the item Group Name LogPlot allows you to organize your Edit Text items in different groups for easier data entry The groups will be displayed as separate data tabs e Existing groups Any existing group names will be displayed when you click the down arrow Select the existing group where this new item is to be listed e Create anew group Type in a new name in this field to create a new Edit Text group e No group If you don t want to display your Edit Text entries on separate tabs you can leave this field blank The the log design the Edit Text item Should be assigned to the group Default Click OK The program will add to the data sheet an Edit Text tab if none already exists In the tab the newest entry will be labeled with the selected name If an Edit Text tab already exists the entry will be added to the existing tab 2 Enter the data as illustrated below This example is from the sample file Enviro geotech5 dat 158 Entering your Data eee ee Name Entity Name Enter Text i up to 120 characters Bandolier Gas Station job 10 001 02 Bruce S
299. margins but now your client wants a PDF version of the entire log via Adobe Acrobat or any free PDF generating program You can use the Open with Page Dimensions option to set the page to 28 inches long to result in a single page continuous log How to Open an existing LPT file and update the page size 1 Access a LogView window if necessary 2 Select the File Open with Page Dimensions menu item 3 Select the log plot LPT file that you wish to display on the screen by highlighting it and choosing the OK button LogPlot creates and opens files in the LogPlot format LPT only The program will then display the Page Print Setup window The current printer s information is displayed at the top of this window including paper size and printable length width 4 You can click on the Printers button to choose a different printer model and or to adjust the printer s settings You would then click the Set Default Size button to make the log page comply to the new settings For example if you plan to send the log to a service bureau for output to a plotter you can choose that plotter here if you ve installed the plotter driver software and set the page layout per their recommendations The page size information can be saved in the LPT file that you send them The log s current page size is displayed at the bottom of the window 5 You can override the default page size to trick LogView into using a longer page than yo
300. mation 222 Compiling Your Logs Chapter 4 Compiling Your Logs Compiling Logs Introduction Compile the log Compiling a log is the process of LogPlot reading the data contained in the current Data Editor window matching data items to the items in the current log design plotting the data in the design based on the program settings and displaying the log on the screen You can compile the data from a single DAT file into a log or from multiple DAT files Establishing Program Settings Prior to compiling data into a graphic log plot you should review or establish a variety of program settings so that LogPlot will be able to compile the data according to your preferences 1 To access the program settings click on the Options button Al or click on the Options menu Note that the log options are also accessible from within the Compile a Log dialog box The program will display a set of dialog boxes with stick up index tabs All of the settings that you can establish here are saved within the program and do not need to be changed unless your preferences change These topics are in the Reference section of this manual Log Settings Select the log design vertical scale and units continuous v single sheet logs header footer assignments starting page number and pattern amp symbol settings These settings can also be accessed from within the Compile Log windows See page 275 System Settings For log compiling check th
301. mmands that declare file names and program settings to be honored when the program starts To process a batch file when the LogPlot program is started you list the BATCH command and then the name of the LogPlot Batch file after the program name on the command line LogPlot7 exe BATCH C Documents and Settings user My Documents data batch_a txt 301 Reference Option 3 Load a Data File Establish Settings at Program Startup AND Compile and Display the Log If you want to automate the steps of starting the LogPlot program automatically loading a particular data file and establishing a number of program settings AND then compiling the data and displaying the log this is also done by creating a batch file This file contains a list of batch commands that declare file names and program settings to be honored upon program startup The difference between this batch and that in Option 2 above is that this file contains the DISPLAY command To process a batch file when the LogPlot program is started you list the BATCH command and then the name of the LogPlot Batch file after the program name on the command line LogPlot7 exe BATCH C Documents and Settings user My Documents data batch_a txt See the program Help messages Help Contents Reference for details about the batch file requirements and structure Data Format Data Format Text Only LogPlot 7 stores log data in ASCII text only DAT files Much of th
302. ms that are declared in the log design you have selected When all data items have been processed the completed logs will be plotted in separate windows on the screen If the program encounters problems compiling your data it will usually let you know and show you the location in the data file where it has encountered a problem Topics Verify the page and printer settings page 287 Verify the current log design LDFX file page 275 Set the vertical scale page 276 Set the starting page number page 279 Establish the header and footer settings page 279 Establish pattern and symbol settings page 282 See also Errors During Compiling page 288 for tips on data and on problems with the appearance of your log Viewing Your Log page 231 for information on viewing printing and exporting the log plots Compiling Single Logs previous for information about compiling one data file Compiling Single Multiple Logs using the File Manager below for quick compile options 226 Compiling Your Logs Quick Compiling Single or Multiple Logs New You can use the LogPlot File Manager to quick compile single or multiple logs The process involves selecting the log design to be used selecting the data file s that contain the data to be displayed on the log s and choosing the Compile option from the right click menu How to Open the Default Log Design 1 Use either the menus or the File Manager to open the log design LDF
303. n Yalue 0 Max Yalue 100 C Automatic C Interval Table Low to High High to Low Appearance Fil ik Establish the curve Name For each curve trace in the cross plot column enter a Name to identify the curve Any data in a Cross Plot Curve Curve or Multi Curve tab in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this column The name you declare must match character for character the name for the curve data listed in the data file The name match is not case sensitive The name can be up to 20 characters in length including spaces It doesn t make much difference which curve you declare for Curve 1 or Curve 2 Note however that Curve 2 will always plot on top of Curve 1 Scaling Establish the curve Scaling options for both Curve 1 and Curve 2 Logarithmic nsert a check here if the curve is to be scaled logarithmically log base 10 within the column If left un checked the curve will be scaled linearly across the column Minimum and Maximum Values These settings define the range of data values to be represented for this curve in the curve column Manual This is the default setting This allows you to define manually the data values for each curve to correspond to the left and right column edges via the Min Value and Max Value boxes e Linear Scaling Simply type in the data value range to be represented in the curve column For example if the column is to contain drill
304. n any text to appear as a label below the Primary title Click the Font button to choose a font type style and size and click the Color button to choose the text color Min Max Titles These will be placed below the main titles and will represent the left and right edge values of the column to which this legend is linked For example if the legend is linked to a curve column set up with a minimum value of 0 along the left and a maximum value of 100 along the right then the Min Max Titles will print 0 along the left edge of the legend and 100 along the right edge Click the Font button to choose a font type style and size Use the Color button to choose the color for the text 65 Designing Your Logs 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the legend text and graphic placed in the header or footer in the design window You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Legend Options window click the Close button Reposition the Legend See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the legend item right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the legend item in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Listing Log Entities The Log Design
305. nd used by multiple people on that computer one at a time locally not via a network You should purchase this license type if more than one person will need to access the program on the computer such as in an academic lab where multiple students will need to use the software If you purchased a Multiple User Single Computer license your registration number on a sticker on your CD or user manual will contain the letters CM or AM Running in this mode requires an unlocking code that is supplied by RockWare Network Click in this button if you have purchased a network license for the program which allows more than one person to access the program at the same time If you purchased a Network license your registration number on a sticker on your CD or user manual will contain the letters CN or AN The network version requires a special network license certificate file which RockWare will email to you This file must be stored on the server in a location to which all users have access Trialware If you haven t purchased a license yet and wish to run in Trialware mode choose Single User In Trialware mode all program functionality is intact except some of the export tools are disabled There is also a demo banner plotted on the output graphics You can input your own data import data create graphics etc In Trialware mode you are allowed to use the program for 10 days from licensing or for 25 launchings whichever comes first Yo
306. ne manually the data values to correspond to the left and right column edges via the Min Value and Max Value boxes Linear Scaling Simply type in the data value range to be represented in the curve column For example if the column is to contain drilling rate values that are to be plotted from O to 60 feet per minute you would enter 0 for the Min Value and 60 for the Max Value Logarithmic Scaling For the Min Value enter the non negative and non zero real number to represent the minimum value of the logarithmic curve column You may then select the appropriate Max Value using the up or down arrows next to that prompt You are restricted to even logarithmic cycles such as 0 2 to 2 000 1 to 10 000 etc Scaling w Loganthmie e Manual Min Value E Max Value 1 000 5 l 7 Type in the minimum value for the curve column Then use the arrow buttons to select from one of the displayed Max Values logarithmic cycles 92 Designing Your Logs If Logarithmic Scaling is selected and the program encounters a zero or negative value in the data file that value will be plotted at the minimum value edge of the column True Depth Curves These special case curves don t display measured data but instead are used to represent drilled depths versus actual elevations as a curve You should set the Min Value to the lowest true elevation and the Max Value to the elevation at the top of the well Aut
307. nformation is used by LogPlot to know how much information can be stored on each page both horizontally based on the printer s paper width and vertically based on the paper s height Even for continuous printing LogPlot creates pages for easier memory management they ll just be printed without margins on banner supported printers 1 Before compiling for your client be sure you have the same or at minimum similar printer paper sizes In other words don t compile a log for your E sized plotter and expect them to be able to print on their letter sized laser printer Vertical pagination can be adjusted in LogView by them but if your log is wider than their printer will handle it will be clipped 248 PA Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs You can also adjust the page size in a saved LPT file by opening it into LogView using the Open with Page Dimensions option Linking versus Embedding T When designing your logs it s a good idea to specify that any log body images are to be embedded in the LPT file rather than linked to external files If you don t you ll need to be sure to send the images along with LPT file s to the client Note that logos or other pictures in the log header or footer are always embedded in the LPT file When compiling be sure to specify that the Pattern and Symbols are to be embedded in the LPT file If you don t and the symbols and patterns are linked rather than embedded the LPT files simply refe
308. ng high color 7 Pixels Inch In this prompt type in the number of bitmap pixels you want per horizontal and vertical inch of the bitmap image For display on screen the default settings of 96 your screen pixels per inch should work fine For print output you should enter a greater value How much greater As with the colors the resolution will have a great effect on the output BMP file size the larger the number of pixels per inch the larger the output file Again refer to the program s file 241 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs size reference right inside the export window You might start with a resolution of 150 pixels inch and if you find this inadequate too pixely or blocky in appearance try again at 250 or 300 8 Entire Log New Insert a check here if your log occupies multiple pages and you wish to export the entire log as a single long image You can select the first page header and final footer to be included in the export the body of the log will be exported as continuous no breaks and no headers on intermediate pages Header Choose which header to include at the top of the log Header 1 Header 2 or No Header Footer Choose which footer to include at the top of the log Footer 1 Footer 2 or No Footer Scale Select the vertical scale number of depth units per inch or cm for the output image The default that is displayed will be the scale currently stored as default for the Compile settin
309. ng other drives or directories as necessary Be sure the symbol file has the extension SYM The symbol files that you select can be created in LogPlot all versions or RockWorks99 and newer 3 Select the desired file name by clicking on it Click the Open button to accept the selected file name Or click on Cancel to throw out any changes You will be returned to the Program Files tab with the new file name displayed as default You may repeat this process as necessary to change other file names The program will now use the selected symbol table when displaying vector symbols in the compiled logs Select a different raster Symbol Table Raster symbols are bitmap pictures of symbols rather than symbols comprised of lines and dots see vector symbols 1 To change the name of the raster symbol file to be used in the program click on the open file button Eko the right of the Raster Symbol File name s prompt 2 Inthe displayed window locate the name of the file to be loaded accessing other drives or directories as necessary Be sure the symbol file has the extension RSF 3 Select the desired file name by clicking on it 286 Reference 4 Click the Open button to accept the selected file name Or click on Cancel to throw out any changes You will be returned to the Program Files tab with the new file name displayed as default You may repeat this process as necessary to change other file names The program wil
310. ngs in the Setup window Loe Body Line Setup Position 0 25 Options jw gnore Header Footer Margin Position The value displayed here reflects the current horizontal position of the line The horizontal coordinate is expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the line s position by editing this value or by dragging the line itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Line Click on this box to choose the line style thickness and color for the vertical line I gnore Header Footer Margin Insert a check here if you want the body line to extend all the way to the header and footer thus ignoring any header or footer margin that you have requested This is commonly used to create solid boundary lines around the log This would also require that you have boundary lines or rectangles in the header and footer that align with these vertical body lines For examples see many of the Enviro geotech logs that are installed with the program 127 Designing Your Logs BEML TERT PORRG SrHb NLD ag te Corsa Wad BATH Be ELL Ae TA A H A S Eniri ina Em hmi T GI T man A L n ot am ej Si pr Loes a 5 D ZK IEF ii SS Im L t es R tsel FU ran p up i i E p m r s ER il CERU B cd NW T i d Pee Pen DC P e j Tinpan i i E ole o d a ann le D Li 4 These vertical body lines create 9 solid line borde
311. ning Your Logs 20 a0 40 S0 SCHERER Se HER Lines J throughout interval Be ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white very fine grained well sorted firm to brittle blocky to sub platy salt and pepper glauconitic pink fluorescence Small fracture C14 at 16727 tilled with fluorite barite and black calcite SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcite tilleden echelon fractures ANH YDRITE light gray with minor brecciationimovement SALT gray white massive minor anhydrite 55 minor chlorite 121 SANDSTONE white orthoquartzite very well rounded poorly cemented frosted minor FeO staining along fractures GOOD e E GE KEE ETE minor anhydrite 27261 minor chlorite teil ARENACEOUS LIMESTONE gray white very fine grained well sorted firm to brittle blocky to sub platy salt and pepper glauconitic pink fluorescence Small fracture C14 at 67AT tilled with fluorite barte and black calcite SHALE gray to dark gray blocky dense calcte tilled en echelon fractures ANHAYDRITE light gray vith minor brecciationimovement throughout interval SALT gray white massive SANDSTONE white orthoquartzite very well j rounded poorly cemented 4 frosted minor Fes staining along fractures GOOD Column Outline This option turns on and off a solid line border around the entire description column Inte
312. now use this keyword table when reading your lithology percent and well construction data and determining the patterns and colors to be used to represent them in the log Select a different Pattern Table 285 Reference 1 To a name of the pattern file to be used in the program click on the open file button to the right of the name s prompt 2 Inthe displayed window locate the name of the file to be loaded accessing other drives or directories as necessary Be sure the pattern file has the extension PAT The pattern files that you select can be created in LogPlot all versions or RockWorks99 and newer 3 Select the desired file name by clicking on it 4 Click the Open button to accept the selected file name Or click on Cancel to throw out any changes You will be returned to the Program Files tab with the new file name displayed as default You may repeat this process as necessary to change other file names The program will now use this pattern table when displaying patterns in the Keyword Editor and in compiled logs Select a different vector Symbol Table LogPlot now supports both vector symbols composed of lines and dots as well as raster symbols small bitmap pictures 1 To change the name of the vector symbol file to be used in the program click on the open file button Eko the right of the Vector Symbol File name s prompt 2 Inthe displayed window locate the name of the file to be loaded accessi
313. ns they can be entered as positive or as negative values be sure to be consistent throughout the data Lithology In this column you type in the keyword for the interval Keywords may be comprised of one or more words and are limited to 60 characters including spaces Shortcut Rather than typing in the keyword name just double click on the keyword cell to bring up the Lithology Selector window Here you can pick from the available keywords in the current keyword file and view the pattern that is associated with them You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the tab See also mporting Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information 163 Entering Your Data Interval Data Tab Use The Interval Data tab is used to enter depth intervals and a single column of measured data to be plotted as Bar Graphs as labels in a Bar Graph Value column or as text in an Interval Data column Each Bar Graph Bar Graph Value or Interval Text column established in the log design requires a separate I nterval Data tab This tab replaces the Histogram tab in LogPlot2003 and earlier If you wish to list multiple columns of data for each depth see the Multi I nterval Data tab page 171 Corresponding log design component Numeric data declared in this tab will be plotted on the log in the Bar Graph column pa
314. ns will simply be left blank e f your data file contains more data items than are contained in the current log design the extraneous data items will simply be ignored For example your data file contains both lithologic description and quantitative interval data and your log design contains a lithology pattern column only the quantitative data will simply be ignored during compiling e You can even compile a data file that has no data yet inserted The compiled log will simply contain blank columns Tips e To cross check the tabs in the current data file against the entities in the current log design use the Data Check Data against Log Design command e To update the data file with changes in the current log design use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool The LogPlot program was shipped with a variety of demo data files DAT that illustrate the use of the data tabs These files were installed in the My Documents LogPlot 7 Samples folder Feel free to refer to these files as you read through this documentation and as you construct your own data files Each data file also has an associated LogDesign format file LDFX for your reference in designing logs See the sample file summary in the Reference section page 292 Setup Tab Use This data tab is used to set up the data file establishing the depths at the top and base of the log and the location coordinates for the drill hole It also contains a tex
315. nted ona sticker on the CD User Manual and registration card you received from RockWare Single User registration numbers contain the letters CS or AS or S If you opted to download the program at purchase you can contact RockWare for this number Licensee Name Type in your company s name or if purchased individually your name This will be displayed in the program s startup screen Installation Number This is a number that s generated by the RockWorks program when it s first started It is unique to each computer and each user Unlocking Code This activates the Single User license and is supplied by RockWare when you send us your Registration Number and Installation Number described above Contact RockWare at the addresses shown on page 12 2 You can click OK to proceed and jump to Starting Up LogPlot page 12 Multiple User Single Computer Unlocking the Software Note You must have standard user or higher privileges e g administrator to unlock the Multiple Users Single Computer license Restricted users should contact their system administrator Multiple Users Single Computer licensees will now see a window where the licensing information can be entered 1 Enter the requested information Licensee Name Type in your organization s name This will be displayed in the program s startup screen Registration Number Type into this field the letters and numbers that are printed ona sticker on the CD
316. o represent rock types and in the Well Column tab to represent construction materials 194 Entering your Data When you double click in the Keyword column in the Lithology tab or the Materials column in the Well Column tab or click on the Add Keywords button in the Pattern Percentage Editor window the program will display the Lithology Selector window The Lithology Selector window displays the list of keywords in the current keyword file Lithology Selector C Documents and Settings m GROUTED ANNULUS A GW GYPSUM JASPEROID KAOLINIZED LATITE LIMESTONE LIMESTONE AND SHALE INTERB LIMESTONE MUDSTONE LIMESTONE WITH SHALE INTERI LIMESTONE WITH SHALE STRINI LIMESTONE DOLOMITIC LOST CIRCULATION J MAFIC INTRUSIVE MARBLE METADOLOMITE i MUDSTONE L X Close OOLITIC LIMESTONE OXIDIZED Help DECAT s The Lithology Selector window displays the list of keywords in the current keyword file How to Select a keyword Follow these steps to select a keyword from the Lithology Selector window L To select a keyword click on its name Use the scroll bar as necessary to move up or down the listing The pattern that is associated with the currently selected keyword is displayed in the upper right corner of the window To accept your selection click on the Select button If you wish to close this window you can click the Close button Or you can leave it open an
317. o right Fill plots to right of curve What vou set Low to High EE right To Let Pattern column High Low Lithology protile What you wart Curve plots right to left Fill plots to left of curve What you set High to Low Left To Right IR To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Lithology Pattern column placed in the design screen filled with a brick pattern You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 8 To close the Lithology Column Setup window click the Close button 80 Designing Your Logs Review the Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the lithology pattern column right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the Lithology item in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding a Lithology Description Column Use A Lithology Description Column is designed to contain textual descriptions that are listed in a Lithology tab in your data file The patterns for any declared description keywords will be plotted in the associated Lithology Pattern Column if any How it works As the LogPlot program compiles your data file it will look for keywords and descriptions entered into a Lithology data tab It will plot the text in the Lithology Description Column that has the same name You can request that various combinations of keyword and descrip
318. oblems with the appearance of your log Viewing Your Log page 231 for information on viewing printing and exporting the log plots Compiling a Single Log or Compiling Multiple Logs previous 228 Compiling Your Logs Compiling a Batch The Data Editor s Log menu contains two tools for interactively compiling a single log or multiple logs from currently open data files The compiled logs are displayed in a Plot window on the screen where you can select menu items for saving printing and exporting the graphic log The Log menu s Batch Compile command lets you select multiple data files to compile For each file you can select a specific log design plotting scale and other items Each compiled log can be printed and or saved on disk as a LogPlot LPT file This is a different process than the Command Line Batch discussed in the Reference section First the menu driven batch compiler lets you create the batch listing right within a program window And multiple files can be saved and printed The menu driven batch compiler does not offer screen display of the compiled logs How to Compile and save print a batch of data files Follow these steps to compile and save print a batch of data files 1 Select the Log Batch Compile command from the Data Editor window The program will display the Batch Compile window Load an existing BTC file Save current listing as a BTC file Add an item to the current list Edit
319. ock menu commands or toolbar buttons to insert either a single line of text or a text paragraph on an existing ReportWorks page You can adjust the font type and size color and fill pattern color Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary 267 ReportWorks 2 Choose your tool Click on the Text toolbar button T or choose the Tools Text menu command to insert a single line of text such as a title or label Ti Click on the button or choose Tools Text Block to insert text that can wrap into multiple lines or paragraph 3 Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the upper right corner of the text label or blockis to be placed and click the left mouse button to insert it 4 You will see the Text Options dialog box Type in the text and select its font outline and background as described in the Help messages Click Apply to apply the settings you ve chosen Click Close to close the Text Options window 5 You can access the text options at any time by double clicking on the text or by right clicking and choosing Properties 6 Reposition the text label as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and dragging it to the new location Inserting a RockPlot Map or Diagram RK6 File into a ReportWorks Page Use the RockPlot RK6 menu command or toolbar button to insert into a ReportWorks page a map cross section or other 2D diagram generated by RockPlot2D and saved as a RK6 file You
320. ody buttons Ex The pointer will change shape to a EH you may now place the column on the design screen 4 Place the description cursor where you wish to position the column s left edge and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the requested information 81 Designing Your Logs Name Enter the name for this Lithology Description Column Each description column item must have a unique name so that you can refer to each one individually in the data file The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Name The NAME identifies the description ar LET column you may have more than one AND matches it with its associated Lithology Pattern column into which the keywords patterns will be plotted If you want the LogPlot program to link the information in this Description Column with patterns to be plotted in a Lithology Pattern Column then the two columns must share the same name Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Lithology Description Column in the body of the log You can change the column s position by editing these values or by moving or resizing the column on the design screen itself The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen Appearance Font Click on this button to access font type style size and color If after you compile your data for this log design within LogPlot you find that th
321. offset the block to the left of the center positive values to the right In the example below the items noted in red are plotted to the right and the items noted in blue to the left 187 Entering Your Data 1 offsets 1 unit to the left of the well center a Well Construction up Top Base Outer Diam Inner Diam Material Offset 415 cir are EPLE EPLE D TTT op 865 0 100 0 6 0 0 0 COMCRETE PLUG 25 0 50 1 5 0 ELANK 1 a 0 1 5 U DENTONTTE DU UG 1 35 60 58 2 1 5 0 BLAME 1 40 o 65 1 5 0 BLANKE 1 45 50 65 70 1 5 U DENTONTE PLUG sl 55 70 77 5 1 5 BLAME 1 50 55 70 75 If no offset is declared the program assumes the item to be centered in the well Caption Optional NEW This column is used to define any captions to be plotted to the right of the construction diagram The well column can be set up in the log design to be comprised of part diagram and part labels with settings for the label font size color and lines arrows 188 1 offsets 1 unit to the right of the well center Well Construction Entering your Data Top Base Outer Diam Inner Diam Material Offset 50 4 0 11 0 Op SURFACE SURFACE 4 0 140 11 0 10 0 SURFACE SURFACE 0 0 14 0 15 0 11 0 GROUTED ANNULUS GROUTED ANNULUS 0 0 36 0 10 0 6 0 GROUTED ANNULUS GROUTED ANNULUS 2 0 50 0 6 0 5 0 THREADED JOINTS THREADED JOINTS 36 0 42 0 10 0 6 0 BENTONITE BENTONITE 42 0 80 0 10 0 6 0 GRAVEL GRAVEL
322. og design e Check Data Against Log Design is used to compare the tabs listed in the current data file with the entities in the current log design and display a quick summary LogPlot s Automatic Data Template When the LogPlot program is launched it remembers the name of the log design that was used during the last session of the program and it loads that log design as default in the Log Designer window The program can also initialize the new untitled data windows always created upon program startup to match that design complete with all necessary data tabs 191 Entering Your Data Example Your company drills a new borehole and you want to display the data in the log design typically used for all such projects You simply start up the LogPlot program it automatically loads the design you last used and initializes a new blank data window with all the necessary tabs to match the design You then enter the field data and compile the data into a plottable log Here s a diagram of this workflow Program loads default log design creates data file to match Start the i LogPlot program Data File Log Vrew Enter import Field Data into Data File How to Create an Automatic Data Template L Start the LogPlot program The program will load the default log design It will populate a new untitled data window with data tabs to match the entities in the log design 2 Enter import your data See Data Tab Summary
323. og Body Components page 72 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Pattern Percent column placed in the design screen filled with several pattern designs You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Pattern Percent Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Pattern Percent column right click on the Pattern Percent column and select Edit Entity or find the Pattern Percent column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button 106 Designing Your Logs Adding a Bar Graph Column Use A Bar Graph Column is used to plot quantitative data as scaled bars over depth intervals How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate data in the Interval Data or Multi nterval Data columns and it will plot the data in the Bar Graph column of the same name The data may be plotted from left to right or right to left linear or logarithmic scale with or without horizontal or vertical reference grids You may vary the color and fill pattern for the bars Each Bar Graph column on the log must have a separate Interval Data tab or column in a Multi I nterval Data tab in the data file Alternatives If you wish to display the data values themselves as text labels you can do so using a Bar Graph Value
324. ogram settings so that LogPlot knows how to deal with all of your information 1 To access the program settings click on the Options button Al or click on the Options menu Note that the program settings are also accessible from within the Compile a Log dialog box The program will display a set of dialog boxes with stick up index tabs All of the settings that you can establish here are saved within the program and do not need to be changed unless your preferences change Log Settings Access the Log Settings by clicking on the Options toolbar button Along then clicking on the Log Settings tab Or you can click on the Options menu on the main toolbar and select Log Settings Confirm starting and ending depths for the log Top of Interval Base of Interval These settings displayed in the Top Bottom Settings window Log Compile a Log determine the depth at the top and at the base of the log to be created The defaults that are displayed are read from the active data file s Setup tab Depth Interval Top of Interval 0 Bottorn of Interval a0 Positive Depths Depth Interval Top of Interval 2 000 Bottom of Interval 2 050 Positive Depths You may type in different depths if you wish to plot a subset of the data The program will omit any data that is not within the range you specify here If your data is entered as positive depths be sure that the Positive Depths check box in the Scaling section is checked
325. ogram will warn them that the log is larger than their printer paper and ask Do you want to fix they should click No The log will be displayed on the screen at full size but if they then try to print it may be clipped They can view the log and or print the log with caveats noted above For more information about the use of LogView they can refer to the Help Contents menu Other LogPlot Tools Chapter 6 Other LogPlot Tools Editing Keywords Editing Keywords I ntroduction A keyword is a word or set of words that is used e Ina Lithology tab to describe a lithologic interval The program uses the keyword to associate the lithology with a particular pattern which will be plotted in a Lithology Pattern column on the log The keyword text and or additional descriptive text can be plotted in a Lithology Description column on the log e Ina Percent tab to describe multiple lithology intervals for pattern representation in a Pattern Percent column e Ina Well Column tab to describe construction materials for pattern representation in a Well Construction column e Ina Fill Bar tab to describe any depth interval for pattern display in a Fill Bar column The association between the keyword and the graphic pattern is done in LogPlot s Keyword file You can maintain different Keyword files for different projects The Keyword file can be viewed new keywords created patterns colors changed in the Keyword Editor Access the Key
326. olor click on the OK button at the bottom of the Select Symbol window For more information about the process of viewing selecting and editing symbols see Viewing and Editing Symbols page 257 Position Use these settings to determine the placement of the symbol Left Right These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the left amp right edges of the symbol in the header footer of the log Top Bottom These coordinates determine the vertical placement of the top and bottom edges of the symbol You may change the symbol s position by editing these values or by simply moving or resizing the item on the design screen itself as discussed below The horizontal and vertical coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left and top edges of the design screen respectively Frame If you want the symbol to be enclosed in a solid line box insert a check in this box 51 Designing Your Logs 6 To accept the displayed settings click the Apply button You will see the symbol displayed on the screen at the declared location size and color You may continue to adjust the pattern block settings in the dialog box if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 Click Close to close the Symbol Setup window Reposition the Symbol See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Symbol Set
327. omatic New Choose this option if you want the curve s minimum and maximum values to be determined automatically by the program based on the data values at compile time LogPlot will scan the data values and set the curve scale to a reasonable min max range to accommodate the values For example if the data ranges from 1 6 to 8 2 it would set the curve column s linear Min Value to 0 and the Max Value to 10 e If you have header footer column legends linked to the curve they should be updated appropriately e If you have activated automatic value labels they should be updated appropriately e It s important to note that Automatic scaling will probably result in the curve column s min max value range varying from well to well based on the data range represented if it is important that the curve column represents the Same data range for all wells in a project you should use the Manual option Scale Table New Choose this option if you want to change the horizontal scale for a curve for one or more depth intervals in the log This can be handy for display of abrupt drilling rate changes for example e This requires a Scale Table be present in the data file which defines the top and base depth and the minimum and maximum column values for that depth range The Scale Table must have the same name as the curve column If no Table is found the program will use the Manual settings for the column e Header footer column legends will not
328. on intervals and the representative percentages of each rock type ko Scale Table tab NEW Used to define custom scale intervals for curve columns Symbol tab Used to enter depths and symbol numbers for plotting graphic symbols on a log EI Tadpoles tab This tab is used to enter downhole structural information dip angle dip direction for display in a Tadpole column Text Column tab This tab is used to enter general text comments sample numbers etc and the depth at which it is to be plotted on the log lel Vertical Text tab This tab is used to enter depth intervals and text to be plotted vertically in the body of the log 149 Entering Your Data Well Column tab In this tab you enter the depth intervals inner and outer diameter measurements and keywords for the well construction materials Notes Your LogPlot data files may contain virtually any number and combination of the available data items e If all of the items in the data file have corresponding items in the current log design compiling the log will deliver a graphic log with all data items represented e f your data file contains fewer data items than are contained in the current log design the un referenced portion s of the design will simply be left blank when the log is compiled For example if your data file contains only lithologic descriptions and you compile using a log design that contains description and bar graph columns the bar graph colum
329. on to access the folder in which the network s certificate file LP7 LIC has been installed This is a file that is supplied by RockWare after your purchase initialized for the number of seats you purchased You may not run the network version of LogPlot without access to the Certificate File which maintains the network count among other things To obtain the certificate file contact RockWare at the addresses shown in the following topic When you your network administrator receives the certificate file via email save the file to a folder on the server to which all users have read and write access Note to LogPlot2003 users Specifying the User Folder is no longer necessary All license types will make use of the My Documents LogPlot 7 System folder for storage of user specific files 2 You can click OK to proceed and jump to Starting Up LogPlot below Contacting RockWare I nc Web www rockware com unlock htm Telephone within Colorado 303 278 3534 within the U S 1 800 775 6745 outside the U S 303 278 3534 Fax 303 278 4099 Please include e Your name e Your company s name if applicable e The Registration Number e The Installation Number Single User and Multiple User Single Computer e How we should contact you email telephone or fax The email address where the network license file should be sent Network version Starting LogPlot The First Time After you have installed and licensed the program an
330. op edge of the design screen See Header Footer Coordinates page 33 for more information 3 Adjust the line s appearance by clicking on the line sample and choosing style thickness and color Click OK to close the line properties window 4 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the line displayed on the screen according to your settings You may continue to adjust the line if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 5 To close the Line Setup window click the Close button Adding Header Footer Rectangles Use The Header Footer Rectangle button is used to define a rectangle anywhere in the header or footer portion of the log This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands How to Draw a header footer rectangle 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button Header Footer S if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Header Footer Rectangle button irom the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Rectangle The pointer will change shape to a for drawing the rectangle 4 Place the at the intended location for the upper left corner of the rectangle in the header or footer portion of the design screen 5 Hold the mouse button down and drag down and to the right until the
331. ore information Scale Table Tab Use New The Scale Table tab is used to enter one or more depth ranges and a new minimum and maximum value range for a curve column As LogPlot compiles the data it will plot the curve using the default horizontal scaling but will change the scale as declared for the Scale Table depth interval s For example if a Curve column is set up to plot the curve from 0 to 20 you can use a Scale Table to define a top and base depth within which the curve will be plotted from O to 100 instead Corresponding log design component Data entered in this tab will affect the plotting of data in the Curve column page 90 of the same name How to enter the Scale Table data 1 To add anew Scale Table tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there already are Curve columns in the current log design which are set to link to a Scale Table you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert new Scale Table tab s in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab s based on the curve name s in the log design Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Scale Table command to manually insert a Scale Table tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Curve column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Curve columns
332. ot Curves column If you wish to list just a single column of data for each depth e g just one curve see the Curve tab page 155 Corresponding log design component Quantitative data declared with this command will be plotted on the log in a Curve column page 90 or Cross Plot Curves column page 100 of the same names Extra curve data will be ignored How to Enter the Multi Curve data 1 To add anew Multi Curve tab into the current data file select the Data New Data Item Multi Curve command There is no automatic means of inserting Multi Curve tabs the Update Data Template from Log Design tool creates single Curve tabs for all Curve columns The program will display a window in which you can define the names and order of the curves to be entered Because this data page references multiple curve columns each with its own name the curve names are listed as the column headings in the tab rather than the tab heading 169 Entering Your Data 2 For each curve to be listed in this data tab click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Curve column or Cross Plot Curve column to which each is to correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the Curve columns and Cross Plot Curve columns in the current log design 3 Click OK when the column names are selected 4 Enter the curve data as shown in the example below El Depth RLM RSFO RLC Curve column identifiers to 2
333. ot logs or BMP JPG EMF WMF TIF or other images and these image files have been moved the program will warn you that the files cannot be located You will have the opportunity to browse for the images so that their paths can be updated Saving ReportWorks Documents RWR Files 1 Select the File Save As command 2 The program will display a dialog box where you may specify the file name and other drive and directory path information for the page Type in the name under which to store the plot file on disk and click on the Save button 3 ReportWorks always stores plot files in a binary RW6 format If you need to export the image to a BMP JPG or PNG format you can use the Export command Printing ReportWorks Diagrams You can output the image contained in a ReportWorks document to your printer using the File Print command 262 ReportWorks It is assumed that you ve already established the page layout prior to designing and printing since the page will be printed as it s displayed in the ReportWorks screen L Open an existing ReportWorks document or create a new document as necessary 2 Double check the page s layout using the File Page Setup option 3 To print the document choose File Print Your current printer s dialog box will be displayed The options that are available will vary from depending on printer type Typically you would click the Properties or Options button to access your printer s settin
334. oter Items Line The pointer will change shape to a for drawing the line on the design screen 4 Place the at the intended location in the header or footer for one of the line s endpoints 5 Hold the mouse button down and drag until the has reached the second endpoint for the line 6 Release the mouse button The line will be displayed on the screen Reposition the Line See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Access the Line Options You can use the Header Footer Line Setup window to adjust the line s position and its style thickness and color 1 Double click on the line to access its Setup window Tip You can also right click on the line and choose Edit Entity or you can locate the line in the Edit View Entity List screen Header Footer Line Setup Position X horizontal and ral 2 25 ne 2 25 SN horizontal and Y vertical Y vertical coordinates for emm 3 coordinates for the first endpoint vi 2 25 Y2 3 0 the second endpoint of the line of the line Options E 44 Designing Your Logs 2 Adjust the line s placement by editing the beginning and ending coordinates You can also reposition it by dragging with your mouse as discussed above The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen and the vertical coordinates are relative to the t
335. other users won t have to access your original libraries in order to view the proper pattern and symbol designs when they view the graphic log System Settings Access the System Settings by clicking on the Options toolbar button lena then clicking on the System Settings tab Or you can click on the Options menu in the program toolbar and select System Settings 1 Skip Intro Screen Insert a check mark in this box to disable the display of the initial Welcome to LogPlot screen on program startup 2 Show tutorial on program start Insert a check mark in this box if you want the program tutorial to be opened and displayed on the screen each time the program is started To turn off the automatic launching of the tutorial screen remove the check mark Note that the tutorial can also be accessed at any time from LogPlot s Help menu Tutorial command 3 Prompt to save modified LPT files nsert a check mark in this box if you want to be prompted to save untitled log plot displays before closing or exiting the LogView window Disabling this reminder means that the program will permit you to close a View window without saving thus throwing away any graphic log displayed within it We do not recommend disabling this setting 4 Create a Log Designer preview Insert a check mark in this box if you want the Log Designer window to create a JPG preview of Log Design Files LDF when they are saved This can be helpful the next time you go
336. ou want the log display to start The initial starting depth will be displayed above the prompt and can be retrieved using the Reset button You cannot enter a starting depth that is outside the initial range of the log this tool is designed to display a subset of the data 3 New Ending Depth Type in the depth at which you want the log display to end The initial ending depth will be displayed above the prompt click Reset to retrieve the default 233 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs 4 Click OK and the program will repaginate the log to display the requested depth range Viewing Depth Elevation Coordinates Once a log is displayed in the View window you can use the mouse pointer to determine the depth or elevation at any point on the log in the units in which the log was compiled This can be helpful if you wish to determine elevations at the top of stratigraphic units for example or to note the depth at which you wish to insert a text notation for a later re compilation of the data The interactive view of elevations will be accurate only for vertical boreholes How to View depth elevation coordinates 1 Insert a check mark in the Elevation check box at the top of the LogView window if you wish to view the coordinates in elevations or leave the check box blank if you prefer to view points as depths below the surface 2 Use your mouse to point to any place on the log and view the coordinates displayed to the right of
337. ou wish to display on the screen by highlighting it and choosing the OK button LogPlot creates and opens files in the LogPlot format LPT only The program will plot the first page of the log on the screen You may use the scroll bars on the side of the View window to view hidden portions of this page or you can advance to subsequent pages of the log if any The current page and total number of pages is displayed in the Reference Bar at the bottom of the View window 236 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Update the page size If your computer s current printer page setup is different than that stored in the LPT file the program will display a warning The Log and Printer Page Size do not match Do you want to adjust the page size 1 You will usually click Yes so that you can view the discrepancy and update the page to prevent clipping Click No if the log should be displayed as it was originally compiled but there can be clipping that occurs If you clicked Yes you will see a window showing your computer s current printer and paper size top of window as well as the paper size saved in the LPT file bottom of window This warning occurs because even similar printer models may have SLIGHTLY different active paper sizes e g 10 67 x 8 17 versus 10 58 x 8 2 What to do next depends on several scenarios a If your paper size is similar to the log s page size you should just click the Set Default Size button and
338. ough some of these lessons to acquaint yourself with how LogPlot works This window will display each time the program starts you can turn it off using the Options System Settings Show Tutorial on Program Start setting Starting LogPlot the Next Time If you ve already installed and run LogPlot before follow these steps to start up the program 1 Click on the Start button on the Windows taskbar 2 Click on the Programs or All Programs option 3 Click on the RockWare item and then on the LogPlot 7 program icon that s displayed in the pop up menu If you have hidden the startup screen you will be brought right into the program If you have not hidden the startup screen it will be displayed showing your current license type registration number and licensee name If you are running the program in Trialware mode you will see the number of sessions and the number of days you have left in your trial period If LogPlot has been run before on this computer the uses and or days may be used up This can be true even if you had uninstalled the software before re installing If you need more time contact RockWare and we may be able to provide an extension code 4 Ifyou want to continue with the current license type click the OK button If you need to change your license type such as changing from Single User to Multiple User click the Change License Type button Starting LogPlot with a Command Line LogPlot can be la
339. our Desktop or to your c temp folder Introduction In Windows Explorer or My Computer double click on this file to start the installation 4 Follow the recommended installation settings unless you specifically need to install the program in a different folder To proceed to the next screen at each installation step click on the Next button To cancel the installation entirely click Cancel 5 When the installation is complete the licensing program will start up automatically Refer to Licensing LogPlot for information about how to set up the licensing In Windows Vista the person installing the software must have Administrator privileges Upgrading from another version of LogPlot LogPlot 7 will be installed in a new folder on your hard drive Program Files RockWare LogPlot 7 to eliminate overwriting of your earlier files Its accessory files will be installed in My Documents LogPlot 7 System system files and My Documents LogPlot 7 Samples sample DAT and LDFxX files If you want to use any of the following user modifiable files from an earlier version of the program you will need to copy them to the new LogPlot 7 folders The logplot key file that contains your LogPlot keywords LogPlot98 or older you ll need to IMPORT these keywords into the keyword editor You can copy this to your working data folder or to My Documents LogPlot 7 System The rockutil pat rockutil sym and rockutil rsf files that contain
340. our changes applied 7 To close the Image column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Image column right click on the Image column and select Edit Entity or find the Image column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding a Well Construction Column Use A Well Construction column is used to illustrate the materials and intervals used in the construction of the well using graphic pattern blocks New to LogPlot 7 is the ability to plot captions as an integral part of the well construction diagram How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate any Well Column data tabs and read the declared material names entered as keywords just like lithology and their inner and outer diameter measurements If LogPlot finds a Well Construction column in the design of the same name it will plot the appropriate pattern for each material over the declared depth interval at the declared width in the column If requested text captions for the materials will be plotted in a portion of the diagram Each Well Construction column on the log must have a separate Well Column tab in the data file LogPlot data tabs Well Construction Columns are linked to data entered into Well Column data tabs page 185 How to Insert a well construction column into a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane
341. our data If you make any adjustments to the Header Footer settings if you adjust the printer or page size be sure to click the Fit button again so that LogPlot updates the calculation LogPlot will determine the scale based on the available space on the first page of your log Positive Depths Insert a check in this box if your data are entered as positive depths e g values increasing as you proceed down the drill hole Reference ES Lithology ES Lithology e p pe lb FS E GARNET SKARN j ic GARNET SKARN PYYROMENE PYROMENE TREMOLITE TREMOLITE negative depths cr positive depths c TREMOLITE HORNFELS TREMOLITE HORNFELS FPYROKENE HORNFELS FPYROKENE HORNFELS QUARTZ VEINING QUARTZ VEINING TREMOLITE MARBLE nu TREMOLITE MARBLE cl a Set the Starting Page Number Starting Page Number This setting on the Main tab of the Compile a Log Compile All Logs and Log Settings windows is used to define the page number for the first page of the log s being compiled Type into this prompt the page number for the first page of your log For most logs this will be set to 1 However here are some possible exceptions e f you are plotting a log subset to be inserted into a larger report you might set the starting page to a larger number to fit into an existing page sequence e If you are including a Report with the log you might set the starting page to 0 so that the first main log page is numbered 1 Establish
342. ouse button depressed and drag that corner or end point to the new location Release the mouse button when it is resized as you wish Alignment Tools Use the Edit menu s Align tools to assist you in getting your header footer items arranged L Z Click on the pointer button in the Log Designer toolbar Click on the first of the items to be aligned This is the reference item to which the other items you choose will be lined up with Hold down the Ctrl key and click on the additional items to be lined up with the first With all of the items selected click on the Edit Align option you wish to use Or right click and choose Align Align Left Multiple items will be set to the same left X1 coordinate Align Right Multiple items will be set to the same right X2 coordinate Align Top Multiple items will be set to the same upper coordinate Y Align Bottom Multiple items will be set to the same lower coordinate Y Align Horizontal Spacing Items will be spaced evenly from left to right Align Vertical Spacing Items will be spaced evenly from top down Remember alignment will occur based on the first item selected Dialog box Each log header footer item has characteristics that can be set via a dialog box Within the dialog box there are coordinate edit boxes that display the current horizontal and vertical coordinates for the item You may change the placement of the header footer item by editing thes
343. p widow 5 Enter the requested information Name Enter the name for this Edit Text item Each Edit Text item must have a unique name so that you can refer to each one individually in the data file Rame Company The Name identifies the Edit Text item Any EDIT TEXT label in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with this same name will be plotted at this location when the log ts compiled If you have the same Edit Text items on Header 1 and Header 2 or in Footer 1 and Footer 2 they may share the same name thus requiring only one entry in the LogPlot data file Group The group is used to organize the Edit Text entries into different tabs in the data file If you don t wish to assign groups simply leave it set to Default To create a new group simply type in the name To choose an existing group select it from the drop down list Position These coordinates determine the placement of the handle of the Edit Text block in the header or footer of the log The X coordinate represents the horizontal left to right placement and the Y coordinate the vertical placement in inches or centimeters relative to the top of the header or footer The defaults reflect the location where the mouse button was clicked step 2 above You may change the text placement by editing 57 Designing Your Logs 58 these values or by moving the text itself on the design screen using your mouse See the alignment settings
344. patterns and symbols that you can customize using the Pattern and Symbol Editor programs You can copy this to your working data folder or to My Documents LogPlot 7 System LogPlot data files dat Since files are not backward compatible you should work with copies of your old data files in the new version of the program Any Log Design Files ldf that you created within the Log Designer Since files are not backward compatible you should work with copies of your old log design files in the new version of the program In LogPlot 7 the file format has changed and the files are now stored as LDFX files LogPlot permits you to maintain multiple versions of the keyword symbol and pattern files See Setting Up Program Files page 285 Licensing LogPlot After running the installation program the next step is to license the software The License Agreement The first screen you ll see is a display of the license agreement Please read this It s important that you understand the terms of the license 1 If you accept the terms of the license agreement click in the I accept the terms of this agreement box and continue on to the next step 2 If you do not accept the terms of the license agreement click the Cancel button The program will not launch Contact RockWare for details Introduction Choosing Your License Type Next you ll probably see a screen similar to this Loef lot Licensing Options Who is F la
345. patterns based on hardness and you have those values stored in a Curve data column named Hardness this is the name you would type into the Curve Name field Min Value Max Value Here type in the minimum and maximum curve values to be associated with the edges of the lithology column For example if your curve data representing hardness ranges from 40 to 80 you could set the Min Value to 40 and the Max Value to 80 Or if you wanted to show this curve at less exaggeration you could set the Min Value to 0 and the Max Value to 80 79 Designing Your Logs Low to High High to Low These buttons determine the direction in which the curve s values will plot Click on the left hand button Low to High if the low curve values are to correspond to the left edge and the high values to the right edge of the Lithology Pattern column Click on the right hand button High to Low to if the high curve values are to correspond to the left edge and the low values to the right edge of the pattern column Left to Right Right to Left These buttons determine the direction in which the opaque fill will plot Click on the left button Left to Right to fill the region on the left side of the curve line with white Click on the right button Right to Left to fill the region on the right side of the curve line with white Here are some examples of button combinations Fatter column Low High Lithology protile What wou want Curve plots left t
346. pe size and color Color Use this button to change the color for the text This can also be selected using the Font button Macros To insert the current page number and or total number of pages in the header or footer use the following hot keys p Inserts the current page number in the text area when compiled in LogPlot t Inserts the total number of pages in the text area when compiled in LogPlot You can insert these hot keys as Static Text either alone or together as well as along with regular text When compiled in LogPlot this field will be replaced by the number of the current page Text This field will Page p of t be replaced eet by the number of total pages in the log On a compiled log this might look like this Designing Your Logs DEPTH LITHOLOGY DESCRIPTION Page 1 of 2 16720 1630 x Reads the Easting coordinate defined in the data file s Setup tab and inserts that coordinate in the text area when the log is compiled y Reads the Northing coordinate defined in the data file s Setup tab and inserts that coordinate in the text area when the log is compiled z Reads the Elevation value defined in the data file s Setup tab and inserts that value in the text area when the log is compiled To insert today s date in the header or footer use this macro d Inserts today s date in the text area when the log is compiled Alignment Settings Horizontal Alignment Click in a radio
347. ph Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Set up the Bar Graph name position and scaling Use the settings on the Main tab of the Bargraph Setup window to define the name and positioning for the bar graph column and to establish the data range and scaling 107 Designing Your Logs 108 Bargraph Setup Man i Appearance Grids Name ASH v Position Left 2 2292 Right 3 8854 Scaling F Logarithmic P Manual Min Value 0 Max Value 100 Automatic C Interval Table Low to High High to Low Name The Name field is used to identify the Bar Graph column Any data in an Interval Data tab or Multi Interval Data tab in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this column The name you declare must match character for character the name for the interval data listed in the data file The name match is not case sensitive The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These list the horizontal coordinates for the Bar Graph column The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Scaling Logarithmic Insert a check here if the bar graph is to be scaled logarithmically log base 10 within the
348. played on the screen select the View Entity List command or click the View Entity List button H i The program will display a listing of all of the items in the current log design 2 To access a specific item scroll down the list as necessary until you see it and left click once to select it When selected it will appear highlighted You can sort the entity list using any of the columns name type etc 3 Click on the Edit button to display this item s settings 4 Edit the settings as you wish or simply press OK or Cancel to close the settings window The item will remain active when you are returned to the design window 37 Designing Your Logs Options Once an item is selected you can view or change the item s settings by right clicking on the item and selecting Edit Entity DN NEE WENN NEE NEE NEE Edit Entity a Tee a car ec ie Gan ee Send To Back k Bo sadi A ao a EHNEN Delete Entity i e ek be ee Na N l Align iL Move an entity to the back Because you can overlay items in a log design it can be difficult to click on an item that s stacked on the bottom of the pile Log Designer contains a Send to Back command that changes the stacking order of the entities on the screen 1 Use your mouse to position the screen pointer on the item that s blocking the item you wish to select and single click it The selected item should appear with handles on either end if it is a line or on all
349. playing a new blank design with the name you entered displayed in the title bar at the top of the window This new file name will now be the default LDFX file to be used in LogPlot for compiling your logs Open a Log Design File TO open an existing log design file LDFX or LDF that has been saved on disk you have a few options 1 Access the Log Designer window as necessary 2 a If you wish to open a recently viewed LDFX file click the File Reopen option and select a file from the displayed listing b Or simply double click on an LDFX or LDF file shown in the File Manager pane to the left of the design window 24 Designing Your Logs 2 LoeP lot Fie Edit Data Took Optons Window Help C Smith Project Kail F Design borehole log Vb PR Data BH8 dat BR Data BH9 dat 3 Smith Project 4 d RockWorks DB w P l l FIELD Er Lodiecign Va Mi Select eat Il ces borehole log s E Logs Ipi Double click on the PROJECT NUMBER 1991U56 PROJECT NAME gt TAG LOCATION OVER THERAINBOW name of a Log Design file LDFX or LDF DORILUNG CO MSEACHRANESON to open it DRILUNG METHOD AR ROTARY FIELD PARTY inden Harley GEOLOGIST MeEachran S Static Test Edi Text DATE BEG SE 0119 96 DATE COMPLETELD P c Or select the File Open command from the Log Designer menu or the Open File toolbar button The prog
350. pth at which it is to be plotted ina Text column on the log Such text could range from sample numbers to measurements of moisture content or consistency to extended textual listings or notes These text entries will simply be plotted as is with no keyword searching or linking to a pattern column as is done with text listed in a Lithology tab For text columns with more formatting refer to the Interval Text Column and Interval Data tab Corresponding log design component Text listed in this tab will be plotted on the log within the Text column page 112 of the same name Restrictions Each Text Column entry is limited to 2048 characters You must list the entries in sequential order down the log How to enter the Text Column data 1 To add anew Text Column tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Text column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool 182 Entering your Data to insert a new Text tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Text Column command to manually insert a Text Column tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Text column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program w
351. ption Editor is brought up when you double click in the Text column It is used to type in the text to be plotted in the Text Column To enter the text you may type in from the keyboard or use the following buttons ab Cut Use this button to remove any highlighted text from the Editor window and place it in the computer s Clipboard for later pasting Sg Copy Use this button to place a copy of any highlighted text in the Editor window and place it in the computer s Clipboard for later pasting 5 Paste Use this button to insert at the current cursor location in the Editor window the contents of the computer s Clipboard Only text may be pasted into this window You can format your descriptive text with spaces and paragraphs In the Description Editor window simply add spaces or carriage returns paragraph markers using the Enter key to format your text If you are typing the descriptions in the Lithology tab s cell use these characters a forward slash followed by an asterisk to note a hard carriage return Description Editor A do S bray white well sorted firm to brittle Entering this into the Description Editor salt and pepper glauconitic small fracture 1 4 at 16727 generates this in the Lithology tab Description up to 2000 Characters g gray white well sorted Firm to brttle IT salt and pepper glauconitic i Small Fracture 1 4 at 16727 Arenaceous Limestone gray white w
352. r positive or negative values just be sure to be consistent throughout the data Text In this column you enter the text to be plotted vertically within the indicated interval The text can be short abbreviations as in the above examples or relatively lengthy however if there is not enough room vertically to display the text it will be truncated when the log is compiled Items that affect the interval length in addition to the depth range are font size established in the Log Designer and vertical plotting scale You may use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell within the Vertical Text tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Well Column Tab Use The Well Column tab is used to enter depth intervals and well material keywords for display as a Well Construction diagram ona log In addition the user declares the inner and outer diameter for the materials for correct representation of width The construction keywords are associated with graphic patterns just like lithologic keywords and are easily selected from the data tab In addition you can specify an offset from well center enabling you to display two separate borings in a single Well Construction diagram New to LogPlot 7 is the ability to define text captions that are plotted as an integral part of the well construction diagram Corresponding log design component Intervals and materials listed in this
353. r several pages Horizontal Changing the horizontal size of a log body item is done by stretching or shrinking the item on the design screen itself or by changing the item s coordinates in its dialog box The horizontal limits to the log s design is determined by the printer and page size you have selected File Page Print Setup Log Body Items Log Body Item Summary Here is a summary of the items that you can include in the body of your log The tool buttons are found on the Log Designer tool pane to the left of the program window and can also be accessed in the Tools menu These items are discussed in the remainder of this section Click here to display the log body tool buttons Re Log Body ime as Select Pattern Description ri ec DRILL HOLE Drill Hole umar Location Default Listing l Scale ba Curve Cross Plot E RE Default Listing i l Drilling Contractor Default Listing gd ScseBa Cuve Cross Piot Logged By Default Listing Date Default Listing i m el k Keyword Deacoption T T 1 RW Logging CO 2221 Eset St Suite 1DiDGcocket CC SW Ww fs Ge mn 5480 00 E Dep Ed Iuesce 7 sl Fost Horizontal Metal Tadpoles Line Line E z f Percent BarGraph Bar Graph Value El Text Vertical Symbol Text Fill Bar Pictures Well Construc RH amp Pecet Ba Guph Ba Graph Value Discontinuit T ka T neat 209
354. r with the header _ and footer lines margins ignored In order for the body line to join continuously with a footer line or rectangle be sure the footer items are set to a Y coordinate of 0 so that they lie at the very top of the footer 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the vertical line displayed in the design screen You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Log Body Line Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Vertical Line in the design screen right click on the Vertical Line and select Edit Entity or find the Vertical Line in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding a Tadpole Column Use A Tadpole column is used to display structural readings bearing and dip at depth using special tadpole symbols The symbols can be fixed or variable in size and color How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will read depth bearing and dip listings from a Tadpoles data tab It will plot the tadpole shaped symbol in the Tadpole Column of the same name The horizontal placement of the symbol is determined by the dip angle with horizontal along the left and vertical along the right and the orientation of the tadpole s tail is determined by the azimuth bearing The size and color o
355. r work area by positioning your pointer on the boundary bar at the top of the footer and dragging it up or down as appropriate You can design two distinct footer designs footer 1 which is typically printed at the bottom of the first page and footer 2 which typically displays on middle and end pages of the log All are optional When you invoke the New command File menu to create a new log design the program will display a blank design screen You may then insert a log footer item by selecting one of the footer toolbar buttons and placing the item in the log footer section You may use the displayed ruler for horizontal placement reference Items in the log footer cannot be moved into the log body and vice versa However footer items can be copied into and from the log header Header Footer Mechanics Three Headers and Two Footers The Log Designer permits you to design three different headers and two different footers for each log e Header 1 is typically plotted on the first page of the log and presumably contains more elaborate information that does not need to be duplicated on subsequent pages of the log e Header 2 is typically plotted on the second and subsequent pages of a log and can contain an abbreviated form of the primary header e The Report can be up to a full page in length and is always displayed before the first log page e Footer 1 is typically plotted on the first page of the log e
356. rag you ll see a rubber band image of the shape s outline You can orient the scale bar horizontally or vertically and the orientation can be modified in the Options window Once you release the button the scale bar will be displayed Double click on the scale bar to access its options or right click and choose Properties Click on the Scalebar tab to select the scale bar s style and scaling Choose from Line and Tick Marks shown left below or Filled Bars below right by clicking in the appropriate radio button You can also select the color CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH cc D N CH j C j N C j Units Here define the number of scale bar units to be displayed per inch or centimeter you choose on the page The unit type will default to your page units but you can change units for the scale bar Typically you ll be adding a scale bar to represent a map or cross section scale and you would set the scale bar units to be equal to the map or cross section units Major Interval Minor Interval Enter here the major label and tick interval for the scale bar and the minor tick interval The examples shown above are set to a Major Interval of 100 and a Minor Interval of 10 Position Click on this tab to establish the text tick position relative to the scale bar margin size and scalebar width and height in your page units Use the Labels tab to select the font style color and size for the labels Use the
357. ram to save the image s in the compiled log LPT file This will cause the LPT file to be larger in disk size but is a good option if keeping track of files and links is a bother This is particularly true if you wish to share the LPT with a co worker or client Stretch Images Insert a check in this box if you want the image that will be plotted in this column to be stretched to fill the entire column width This is important If this box is checked the image will be resized horizontally to fill the width of the Image column you declare here Designing Your Logs If this box is not checked the image will be plotted in the column at its true size using Note that bitmaps are always stretched vertically to fill the declared depth interval range declared in the data file Clip to column width Insert a check here if the program should clip bitmaps that are wider than the column to the column width Border Around Images Insert a check in this box if you want the images themselves to be surrounded by a solid line border If multiple images are displayed within this column each will be bordered Frame around Column Insert a check here if the Image column is to be surrounded by a solid line border 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Image column displayed in the design screen labeled IMG You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want y
358. ram will display the Open Log Design dialog box In this window there may also be displayed a preview of the currently highlighted log design file These previews can be created automatically by the program see page 27 and can be scaled smaller for a better view Select the log design file that you wish to view by highlighting it and choosing the OK button Important Notes The Log Designer opens files in the LogPlot 7 log design format LDFX The Log Designer opens files in the LogPlot2001 2005 log design format LDF Because this is an older format you will be warned should you try to save any changes to the design that it will be resaved in the new LDFX format LDFX files are not usable in versions older than LogPlot 7 The Log Designer also opens LPT files from LogPlot98 however it will display a warning that it will need to convert it to a newer format as it s being opened The Log Designer permits only one log design file to be displayed at a time The design displayed in the Log Designer window is always considered to be the default LDFX file to be used in LogPlot for compiling your logs The name of the active file is always displayed on the stick up Design tab and also in the Status Bar at the very bottom of the program window Once you have opened a design file you may edit it and save the changes Save command or save the changes under a new file name Save As command You may also print the design file
359. ram will update the window to reflect the horizontal dimensions of the page you ll see a red line representing the printable width If you changed the inch cm units the ruler will also be updated Designing the Log Header and Footer Log Header I ntroduction Log headers are plotted at the top of a log and typically contain textual information company name date etc column labels company logos etc Some of the header text is static or unchanging while some such as a date change from log to log The Notes tools display text that wraps Within the Log Designer work screen the header is completely separate from the log body and has a different set of command buttons E Jog Bile Edt Date Took Options Window Heb C Documents at Design vmi ed kik AE Data Envito geotech dat A Sect Line page edge reference EI eeben Rectange Picture Log Header Design Area Pattern Symbol _ Horizontal scroll bar _ SS lt 3 Static Text Fafe draggable header boundary Static Note Edt Note lt gt Legend Header footer drawing tools Current header Report Header 1 or Header 2 Och Welt uses df volcano Logs lt lt gt AB Log Body 5 64 0 00 E ei 0984 24 PHeade 1 zl Footer sl lso 00 per in SINGLE 8 17 x 10 67 in C Documents and Settings ncavity DocumentsiLogPlot 715amplestuntitied KE A 29 Designing Your Logs The log header can be
360. rdinates determine the horizontal placement of the Tadpole column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Note that the size of the symbols plotted into the Tadpole column can be either fixed or determined by size declarations in the data file Frame Column If this box is checked the column will be bounded by a solid line rectangle 129 Designing Your Logs Style Choose Solid filled circles Circle open circles or Crossed Circle open circles with an x inside Color Choose Column Based if you have declared colors for each measurement in the data file Choose Fixed to select a constant color for the tadpole symbols Fixed or Default color Click here to choose a color for the tadpoles if you ve chosen Fixed above or for any Column Based colors that are not declared Size Choose Fixed for the tadpole symbols to be a constant size In the prompt type in the size in inches or centimeters for the tadpole circles In the example above the tadpole circles will be 1 10th inch in width Or you can choose Value Based if you want the tadpole symbols to be scaled based on a listing of values in the data file If you choose this option type into
361. rence pattern numbers and symbol numbers they don t store the actual pattern or symbol designs and you will then need to send the pattern symbol libraries with the log A pain What to send to your client L 2 4 Required LPT file s for clients to view Optional LogView installation program LogView7_Install exe if the customer doesn t already have it installed Optional LogPlot pattern file PAT and or symbol file SYM if you have not chosen to embed them in the plot see above The factory tables are rockutil pat and rockutil sym or send other PAT SYM files if they ve been renamed Optional BMP or JPG or other raster images that are displayed in the log body if you have not chosen to embed them in the plot see above What the client needs to do L 5 6 Install LogView either from a download from RockWare s web site see above or from the installation program supplied on CD or via email Copy save the LogView installation file from the web or CD to the temp folder on their computer and double click the file LogView7_Install exe to install Copy save the LPT files you ve sent from email or CD to their hard drive before opening with LogView They should make a new folder in which these files are saved If copied from a CD Windows may save these files to the hard drive in a Read Only state After the client copies the files over they should right click on the LPT file names in Window
362. rent log design contains 8 different Text Columns it will display the names of the 8 Text Columns from the log design 3 Select the name for the data tab or type in a new name if it s not shown in the list and click OK The program will insert a new data page with the requested name in the current data file See also Automatic Data File Tools page 191 for automatic ways to synch the data file with the log design Data Tab Summary page 148 for a summary of the data pages Delete Data Items Any time that you wish to delete an entire tab or page of data from the data file currently displayed in the Editor follow these steps 1 Click on the tab that you wish to remove to make it active 2 Right click in the body of the data listing and select the Delete Data Page command Or you can select the Delete Data Page command from the Data menu The program will ask you to confirm this operation 3 Click on Yes if you wish to proceed with the page deletion or click on No to cancel the page deletion If you confirmed the operation the program will remove the entire data tab from the display Notes This command deletes all of the data in the active data tab and the data tab itself If you wish to delete some of the data from within a tab simply highlight the text to be removed and press the Delete key on your keyboard If you made a mistake do not save the data file Instead use the File Open command to re open th
363. rid is on at 0 125 in spacing E gi EK FIELD BOREHOLE LOG PROJECT NUMBER 1997 66 FIELD BOOK PROJECT NAME TAC TOTAL DEPT LOCATION OVER THE RAINBOW GROUND SL DRILLING CO McEACHRAN amp SON DRILLING METHOD AIR ROTARY Depth ft FIELD PARTY Minden Hartley Reference grid is off Elle hien 44 In addition to the display of the reference grid you can also activate Snapping to the grid If activated when you place a log design entity in the header footer or log body the program will snap the item to the nearest grid point This can make life a little easier when trying to line up design entities Note that you can always override the snapped coordinates by entering new coordinates in the item s setup dialog box See page 34 for more details Selecting Items in the Log Body How to Select a single item in the log body 1 Click on the pointer button on the toolbar 3 2 Use your mouse to position the pointer on the item and single click it The selected item should appear with handles on either end if it is a line or on all four corners all other log body items 70 Designing Your Logs Select multiple items in the log body 1 Click on the pointer button on the toolbar i 2 Use your mouse to position the pointer on an item and click the left button once 3 Then hold the Ctri key down while you select another item You may continue in this manner to select multiple items A
364. rks lithology table or stratigraphy table into LogPlot 3 Use its File Append to Current File command to append the keywords to your existing table Open update the RockWorks Log Design 1 Inthe Log Designer open the sample file RockWorks BH Idf 2 Use the Data Editor s Data Check Data Against Log Design command to see where the sample layout doesn t match your imported data file 3 Make the necessary changes to the design file You will probably need to remove some design items and add others that are missing Be sure to check the curve and bar graph column ranges to assure they match your data range NOTE This process applies to RockWorks2006 and later MDB based borehole data only If you wish to open RockWorks2004 or RockWorks2002 BH borehole files use the File Import RockWorks2004 2002 Boreholes option Add Data Tabs If you have a data file displayed in the Data Editor from creating a new file or from opening an existing file you can add new data tabs to the file 1 Click on the Editor s Data menu and choose the New Data Item command 144 Entering your Data 2 Inthe pop up menu that is displayed click on the type of data page you wish to add These correspond to the items that might be included in your log design The program will prompt you for the item s name displaying a list of the comparable items in the current log design For example if you have added a Text Column data tab and the cur
365. rn Percent columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Percent tab labeled with the selected name Enter the percentage data The example shown below taken from the sample file lithology3 dat illustrates how data is entered into the tab Pattern column identifier to orcs ee match column name in the log design cuttings Top Base SANDSTONE SHALE LIMESTONE DOLOMITE LOST CIRCULATION Keywords whose 16720 16725 30 0 ZU U U percentages 16725 16730 5 10 40 45 o are listed below 16730 16735 0 100 a U U 16735 16740 a U a U 100 16740 16745 100 0 a U U 16745 16750 20 0 40 40 0 16750 16755 0 z0 a0 U U 16755 16760 0 0 a U 100 16760 16765 0 30 ZU U U 16765 16770 z 0 35 0 0 16770 16775 0 0 a0 z0 0 Depth at top amp base Relative percentage values for each declared of each interval keyword The percentage values on each row must total 100 or less Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Pattern Percent column in the log design This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the Data Edit Entity Name command Top Base In these columns you must list the depth or elevation at the top and the base of the pattern percent interval being described on that row Shortcut Right click on any cell in the Percent tab and select Fill Interval Column
366. rom the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Symbol Column if necessary to display the log body buttons The pointer will change shape to a Jl for placing the column on the design screen 4 5 S Place the symbol cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and press the left mouse button The program will display the Symbol Column Setup window Tip You can place a Symbol column right on top of another log design entity such as a Well Construction column to show water level or a Scale Bar to show drill stem tests Enter the requested information Symbol Column Setup Name wl Symbol Position Left 5 5625 Right 5 708 Options jw Frame Colurn Name Enter the name for this Symbol column Any symbol data in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this Symbol column The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Symbol column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components Note that the size of the symbols plotted into the Symbol column
367. rrent data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual You can also use the Data New Data Item Symbol command to manually insert a Symbol tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Symbol column in the log design to which this data page is to be linked In this list the program will show the names of all of the Symbol columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Symbol tab labeled with the selected name Enter the symbol data as shown in the examples below Single Depth Symbol Column identifier to match the column name in the log design Lal Water Level ae DepthiTop Base optional Symbol Size ER e O25 10 18 z EG Ki 15 Depth at which symbol is Symbol Symbol to be plotted If only a double size in ZS single depth is declared click inches the symbol center will or cms 20 be placed at the listed depth Depth Interval 179 Entering Your Data Symbol Column identifier to match the column name in the log design DepthiTop Base optional Symbol Size U 2 25 25 4 3 TI 25 49 E p 25 fod 9 4 Depth interval over which the Symbol symbol is to be stretched If gdouble both top and base depths are click entered the symbol will be stretched to fill the depth interval Symbol size
368. rriage returns paragraph markers using the Enter key to format your text You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell within the Text Column tab 157 Entering Your Data See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Edit Text Tab Use The Edit Text tab is used to enter the text to be plotted in the changeable text fields in the log header and footer This is typically used to note names dates locations etc Corresponding log design component Text declared in this tab will be plotted in the header or footer portion of the log within the Edit Text fields page 56 of the same names Restrictions There is a 120 character limit including spaces on text entries The Edit Text entries will not wrap when displayed on the log If you need to enter long text that will wrap check out the new Edit Notes data item previous topic How to Enter the Edit Text data 1 To add an Edit Text tab to the current data file or to add a new entry to an existing Edit Text tab you have two choices Automatic If there s already an Edit Text label in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert the new Edit Text entity to the current data file The program will know how to name the item based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Edit Text command to
369. rs operations either with a constant or with the data listed in another column in the tab Columns Resample is available for data tabs containing point sampled curve quantitative data It is used to transform data which was sampled at randomly or densely spaced depth intervals to evenly spaced depth intervals for plotting This is a handy way to delete extraneous data that can be the result of stream digitizing or overly sensitive sampling equipment This tool will resample all of the columns in the active tab Columns Smooth is also available for data tabs containing quantitative data This command is used to Smooth out data values by averaging them with a user specified number of neighboring data values Columns Filter is also available for data tabs containing quantitative data and is used to remove low and or high out data values re assigning them a threshold minimum or maximum This can be helpful if you are importing data sets with very high or low null values or if you suspect recording error Columns Statistics computes a quick summary of the population range sum and average of the column s data values See the program help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data Entering the Data Other Data Tools for more information Moving Data Tabs LogPlot displays its data tabs in the order in which the data blocks are listed internally in the DAT file starting with the SETUP tab Typically the tabs are lis
370. rthing Gold Silver Lead ZINC Tin Mercury Antimony 1 330 8 0078 00837 0 0976 0 0929 0 0788 0 1156 0 1139 2 16711 GOU D 256 6 01058 0 095 0 1021 0 1044 0 09575 0 0936 3 65280 140 1 130 6 01037 0 099 0 0836 0 1021 0 0762 0 0936 0 1089 Easting 42 Import To Page Multi CurveHistogram E Starting At Row Manually Select Column I These data tab columns will be assigned these text file columns LogPlot data tabs require that the first one or two columns list point depths or top bottom depth intervals If the imported text file isn t listed with depths you can leave the depth column s blank as in the example above and then enter the depths manually or automatically using the Fill Depth Column or Fill Interval Column tools 207 Entering Your Data 4 In the above example the Skip Lines setting is left at 0 at first in order to see this particular file s header lines for assigning columns Then prior to clicking OK the Skip Lines setting is changed to 1 so that the header listing is not imported Click OK to proceed with the import The program will read the data in the selected text file skipping the indicated number of header lines and will list the remaining data in the selected tab Importing DBF Data The Data Editor s DBF import tool reads files into a single tab of your choice You may control the DBF fields are assigned to each tab column How to Import DBF data L 208
371. rting at the current cursor position in the tab To add depth intervals to a tab follow these steps 1 Click in the tab to be edited to make it active Click in the row at which the depth listing is to start Right click in any of the tab s cells Select the Fill Interval Column command from the pop up menu oe E Enter the requested information Starting Value Enter at this prompt the depth to be listed in the row in which the cursor is currently located This value may represent English or metric units Ending Value Enter at this prompt the lower most depth to be listed on the data tab Depth Increments Enter here the increments at which the depths are to be listed in the tab This will determine the Top and Base entries for each depth interval Decimals Type in or select with the up or down arrows the number of decimal places to be represented in the depths Be sure the decimal places are adequate to represent the requested increments Top Base Starting Value 0 0 0 5 0 Ending Value 100 50 ion Interval 5 10 0 15 0 15 0 20 0 Decimals 1 20 0 25 0 25 0 30 0 30 0 35 0 35 0 40 0 40 0 45 0 AE D conan 199 Entering Your Data Notes e In LogPlot depths can be entered as either positive or negative values this tool will comply with the current depth setting established under Log Settings e Any depth data already listed in the cells will be overwritten Edit Entity Name The Edit Entity Name com
372. rval Dividers This option is used to turn on and off the lines that are drawn between lithologic description intervals 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Lithology Description column placed in the design screen labeled LithDesc in the selected font color and size You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 To close the Description Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the lithology description column right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the Lithology Description item in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding a Depth or Elevation Scale Bar Use A Scale Bar is used to note depths or elevations down the log How it works Ifthe Scale Bar is set to Depths the uppermost value on the bar will correspond to the depth at the top of the log declared in the data file in the Setup tab or in the Compile window You may choose to have the depths displayed as negative values if so entered or you may strip off the negative sign and display their absolute values If the Scale Bar is set to Elevations the uppermost value on the bar will correspond to the elevation declared for the well also declared in the LogPlot data file in the Setup tab For more about depths vs elevations see page 189
373. s Explorer or My Computer choose Properties from the pop up menu and view the file s Attributes listed on the General tab If Read only is checked the user should remove the check mark Copy save any accessory files that may be supplied pattern symbol tables bitmaps to the same folder as the LPT files They may need to check the Read only status of these files as well Start LogView using the Start Programs LogView shortcut Use LogView s File Open command to browse for and open the supplied LPT file s It s possible that LogView will tell them during opening that The Log and Printer Page Size do not match Do you Want to adjust the Log Page size 7 They should click Yes and they ll see a window showing their computer s current printer and paper size top of window as well as the paper size saved in the LPT file bottom of 249 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs window This warning occurs because even similar printer models may have SLIGHTLY different active paper sizes e g 10 67 x 8 17 versus 10 58 x 8 What to do next depends on several scenarios 250 7a If their paper is similar in size to the log s page size they should just click the Set Default Size button and then click OK The log will be displayed on the screen at the new page size to match their printer 7b If their paper is considerably smaller than the log they should simply click OK WITHOUT clicking Set Default Size The pr
374. s File New menu option to create a new page layout document 1 With the ReportWorks program displayed on the screen select the File New option 2 If there is an existing document already displayed and it has not been saved the program will display a warning Click Yes to save the existing document or No to close the existing document without saving A new blank page will be displayed on the screen 3 Use the File Page Setup option to define the page size and layout 4 Use the Tools menu options to insert graphics and shapes Opening Existing ReportWorks I mages If there is no ReportWorks window yet displayed on the screen you will need to create a new ReportWorks window first See the previous topic 1 To open an existing RockWorks Report RWR graphic file select the Open command from the File menu The program will display a prompt window in which you may specify the name of the file to open ReportWorks opens files that were stored in a binary RWR file format only See the Tools menu for options that insert other graphic file types into the current page layout 2 Inthe displayed dialog box select the RWR file you wish to open accessing other drives or directories as necessary 3 When you are ready to plot the image in a window on the screen choose the OK button The program will load the document into the ReportWorks window Note that if there are linked images in this document RockPlot2D images LogPl
375. s installed in Windows Here you can select a different printer if necessary and you can click the printer s Properties button to select the paper size and portrait vertical or landscape horizontal orientation 4 Click OK when the settings are established to your liking The ReportWorks page view will be updated based on the page dimensions and orientation If you view your page in Full Screen mode the printable area of your paper will be shown in white against a gray background The printable dimensions of the sheet are determined by your printer s software not by ReportWorks See the Tools menu options for inserting graphic images and drawing shapes See the Options menu for establishing the page units Establishing your ReportWorks Page Units Use the Options Units menu item to set your ReportWorks page units This will determine the units displayed in the reference rulers as well as the default units shown in scaling options 1 Click on the Options menu and then on the Units item 2 From the pop up menu select either Inches or Centimeters This is a toggle item selecting either from the menu will establish it as default The program will update the reference rulers with these units These will also become the default scaling units for subsequent RockPlot images and geo referenced raster images that you insert Defining the ReportWorks Program Libraries Use the Options Program Files tool to establish the names o
376. s is what you wish to do If you are certain click Yes Or to cancel the process click Cancel 6 If you click Yes the program will display a window with a status code This is a number that confirms the removal of the license write this down You may need to supply this to RockWare when you request an unlocking code for a new computer Tips If the program s introductory screen has been hidden you can re activate its display using the Options System Settings Skip Intro Screen setting The LogPlot licensing program can also be run from the Start RockWare menu The LogPlot Screens Before you get into the discussion of LogPlot particulars you should familiarize yourself with the general layout of the program When you start up LogPlot you ll see the main program window The program first launches with two tabs available one for accessing a data window and one for a log design window As you use the program you may see more tabs displayed for additional windows such as log viewing windows new data windows etc 14 Introduction Last Modified lz Suggested vertical maing Si unis inch Suedel dean Agl Ki sprech Bhir Lhe Loft Jury Bock El pat lips im RULL B17 x 10 67 im Comes and Settings hy Documents LogPict TiSemplesLithology L bof There are three main types of LogPlot windows Data Editor Window A blank Data Editor window wi
377. s of the vertical scaling of the log If you ve declared both a top and base depth this size will affect the horizontal dimension only You may use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the Symbol tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information 180 Entering your Data Tadpoles Tab Use The Tadpoles tab is used to list depths and dip direction and dip angle for downhole structural dipmeter measurements Optional fields include color and value This information can be displayed in a Tadpole column in the log design Corresponding log design component This structural information will be plotted on the log in the Tadpole column page 128 of the same name How to enter the Downhole Structural Data L To add a new Tadpoles tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Tadpoles column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Tadpoles tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Tadpoles command to manually insert a Tadpoles tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Tadpoles column in the log design to whic
378. se Windows standard options Outline Options Click on the Outline tab in the Options window to access these settings Style Click in this drop down box to choose the line style for the legend outline such as None for no outline Solid for for a solid outline or Dashed for a dashed outline Color Choose the outline color by clicking in the color box and making your selection Width If the style is set to Solid you can designate a line width by typing in an integer value with O equaling thin lines widening as the integer increases Non solid lines dashed dot dashed etc are set automatically to a thin width Click Close to close the Pattern Symbol Color Legend Options window If the wrong patterns or symbols are displayed be sure you have the correct Pattern and or Symbol Library specified in the ReportWorks Options menu Program Files command You can resize the legend by first single clicking on it to see its handles Then click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or edges and drag to the new position Release the mouse button when the rectangle edges are in the correct position Reposition the entire pattern legend as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on it and dragging it to the new location 273 ReportWorks Notes 274 Reference Chapter 8 Reference Program Settings Prior to entering your data and compiling the data into a graphic log plot you need to establish a variety of pr
379. sed to display column headings value ranges and graphic samples for curve or bargraph columns This is an automatic way to link header and footer text to quantitative columns in the log body for display of value ranges and line styles colors This is a design item that links to Curve Multi Curve or Bargraph columns in the log design It does not link to data fields How to Add curve bar graph column legends 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button DN pester sone if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Legend button kom the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Curve Bargraph Legend oH The pointer will change shape to E for marking the legend position on the design screen 4 Place the cursor at the intended location in the header or footer for the upper left corner of the legend block and click and hold the left mouse button Keep the mouse button down as you drag down and to the right drawing a rectangular area within which the legend will be placed The program will display the Legend Setup window 5 Enter the requested text settings Main tab Curve Bargraph Click on the down arrow button to select the name of the Curve or Bargraph column in the current design to which this legend is to be linked The legend must be linked to a Curve or Bargraph column in ord
380. settings of 96 your screen pixels per inch should work fine For print output you should enter a greater value The resolution will affect the output JPG file size but not by as much as it does the BMP export You might start with a resolution of 150 pixels inch and if you find this inadequate too pixel y or block in appearance try again at 250 or 300 242 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs Colors Select Color or Grayscale for the output file Compression quality Use the slider bar to select also the compression style Generally the greater the compression you select by dragging the slider bar to the left the lesser the output quality Because the JPEG graphic format stores information very efficiently you might start with relatively low compression to achieve better quality 9 Entire Log New Insert a check here if your log occupies multiple pages and you wish to export the entire log as a single long image You can select the first page header and final footer to be included in the export the body of the log will be exported as continuous no breaks and no headers on intermediate pages Header Choose which header to include at the top of the log Header 1 Header 2 or No Header Footer Choose which footer to include at the top of the log Footer 1 Footer 2 or No Footer Scale Select the vertical scale number of depth units per inch or cm for the output image The default that is displayed will be the scale c
381. sign and from your printer header footer driver settings margin from the visible in File Compile window to Page Printer Setup determine available space for your data 277 Reference 278 If you make any adjustments to the Header Footer settings if you adjust the printer or page size be sure to click the Fit button again so that LogPlot updates the calculation Fit Log to Page is not available if you are compiling multiple logs since the depth range of the different data files may vary Option 3 Fit Fit Units per Page If you like to plot a specific number of depth units per page on your log select the Fit Units per Page option from the drop down box and then click the Fit button 1 Select Fit Units per Page 2 Enter the number of units to be plotted on each page of the log Scale 2 925403 20 A Click the Fit button 4 The computed scale will be displayed LogPlot will determine how much space is available on the page and the scale that will result in the defined number of units within that space It will update the scale displayed in the prompt box Printable length of page units requested page Scale to fit _ Units on page 4 LogFlot reads Header amp footer page size and size are read from printable area the log design and from your printer header footer driver settings margin from the visible in File Compile window to Page Printer Setup determine available space for y
382. signs stored in a Pattern file The default Pattern file is declared in the Options Program Files menu Here s a Summary of what the Pattern Editor window contains Current pattern Pattern 4 number Preview area Unit Cell for viewing the where you current Unit draw your Cell design at patterns the shown size Current Change pattern of lines or Unit Cell size density to dots The preview change limit is 50 segments 10 in appearance Erases the Clears contents most of Unit Cell recently added item Imports a pattern in the Unit stored under a Cell May different number be used repeatedly Accepts changes Cancels changes amp exits Editor amp exits Editor See the LogPlot Help messages Help Contents Other LogPlot Tools Editing Patterns for these additional pattern topics Adjust the pattern size or density Select the pattern colors Select the pattern line width Open a different Pattern file Save the Pattern file under a different name Combining Pattern files Create a printable pattern index Access the Pattern Editor e Editing Patterns 256 Other LogPlot Tools Selecting and Editing Symbols The Select Symbol Window The Select Symbol window is displayed when you insert a symbol in a log design s header or footer or when you are entering data in a Symbol data tab It s also available when you select the Tools Edit Symbols menu option This window is used to
383. st be an Administrator or an End User with standard user or higher privileges e g administrator to unlock the Multi User license or to set up the Network license 2 Now select the type of license you have purchased There s more information about the license types displayed in the right pane of the program window Single User If you purchased a Single User license click that button With this license type LogPlot is licensed to be used by a single designated person You should purchase this license type if you will be the only user of the program Running in this mode requires an unlocking code that is supplied by RockWare If you purchased a Single User license your registration number on a sticker on your CD or user manual will contain the letters CS or AS or S If you are waiting to receive your unlocking code can run the program in Trialware mode see below If you are an Administrator installing the program for another person you will need to cancel the licensing at this time and have the actual user log into the computer The Single User licensing information is stored under the Current User registry The actual user can rejoin this licensing sequence by starting up the LogPlot 7 application after they ve logged into Windows Introduction Multi User Use this mode if you have purchased a Multiple Users One Computer license for the program With this license type LogPlot can be installed onto a single computer a
384. t All i Logs Te ot Refresh Files Hide LogPlot will open the selected files into the Data Editor window Open RockWorks MDB Borehole Records using the File Manager LogPlot 7 has the ability to load borehole records from a RockWorks2006 MDB database How to Open a Single Borehole Record 1 Expand the File Manager s RockWorks DB heading as necessary 2 Double click on the name of the borehole you wish to open LogPlot will load the selected data into the Data Editor window You can have multiple files open in the Data Editor at the same time Open Multiple Borehole Records 1 Expand the File Manager s RockWorks DB heading as necessary 2 Insert a check mark next to the names of the boreholes you wish to open 3 Right click in the File Manager 4 Choose Open Selected Files from the pop up menu LogPlot will load the selected data into the Data Editor window You can have multiple files open in the Data Editor at the same time Below is a listing of the comparable data types RockWorks data item LogPlot data item Lithology Lithology Stratigraphy Lithology 143 Entering Your Data EELER There are a few other housekeeping details you ll need to do so that your RockWorks borehole data can be displayed in a LogPlot log Import your Lithology and or Stratigraphy Tables 1 Use LogPlot s Tools Edit Keywords option to access the Keyword Editor 2 Use its File Import command to import your RockWo
385. t command from the View window s File menu 3 Select the To ReportWorks option 4 Current Page Select this option if the current page only is to be exported This works well for single page logs or for individual pages of multi page logs Note that if your multi page log has headers and footers on each page you ll need to export each page individually by accessing the log page and selecting the Export to 246 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs ReportWorks Current Page command It may be easier to export to HTML and then insert the individual JPG pages into the ReportWorks layout Entire Log Select this option if the entire log is to be exported This works well for continuous multi page logs Note that if your multi page log is not continuous e g has headers footers on each page they will be stripped out in this export process If you need to maintain the headers and footers use the Current Page command to export each page individually see above The program will then do the following e It will create a BMP image of the single page or an EMF image of the entire log e It will launch the ReportWorks program and create a new document e it will insert the image into the ReportWorks page At this point you can do the following e Resize the log image as you wish by clicking on the log image and dragging the edges or corners e Change the layout of the document using the ReportWorks File Page Setup command e
386. t log design LDFX file page 275 Set the vertical scale page 276 Set the starting page number page 279 Establish the header and footer settings page 279 Establish pattern and symbol settings page 282 See also Errors During Compiling page 288 for tips on data and on problems with the appearance of your log Viewing Your Log page 231 for information on viewing printing and exporting the log plots Compiling Multiple Logs next for information about compiling all open data files Compiling Single Multiple Logs using the File Manager page 227 for quick compile options Compiling Multiple Logs The process of compiling multiple logs involves selecting the data files that contain the data to be displayed on the logs and establishing the compiling settings This tool functions just like the single file compiler but with these exceptions e The top and base of the logs will be set to the depths in each data file s Setup tab no override e There are no Fit Log to Page or Fit Units per Page options for scaling How to Select the Data Files 1 Open the data files you wish to compile 2 When you are ready to compile all of the open data files select the Compile All button SI from the Data Editor toolbar Or you can select the Compile All command from the Data Editor s Log menu Set the Compiling Settings The program will display a dialog box where you can confirm a number of log settings These options ar
387. t printer Note that if the printable width is greater than the printable length the paper orientation is probably set to Landscape rather than Portrait Printer Info HP Lasenet 4 00 PCLE Default or active printer Page 11 00 x 8 50 2AM aA mm Current printer page size Printable Length 10 67 Printable Width 6 17 Printable length amp width Printer information page size margins Click here to change printer or printer settings Page Settings You can type in your own page Length width TE dimensions or click the Set Default 1067 Ta Size button below Choose the units for the page dimensions and the Log Designer s ruler information Set Default Size Click here to set the Page dimensions to match the The page dimensions will be Printable Length amp Width from above saved in the LDF file 2 To select a different printer either for purposes of composing the log design or for actual printing to change paper size or to adjust paper orientation click on the Printers button You will see a standard Windows Print Setup dialog box To change the printer name click on the down arrow on the right side of the Name prompt to select a different printer that s installed on your computer If you don t see the printer you wish to use you ll need to return to Windows to handle that using the Start Settings Printers option To change the paper size select one of the op
388. t the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied To close the Curve Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Curve Column right click on the Curve Column and select Edit Entity or find the Curve Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Set up the curve name position and scaling Use the settings on the Main tab of the Curve Column Setup window to define the name and positioning for the curve column and to establish the data range and scaling Curve Column Setup Main Appearance Grid Legend Name CALIPER Tue Yertical Depth Curve TVD uses Orientation data on t C Position Left 3 375 Right 4 Scaling M Logarithmic e Manual Min Value 0 Max Value 24 C Automatic C Interval Table Low to High High to Low Left To Right B D I Right To Lett Le zeck X Close Help Name The Name field is used to identify the Curve Column Any data in a Curve or Multi Curve tab in the LogPlot data file that is flagged with the same name will be plotted in this column For example if the Curve Column is named Gamma then any data listed in a Gamma curve tab or in a Gamma column in a Multi Curve tab will be plotted in this column The name you declare must match character for character the name for the curve
389. t window for entering comments and notes that you can use for your reference Corresponding log design component There is none How to Enter the Setup Data The Setup tab is created automatically each time a new data sheet is created There can be only one Setup tab per file 1 Enter the data as illustrated below 150 Entering your Data Depth at the coordinate 2 coordinate top of the log location of well elevation of well Depth at the coordinate SETUP base of the log location of well B U 450 U U Comments Last Modified 2 26 2007 Suggested vertical scaling 50 unitsfinch Suggested design Lithology1 ldF simple lithology Use LogPlot key Bock pat Notes for your reference only They are ignored during compilation of the log Start Depth Ending Depth In these cells you enter the depth or elevation at the top and at the base of the log They are used by the program to define the vertical coordinate system and range for the log Positive versus negative depths Your depth data can be entered as either negative or as positive values Just be sure you are consistent if the Ending Depth established here is entered as a negative value be sure that all other depth values for curves lithology etc are also entered as negatives if the Ending Depth is a positive value be sure all depths are entered as positives See Log Settings page 276 for declaring positive depths These s
390. tarting and ending depth values may span the entirety of your data or may list just a subset of your data in order to plot just a portion of your log Prior to compiling a log Log Compile a Log command the program will read the top and base declared here and will display them as defaults You then have the opportunity to override the default settings to plot more or less data Easting Northing In these cells you must enter the x and y location coordinates for the top of the well You may use virtually any coordinate system that you wish though if you will be exporting the data into RockWorks you should be sure that the location coordinates are in the same units as your depths If unknown you may set them both to O Elevation KB In this cell you enter the elevation at the top of the well The program will use this to compute elevations if your log design contains an elevation scale bar 151 Entering Your Data If your data are recorded by depths this Elevation value should represent the elevation at the Start Depth of the log If your data values are recorded by elevations this variable should be set to 0 If your log contains no scale bar that represents elevations in the log you may enter 0 If you intend to export your LogPlot data to RockWorks you should be sure that the surface elevation units meters or feet are the same units as your depths and your X Y coordinates For more information see Depth versus Ele
391. te If you want to print the image at high resolution you should increase the resolution to at least 150 pixels per inch We use 200 300 for publication quality graphics Compression For JPG files use the sliding bar to select the compression you wish to use for PNG files choose Low Medium or High The greater the compression the lower the quality of the output image and the smaller the disk size of the output file The lower the compression the higher the quality of the output image and the larger the disk size of the output file Progressive Insert a check in this box to enable drawing of the PNG image on the screen as it is being loaded in the destination application Transparent Insert a check here if you would like to choose a color in the PNG image to be transparent and select the color by clicking in the color box 263 ReportWorks 5 Click OK when you are ready to continue The program will store on disk the current ReportWorks document in the selected graphic format View and Layout Options Establishing the ReportWorks Page Layout Use the File Print Setup tool to establish the size and orientation of your ReportWorks page This is an important first step in designing a report so that you know the page s dimensions 1 Create a new document in ReportWorks or open an existing RW6 file into the program window Select File Print Setup 3 You will see the Print Setup window for your default printer a
392. ted files in the current project folder and allow you to open them and for DAT files compile them e LogPlot data files DAT opened into the Data Editor window e LogDesign files LDFX and LDF opened into the Log Design window e Log Plot files LPT opened into the Log View window e RockWorks borehole well files contained in an MDB opened into the Data Editor window 137 Entering Your Data File Edit Data Log Tools Options Window Help C ASmith Projet sl ch Design borehole og Idfx EJ Data BH1 dat Active project folder FB Data dat i BH1 dat El Consistency Organic Vapor CGI LogPlot data files DAT BH2 dat SETUP E TEXT Samples Sampling Mel DHA dat BH8 dat Ending Depth Easting BH3 dat I A Rockworks DB 0 2 15 0 RockWorks borehole BHI records from MDB 8 ie E ast Modified 2 20 2007 BHS Suggested design file borehole log IdFx field borehole log Log Design files LDFX and LDF Suggested vertical scaling 2 5 units inch continuous no Use LogPlot ke RockUtil pat Log Plot files LPT se LogPlo y Boch IO pa Check boxes are used to open multiple fies at once File Manager Right Click Options If you right click anywhere in the File Manager pane you ll see the following options Open Selected Files Any DAT LPT and RockWorks boreholes that are checked will be opened into their respective windows
393. ted in the order in which they are added to the data file If you created the DAT file automatically from the log design the tabs will be listed in the same order as the entities are listed in the log design You may however prefer that the tabs be listed in a specific order to comply with field collection techniques or to fit your personal preferences Use the Move options available when you right click in the body of the tab Or simply click and drag the tab to a new location The Move options are not available for the Setup tab it is always listed first How to Move a data tab left or right menu command 1 Click in data tab you wish to move 2 Right click in any of the cells within the tab 3 Select the Move Left command from the displayed menu to move the tab on position to the left Select the Move Right option to move the tab one space to the right The tab will be repositioned as requested Be sure to save the file to keep the changes Move a data tab click and drag 1 Click on the data tab you wish to move 204 Entering your Data 2 Hold the mouse button down on the tab as you drag it to another position within the tab sequence As you drag you ll see a small rectangle representing the tab name and icon that moves with the cursor 3 Release the mouse button when the tab is positioned where you want it Notes e The Options System Settings Allow data tabs to be dragged option must be activated check
394. tems in the Log Body page 70 for details If you wish to remove the selected item s click on the Cut toolbar button or select the Cut command from the Edit menu The item s will be removed from the design and placed in the Log Designer clipboard a If you wish to make a copy of the selected item s click on the Copy toolbar button above or select the Copy command from the Edit menu The item s will remain in the design and a copy will be placed in the Log Designer clipboard Paste the cut or copied item s into the log body by choosing the Paste command from the Edit menu or by clicking on the Paste toolbar button shown above Log Designer will insert the item s If you pasted a single item the program will display its dialog box for confirmation of coordinates and or entity name If necessary edit the entity name and or the positioning coordinates for the item Click on the Apply button to accept any changes you have made to the item s settings and press Close to close the dialog box 75 Designing Your Logs 7 You can also reposition items within the log body by dragging them to the desired location Log Body Scaling Vertical As you design the body portion of your log the components will be shown at a fixed size vertically However when you compile your data into the log design in the LogPlot program you may vary the vertical scale in the Options Log Settings dialog box The body of your log may extend ove
395. tes are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column itself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Fill Pattern Click on the pattern to be used to fill the Fill Bar intervals Outline Color Choose the color for the outline of the filled intervals Fill Color Choose the color for the pattern to be used to fill the intervals Frame Insert a check here if you want the entire Fill Bar column to be drawn in a solid black line Remove the check if no outline is desired If deactivated the column will be invisible unless an interval is plotted 6 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Fill Bar Column placed in the design screen filled with the selected pattern and color You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 6 To close the Fill Bar Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Fill Bar Column right click on the Fill Bar Column and select Edit Entity or find the Fill Bar Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding an I mage Column Use An Image column is used to display a graphic image BMP JPG TIFF PNG PCX TGA EMF WMF format
396. text Within the Log Designer work screen the footer s work area is at the bottom of the window It shares the same command buttons as the log header BY LoePtot Ba Bile Edt Qata Tools Options Window Heb C Decuments on E De untitled idk FAB Data Envito gaotech6 dat VR VE Gre De WC De GT E Ee E VEER E TEE ee Gel D EE Data 1 da A RockWorks D e N fl LogDesion d Select Line elste H Envro geotect Envito geolect Oo Enveo geotect Rectange Picture Er Oe Envro geotect Envio gaotect K NN Enveo geotect dem Symbol Enviro geotes v Erivito gaclect LS lt gt Envro geotect Static Text Edt Text eoptyacall GeoplhywacaZ Geoptyaca3 B Geophyacs4 Static Note Edt Note Lithology 1 kx Lihology2 kv Lithology3 dix 2 EI Mr s Legend lt gt Mr is Mr is H d A MudiogT Hx eager draggable footer boundary i footer piine g drawin i Radon ki H Log Footer Design Area FlockWorks BI tools a page edge titled rererence erer Horizontal scroll bar gt s vO Lal K BS Logs pl lt gt lt gt ME Loo Boy 614 182 E a 0125 SN Header x Footer 1 EES Current footer Footer 1 or Footer 2 The log footer can be up to 5 inches in length Use the scroll bars provided at the bottom and along the right side of the footer to view portions of the footer than you cannot currently see 30 Designing Your Logs You may also change the displayed size of the foote
397. th a single depth in the data file 112 Designing Your Logs How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate text listed in a Text Column data tab of the same name and plot it in the Text column at the indicated depth or elevation You might use a Text column to display short notes listing sample numbers or measurements of moisture content or even extended textual listings noting drilling procedures Alternatives Text that is to be associated with lithologic patterns is designed with the Lithology Description column tool Text that is to be plotted vertically is designed with the Vertical Text Column tool Text that is entered with a top and base interval and can be centered over the interval can be displayed in an Interval Text column LogPlot data tab Text columns are linked to data entered into Text Column tabs page 182 How to Create a text column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod ke GE if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Text Column button from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Text Column The pointer will change shape to a Jl for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the text column cursor where you want the left edge of the column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and click the left mous
398. th the selected pattern and colors You may continue to adjust the pattern block settings in the dialog box if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 7 Click Close to close the Pattern Setup window Reposition the Pattern Block See Move or Resize Header Footer Items page 38 for information about dragging resizing and aligning items Review the Pattern Settings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the pattern block right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the pattern block in the View Entity List and choose the Load I tem button Inserting Header Footer Symbols Use The Header Footer Symbol button is used to insert a symbol of your choice into the log header or footer This is typically used to build an index to the symbols that will appear in the body of the log This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands See the Symbol Column page 116 for information about plotting symbols in the body of the log How to Insert a Symbol into the Log Header or Footer 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button Header Footer S if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Header Footer Pattern button akrom the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Symbol The pointer will ch
399. the Minimum Size prompt the size in inches or centimeters for the symbols with the lowest values Type into the Maximum Size prompt the size for the symbols with the highest values listed See the Tadpole data tab for details about how to set up the tadpole values 6 Click on the Grid tab to set up any horizontal and or vertical grid lines for the column See Setting Up Grid Lines page 96 for more information 7 To accept the displayed information click the Apply button You will see the Tadpole column placed in the design screen You may continue to adjust the settings if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied 8 To close the Tadpole Column Setup window click the Close button Review the Settings If you need to access the Options window you can Double click on the Tadpole Column right click on the Tadpole Column and select Edit Entity or find the Tadpole Column in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button Adding an Interval Text Column Use An Interval Text column is used to plot depth related text that is not associated with a lithologic pattern Unlike a regular Text Column whose data is listed with a single depth an Interval Text column has data that is entered with both a top and bottom depth Consequently Interval Text can be centered within the depth intervals and the program can plot dividers between intervals This is commonly used to plot sample numbers types and parameters
400. the left edge of the right edge of the picture 1875 the picture Bottom Check this box e i i i iz it Select Click here to browse WC Wiert Je EE d for the name of the to fill the image to be inserted dimensions Vertical Y coordinate for the bottom of the picture Coordinates are listed in decimal inches or centimeters Units are established under File Page Printer Setup You may change the position of the picture by editing these values or by moving the picture itself on the work screen Remember that the y or vertical coordinates are expressed in coordinates relative to the top of the header or footer Stretch to Fit Insert a check in this box if you want Log Designer to stretch the image to fit in the defined boundaries changing the image s horizontal to vertical ratio Leave this box cleared if the aspect ratio for the image is to be maintained 47 Designing Your Logs 6 To accept the displayed settings click the Apply button You will see the picture displayed on the screen at the declared location and dimensions You may continue to adjust the picture settings in the dialog box if necessary remember to click Apply any time you want your changes applied Click Close to close the Graphic Setup window When you are back at the design window you can reposition and or resize the picture interactively by clicking and dragging the image or by clicking on any of the border handles to resize it Rev
401. the location of the diagonal corner point and release the mouse button As you drag you ll see a rubber band image of the shape s outline You can orient the legend horizontally or vertically and the orientation can be modified in the Options window Once you release the button the pattern legend will be displayed 6 Establish the requested settings 272 Patterns Stratigraphy Lithology or Pattern I ndex File Click on the Settings tab to select the project s existing Lithology table Stratigraphy table or Pattern Index table to be displayed in the legend These files typically use the file name extension TAB See the RockWorks documentation for information about these files Note that these are not Pattern Libraries with a file name extension PAT Instead these are the smaller ASCII tables that reference pattern numbers and display text labels and other information Symbols Symbol Index or Symbol Range File Click on the Settings tab to select the project s existing Symbol Index table or Symbol Range table to be displayed in the legend These files typically use the file name extension TAB See the RockWorks documentation for information about these files Colors Color Index or Color Range File Click on the Settings tab to select the project s existing Color Index table or Color Range table to be displayed in the legend As above these files typically use the file name extension TAB See the RockWorks document
402. the log pages varies e g the log contains a smaller Header 2 or if it doesn t include headers on each page be sure to estimate the optimal number of units per page based on the page displaying the fewest depth units That way it won t be clipped though subsequent pages will have more white space 2 Select the View Custom Page Length command or click the Custom Page button CG 3 Insert a check in the Enable Custom Page Breaks check box In the Depth Units per Page prompt type in the number of depth units to be displayed on each page of your log 5 Click OK and the program will repaginate the log to display the requested number of units on each page If LogView can t fit the requested number of units on the page because of page size header footer size header footer margin etc you may see partial pages If this is the case follow the steps above to reset the number of units to a larger value more log per page and try again Changing the Depth Range of the Log Use the View Select Interval tool to change the starting and or ending depth represented on the current log to display a subset of the entire compiled depth range This does not change the scaling of the log which is defined at compile time and cannot be changed in LogView How to Set the depth range for the log 1 Select the View Select Interval command or click the Custom Interval button tA 2 New Starting Depth Type in the depth at which y
403. there s already a Bitmap column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Bitmap tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Bitmap command to manually insert a Bitmap tab Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Bitmap column in the log design to which this data page is to Entering your Data correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the Bitmap columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab and click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Bitmap tab labeled with the selected name 2 Enter the data as illustrated below L Raster Log Depths at top and base of Name of graphic image to be interval s for picture s displayed in alog you can type in the name or double click to browse See text for more information Name The name displayed on the Bitmap tab is used to match the data to a particular Bitmap column in the log design For example the information entered under the Raster Log Bitmap tab will be plotted in the Bitmap column also named Raster Log This name is declared when you first create the data page above and can be edited using the right click Edit Entity Name command Top Base
404. ties button to access the printer s suite of options Click OK probably several times to return to LogPlot s Page Setup window 3 Back in the LogPlot Page Setup window verify that the printer paper size and printable length and width have been updated in the Printer Info portion of the window 287 Reference If you want to print a continuous log be sure the Printable Length equals the paper length e g no margins The paper length can be as short as 11 for continuous printing as long as there are no top and bottom margins and the full length of each page will be used 4 Update the LogPlot page size based on the current printer settings Click the Set Default Size button 5 If you wish to change the units from inches to centimeters or vice versa click the appropriate radio button This will update the Printer Info top automatically Be sure to click the Set Default Size button again to re compute the new Log Designer page size These units will also be reflected in the ruler at the top of the Log Designer window 6 When the printer and page settings are established to your satisfaction click OK to return to the Settings window Any changes you make here will also be recorded in the Log Designer window and stored with the current LDFX file See also Setting the Log s Page Size page 27 for more information about log pages Your Windows documentation for information about installing printer drivers and see
405. ting Data from LOGPIOT Gebeier E 218 Chapter A et ei Uu Lef YOU Ee Le CN 223 Compiling LOGS age e e de e EE 223 ESEablishing Program e le e EE 223 EECHER LOG we aig ct eee lege este ae dae eth ae Bea bene tease TEE nae mens 223 el eal al Un Le EI ee ee EE EE 225 Quick Compiling Single or Multiple Loge 227 COMPING a Bat EE 229 Chapter 5 Viewing and Manipulating Your Loge 231 KOOVIEW TATKOGUCTION EE 231 Viewing rour LOG PAC CS annann E EE nto wena geet 232 Setting Depth Units per bage cece eee eee eee eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesaneeeee es 232 Changing the Depth Range of Uhelog ee ee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeessanneeeees 233 Viewing Depth Elevation Coordimates 234 SAVNA TOUN EOG HE 234 PEACH OUr Ee e inenen a ocdiand estaatarciest asdeanesciarc nse aac ance eas mene aN eae en aan 235 Opening Accessing a LogView Wimdow eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeaneeeeeenneeeeneas 235 O Demin We NEE 236 Opening a Log with a New Page SIZE cece cece cece eee tees eeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeneneeenaas 237 Opening Log Plot Files using the File Manager 239 EXDOFEING YOU OQ BEE 240 Distributing LPT Files to Your ClGENS EE 248 Chapter 6 Other LOGPIOt Tools ccccccce cece cess sees eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessganeeeteesgaanes 251 EdItINO WT ln ENERE NKA EKENS ETE RT 251 Selecting and e Laien 253 Selecting and e ug Laien ee EE 257 Chapter 7 ere ag el 261 Tele RE 261 Managing Repor EWOrkS E 262 view e Layout RI ele EE 264 DAWNO TOOS RR Te 265 Chapter
406. ting the points Click and hold again and drag to the next vertex location and release the mouse button Now you ll see a closed polygon shape Click and hold and drag again to the next vertex location and release the mouse button Another line segment will be added to the polygon shape Continue in this manner for each polygon vertex To end the polygon either click on the pointer button w or double click the left mouse button Rectangle Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the rectangle is to be placed and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it With the button still pressed in drag to the location of the diagonal corner point and release the mouse button As you drag you ll see a rubber band image of the shape s outline Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the desired shape and size Double click on the drawn item to view adjust its settings or right click on it and choose Properties Select the line style and color and click Apply to enforce these settings For polygons and rectangles you can also choose a fill See the Help messages for details Click Close to close the shape s Options window Resize the item as you wish by clicking on one of the endpoint or vertex handles and dragging Reposition the item as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the item and dragging it to the new location I nserting Text into a ReportWorks Page Use the Text or Text Bl
407. tings If you need to access the Setup window you can Double click on the symbol right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the symbol in the View Entity List and choose the Load Item button Adding Static Header Footer Text Use The Static Text item is used to plot textual labels in the header or footer portion of the log specifically text that is constant from log to log It is frequently used to label columns list the unchanging logging company name or to serve as a label for changing text entries via the Edit Text button It can also be used to insert automatic page numbers well location information and the data in the header or footer using macros This is a fixed design item with no corresponding data file commands Restrictions You may include a virtually unlimited number of Static Text items in the header or footer The Static Text labels can be up to 120 characters in length including Spaces They can occupy a single line only wrapping will not occur If you need multi line text see Static Header Footer Notes next Design file example s All of the sample LDFX files that were shipped with the program contain examples of Static Text entries many of them are used as column labels The file Enviro geotech4 ldfx illustrates the use of Static Text items in a slightly different way as labels for changing Edit Text Entries discussed in another topic In the excerpt Shown below the labels PROJ ECT NUM
408. tion text be plotted Other description options include automatic offset of the text upward or downward to use available space and user selected line contact line styles In addition if there is a Lithology Pattern Column with the same name it will plot there any associated keyword patterns Alternatives There are a couple of other types of text related columns you can also choose from Text Columns are used to plot general text that is not to be linked with lithology patterns This text is entered with a single depth only at the top of the interval is not bounded by contact lines and cannot be automatically offset Interval Text columns are also used to plot general text that is not linked with lithology patterns This text is entered with a top and base depth can be separated by divider lines and can be centered within the depth interval if desired It is not required that each Lithology Description Column have an associated Pattern Column LogPlot data tab Lithology descriptions are linked to data entered into a Lithology tab page 166 How to Create a Lithology Description Column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button is Log Body eee 3 Select the Lithology Description button from the tool pane El Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Lithology Description Column if necessary to display the log b
409. tions in the Paper Size list To change orientation click the Landscape or Portrait button as appropriate Note Do not select Landscape paper orientation if you wish to plot in banner mode on a continuous paper printer Other printer settings can be accessed using the Properties button Click OK in the Print Setup dialog box to return to the Log Designer page setup window Back at the Log Designer Page Setup window note that there will be updated page dimensions and printable length and width dimensions if you made any of the changes listed above In the bottom portion of the dialog box you will see the current length and width dimensions for your log page If any of the dimensions are shown in red then they exceed the available dimensions for the page as shown at the top of the window 28 Designing Your Logs 3 To re calculate the LogPlot page size based on the current printer click the Set Default Size button 4 If you wish to change the units from inches to centimeters or vice versa click the appropriate radio button This will update the Printer Info top automatically Be sure to click the Set Default Size button again to re computer the new Log Designer page size The units that you select here will also determine the units of the ruler displayed at the top of the Log Designer window 5 When the printer and page settings are established to your satisfaction click OK to return to the Log Designer window The prog
410. tline Color KS Fill Type C Yalue Based Color m CR Minimum Value Color Maximum Value Color Column Border Insert a check here if the Bar Graph column itself is to be bounded by a solid line rectangle Column Fill Color Insert a check here if the background portion of the column is to be filled with color Compare the examples below 15 e E Column Fil Color M Column Fill Color Bar Outline Color Click on the color box to select the color for the bounding outline of each bar Fill Type Choose Single Color if you want the bars to be filled with a pattern or solid of a single color Select the pattern to be used to fill the bars by clicking in one of the pattern boxes and choose the fill color Click in the Value Based Color button to create a gradient of solid color within the column Use the color boxes to select a color for the minimum and maximum data values within the column Set up grid lines value and depth See page 96 for more information 110 Designing Your Logs Adding a Bar Graph Value Column Use A Bar Graph Value column is used to plot text labels representing data values usually in association with a Bar Graph_column How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate data in Interval Data tab or Multi nterval Data data sheets and it will plot the numeric values as textual labels in the Bar Graph Value column of the same name This can pull val
411. to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod kd GE if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Well Construction button m from the tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Log Body Items Well Construction Column The pointer will change shape to a Ji for placing the column on the design screen 121 Designing Your Logs 4 Place the cursor where you want the left edge of the Well Construction column to be in the log body portion of the design screen and press the left mouse button to place it 5 Click on the Main tab to establish name and location information 122 Well Construction Setup Main Captions Hame well Column Position Left E679 Aight 7 875 Options Max Boring Diameter 12 jw Border around column Name Enter the name for this Well Construction column As you compile your log if LogPlot finds a Well Column data tab with the same name it will plot pattern filled intervals representing the construction materials in that Column on the log The name can be up to 60 characters in length including spaces Position These coordinates determine the horizontal placement of the Well Construction column in the body of the log The horizontal coordinates are expressed in decimal inches or centimeters relative to the left edge of the design screen You may change the column s position by editing these values or by widening narrowing the column i
412. to the same value for their shared sides The right edge of this column and the left edge of this share the same horizontal coordinate Shifting Log Body I tems To shift all of the items in the log body by the same amount to the left or to the right follow these steps 1 Select the Shift Body Items command from the Edit menu The program will display this dialog box 74 Designing Your Logs Shift Log Body Items shift is entered in decimal inches or o hikt centimeters Positive values will shift items to the right and negative values will shift items to the left Enter the X horizontal shift in decimal inches or centimeters for all of the log body items You might use this shift all tool to move items to the right to increase your left page margin for example Choose OK to move the log body items the indicated amount or choose Cancel to cancel the operation Remember that the horizontal range of the log design depends on the default printer and page size File menu Page Print Setup command The Shift Body Items command is not affected by any snapping settings you may have established Cut paste or copy paste log body items To cut or copy items in the log boxy and then paste them follow these steps L Click on the item s in the log body to be cut or copied It should appear with handles on either end if it is a line or on all four corners all other body columns See Selecting I
413. to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Fillbar tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on the log design information Manual Select the Data New Data Item Fillbar command to manually insert a Fillbar tab 159 Entering Your Data 2 160 Entity Name In the displayed window click on the down arrow to the right and select the name of the Fillbar column in the log design to which this data page is to correspond In this list the program will show the names of all of the Fillbar columns in the current log design Or just type in a name for the tab Click OK The program will add to the data sheet a Fillbar tab labeled with the selected name Enter the fillbar information as shown below This example is from the sample file mudlog1 dat Fillbar column identifier to match the column name in the log design Cores Shows 16750 16780 16752 16768 good 16 z2 16840 16769 16780 Fair 16750 16758 trace 16620 16826 good 16826 16838 Fair Depths at top and base of intervals for Cores column 16828 16658 trace Depths at top and base of intervals for Shows column Fill keywords detemine horizontal extent of the fill Name The name displayed on the data tab is used to match the data to a particular Fillbar column in the log design This name is declared when you first create
414. tonite 15 25 6 0 3 0 sand pack 25 26 6 0 3 0 cap Cap at 25 Curve Bar Graph and Cross Plot Curve columns can be set to be scaled automatically based on the data range Any linked header footer legends will be updated accordingly This is handy for imported data such as from LAS files Heutron LS Photog bectrica 45 0 NPHI 450 00 FEF 10 0 Introduction Curve columns can be linked to a user defined scale table whereby specific depth range s can have a different minimum maximum left right or right left scale Enter comments into Lithology Descriptions for placement at a specific depth simply by leaving the base depth blank Description TOPSOIL Lithology Description up to 2000 Character S s o er TOPSOIL SANDY SILT Tan loose and damp 1 5 4 SANDY SILT Tan loose and damp HNU 12 ppm 2 2 HNU 12ppm 4 Gasoline odor 5 4 7 5 CLAY AND SI Dark green brown phyllitic wet Gasoline odor 7 5 10 SAND White poorly cemented wet Base depth amp keyword CLAY AND SILT Dark green brown are left blank Description pe Se text is plotted below defined Top depth 4 SAND White poorly cemented wet Introduction Background fill is available for Bar Graph columns SE GN EN w Column Fill Color M Column Fill Color Edit and Static text offer left center right top and bottom alignment with transparent or opaque backgrounds Log Design entities have resize handl
415. tself on the work screen see Moving and Resizing Log Body Components page 72 Maximum Boring Diameter Enter here the real diameter of the drill hole in any units you wish An entry of 12 for example could represent 12 inches Or an entry of 30 could represent 30 centimeters This setting will not affect the actual width of the column on the log you adjust that yourself just like all of the other log body columns It will determine the width of the casing screens and other intervals that will be plotted within the column These items are all listed within the data file with outer and inner diameter measurements relative to this Maximum Boring Diameter Designing Your Logs Maximum Boring Diameter established in Log Designer let s say mi br Each of the construction materials is listed in the data file with an inside and outside In this i Ti example diameter ng the thie grasal ihe Masum KE interval is Boring K listed in Di t TEN the data iii Sa file with ZE an outer d diameter At of 10 and Sr and inner diameter of 6 Border Around Column Insert a check in this box if you want the Well Construction column to include a solid line border 6 Click on the Captions tab to set up any Well Construction captions New Diagram 60 Caption 40 Diagram Caption Iw Flot Leader Lines i i Iw Arrows Plot Labels Insert a check here to plot any captions that you ve listed in
416. tuart 6 02 93 to 6 03 93 motes One hot dusty i Edit Text item name Text to plot in header or footer to match the field Type in or double click name in the log design Entity Name The names displayed in this column are used to match the text items to a particular Edit Text entity in the log design For example the text on the row labeled project will be plotted in the Edit Text item named project in the log s design This name is declared when you first add the Edit Text item above and can be edited using the Edit Edit Entity Name command Text In this column you enter the text to be plotted The text can be up to 120 characters including spaces You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row within the Edit Text tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Fillbar Tab Use The Fillbar tab is used to enter depth intervals at which vertical pattern bars will be plotted on the log These may represent sampling intervals coring or qualitative information poor show or trace Corresponding log design component Data declared with this command will be plotted on the log in the Fillbar Column of the same name page 118 How to enter the Fillbar data 1 To add anew Fillbar tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Fillbar column in the current log design
417. ty Listing window displayed on the screen use the scroll bar on the right side of the list box if necessary to see the current list The items are initially sorted by their Name field You can sort on a different column simply by clicking on that column heading Some examples e You can see a listing of all Curve entities by clicking on the Entity Type column heading e You can see a listing of all of the items in Header 2 by clicking on the Location column heading e You can see a listing of all of the items along the left edge of the design by clicking on the Left column heading 2 Choose the Close button to return to the Log Designer screen View Modify the Settings for the Currently Selected I tem L With the Entity Listing window displayed on the screen use your mouse to select an item within the entity listing When selected the item will appear in highlighted colors Select the Edit button to see the settings for the currently highlighted item Make any changes to the settings that you wish to make and click the Apply button to apply the changes 4 Click the Close button to close the item s Setup dialog box You will be returned to the Entity List window Delete the Currently Selected I tem L With the Entity Listing window displayed on the screen use your mouse to select an item within the entity listing it will appear in highlighted colors 2 Select the Delete button to remove it from the log design entirely T
418. u will see the usage time meter on the startup screen Trialware mode can be converted to a Single User license by entering a RockWare supplied unlocking code Trialware mode can also be extended if you contact RockWare 3 Click Continue when the user and license type have been selected The program will now copy sample and system files to a LogPlot 7 folder in My Documents It will also initialize all of the program s variables Single User Running in Trial Mode and Unlocking Single Users will now see a window that displays the number of user sessions and days remaining Le Welcome to LogPlot a Eg LogPlot 7 C Copyright 1983 2007 by Rack Vare incorporated Revision 70 0 17 Single User Trial Version Remaining Days 0 Used 0 of 10 Days Remaining Sessions 4 Used 1 of 25 Sescions m Unlock Trial Version Extend Taal Penod L Skip this menu the next time the program is executed la To use LogPlot in Trial mode click the OK button See Starting Up page 12 10 Introduction lb Or if you are ready to license your program or if your trial period displays as expired you can unlock the software by clicking on the Unlock Trial Version button and entering the following information PLEASE BE SURE that to unlock the program you are the end user and are logged into Windows under your normal Windows login Registration Number Type into this field the letters and numbers that are pri
419. udo cross section etc The LogView portion of LogPlot is available as a free viewer that you can distribute to your co workers and clients so that they can open your graphic logs See RockWare s web site for details Viewing Your Log Pages LogView displays a single log page at a time on the screen Use these instructions to view the current page and to display different pages of a multi page log If you need to make a change in any of the data that was compiled into the log you ll need to return to the Data Editor make the necessary changes and recompile the log You cannot make data changes to the plot file displayed in the View window How to View the current page The current page number is always displayed at the bottom of the LogView window Page 1 of 1 Page 4 of 11 etc 1 To view portions of the current page that are not visible drag the scroll bars along the side and bottom of the Log View window to change the display area 2 You can also drag the LogView window boundaries to make the window larger or smaller to view specific portions of the log Move to different pages If your log occupies more than one page you can use the Page commands in the View menu to view different pages of your log 1 To advance to the next page of the plot select the View Page Down command Or click the Page Down button if or press the PgDn key 2 To back track to the previous of the plot select the View Page Up command Or
420. ues from the same data listing as an associated Bar Graph column The labels may be left or right justified Opaque or transparent Alternatives If you wish to display the values in a graphic manner you can use a Bar Graph column The new Interval Text column behaves similarly to this Bar Graph Value column with additional formatting options LogPlot data tab Bar Graph Value columns are linked to data entered into an Interval Data tab page 164 or Multi Ilnterval Data tab page 171 How to Create a Bar Graph Value column in a log design 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 Inthe toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Log Body Tool Button Log Bod ke See if necessary to display the log body buttons 3 Select the Bar Graph Value button i the tool pane or command from the Tools Log Body Items menu The pointer will change shape for placing the column on the design screen 4 Place the Bar Graph Value cursor where you want to position the left edge of the column and click the left mouse button 5 Enter the setup information Bareraph Value Setup Position Left 31373 Right 3 875 Options R Decimals Font ZZ D Text Alignment Left e Right W Opaque Test background Draw Column Outline 111 Designing Your Logs Name Click the arrow to the right of this prompt to select the name of the existing Bar Graph column in the design to which this column is to be associate
421. unched with a specific data dat file name to load using command line parameters Taking this one step further the program can also be started with a whole batch of things to be done data to load settings to establish log to compile display save and export via command line batch See Running LogPlot with Command Line Parameters page 301 13 Introduction Changing the Licensing Removing the Licensing Changing the Licensing If you wish to change the type of license under which LogPlot is being run follow these steps Contact RockWare to make the necessary arrangements Start up LogPlot On the Welcome to LogPlot startup screen click on the Change License Type button SCT toe ee Read the terms of the license agreement as necessary If you agree to the terms click in the Agree checkbox at the bottom This will launch the LogPlot licensing program and display the screens described in Licensing LogPlot Removing the Licensing If you wish to move the license from a particular computer to move it to another computer follow these steps 1 Start up LogPlot 2 Click on the Change License Type button on the initial Welcome to LogPlot startup screen 3 Read the terms of the license agreement as necessary If you agree to the terms click in the I Agree checkbox at the bottom In the Licensing LogPlot window choose the Remove option and click Continue 5 The program will prompt you to confirm that thi
422. ur printer actually supports 238 Viewing and Manipulating Your Logs In the example at the top of this page you could type in 28 for the page length to accommodate your 2 5 page log onto a single virtual page Fage Setup Printer Into Epson Stylus Photo 1270 ESC P 2 Page 11 00 x 6 50 Printer settings Printable Length 11 00 Printable Width 8 27 Es Page Settings Units Log s Length Width ne page 1 8 2667 settings O CM s Set Default Size Page Settings 3 Length Width Type ina new page AH 8 2667 length here Set Default Size Note that the page length is now shown in red since it no longer matches the printer page size 6 Click OK to accept your changes If you have overridden the page size to trick LogView into using a long page as in the example in 5 the program will warn you that the page is too long for your printer asking you whether you wish to fix this 7 Click No The program will plot the log on the screen using the new settings You may use the scroll bars on the side of the View window to view hidden portions of this page or you can advance to subsequent pages of the log if any The current page and total number of pages is displayed in the Reference Bar at the bottom of the View window It s very important to note that any changes you make to the printer and or page settings during this process are now the default printer settings throughout the LogPlot program and
423. urrently stored as default for the Compile settings 10 Click OK to proceed The program will store the store the current page of the log or the entire log as requested on disk in a JPEG format This JPG file can then be opened in other graphics applications inserted into word processing documents etc Note that you cannot open the J PEG version of the log within LogPlot Export Logs as PNG This export tool exports the current log page or the entire log NEW to a PNG format 1 Be sure the log that you wish to export is displayed in the active LogView window 2 If you will be exporting a single page only advance to the page you wish to export as necessary by clicking the Page Down Page Up or Go To Page buttons in the View window toolbar 3 Select the Export command from the View window s File menu Select the PNG option 5 Filename Click on the Open button E the right edge of the prompt to enter the name to assign to the exported file accessing other folders or drives as necessary Click OK to return to the export dialog box The program will append the appropriate file name extension PNG automatically 6 Pixels lInch In this prompt type in the number of pixels you want per horizontal and vertical inch of the PNG image For display on screen the default settings of 96 your screen pixels per inch should work fine For print output you should enter a greater value The resolution will affect the output file size
424. utton Header Footer S if necessary to display the header footer design buttons 3 Select the Header Footer Pattern button E the Log Designer tool pane Or you can use the menus Tools Header Footer Items Pattern The pointer will change shape to a Ir Now it s time to place the block 4 Place the cursor where you want the upper left corner of the pattern block to be in the header or footer portion of the design screen and click the left button The program will display the Header Footer Pattern Setup window 5 Enter the requested settings 48 Designing Your Logs Select To select the pattern to be displayed in the header or footer block click on the Select button or just click on the pattern block in the middle of the window The program will display the Select Pattern window To choose a pattern for the block simply click on one of the displayed patterns You may use the scroll bars as necessary to view additional patterns The pattern you have selected will be displayed in the preview box at the top of the window and its index number will be shown in the upper left part of the window To adjust the density at which the pattern is to be displayed in the header block click on the up or down arrow labeled Density The pattern preview will be updated to reflect the density changes The greater the value the less dense the pattern Select a foreground and background color for the pattern design by clicking on the
425. vate Snapping to the grid If activated when you place a log design entity in the header footer or log body the program will snap the item to the nearest grid point This can make life a little easier when trying to line up design entities Note that you can always override the Snapped coordinates by entering new coordinates in the item s setup dialog box How to Turn on the reference grid Click on the Show Grid button at the bottom of the design screen Hae 2 0 125 d Adjust the resolution of the grid by clicking on the up arrow or down arrow button in the resolution box to the right of the Show Grid button The units are decimal inches or centimeters as defined in the File Page Printer Setup option 35 Designing Your Logs A setting of 0 125 as shown in the example above means that the dots will be displayed horizontally and vertically every 1 8th of an inch 3 As you change the resolution setting notice how the appearance of the grid changes within the Log Designer screen The resolution setting is shared by the Snap button below if activated It is possible to turn on the grid while leaving the snapping off Turn on snapping L Click on the Snap button at the bottom of the design screen Snapping is activated when the button looks like it is pushed in CH 2 0125 M Adjust the snapping resolution by clicking on the up arrow or down arrow button in the resolution box to the right of the
426. vation on page 189 Comments In this scrolling text box you can enter reference information about the data file This is typically used to list the names of log formats keywords patterns and or symbols that correspond to the data file and to note the vertical scale at which the log should be compiled These comments are not required If you are opening into LogPlot 7 a data file that you used in LogPlot98 or LogPlot v 1 the program will display in this window any comments that were flagged with a colon S See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Bitmap Tab Use The Bitmap tab is used to specify the name of a graphic image in BMP JPG TIFF WMF EMF PNG TGA PCX format and the beginning and ending depth at which it should be plotted in the Bitmap column in the body of the log This can be a nifty way to place in a log a bitmapped picture of core samples fossils raster log or other graphic images Multiple bitmaps may be plotted in a single column Bitmaps in the header or footer of the log logos etc are inserted into the log design itself See Header Footer Pictures page 46 Corresponding log design component Data entered into the Bitmap tab will be plotted within the Bitmap column page 119 of the same name if any How to Enter the Bitmap Data L 152 To add a new Bitmap tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If
427. ve the check mark Or right click in the File Manager pane and choose Hide Displaying the pane Select the Window Show File Manager option in the main LogPlot menu to remove the check mark Widening narrowing the pane Use your mouse to grab the right edge of the File Manager pane and drag it to the left or right to make the pane smaller or larger Introduction eas mith Project HE Smith Project H 4 LogDesign Idfs dF Sax Logs fott Opening a Project Folder into the File Manager 1 Click on the open folder button Eat the top of the file manager pane 2 Browse to the folder where the LogPlot files are stored selecting the folder by clicking on it and clicking OK The program will display all DAT LDFX LDF LPT and RockWorks boreholes that are contained in the folder A LogPot7 S Fie Edit Data Log Tools Options Window Help Active project folder CXSmithProect Design borehole log idfx 3 Data Editor i Data dat ss DH det El Consistency Organic Vapor CGI LogPlot data files DAT 7 BH2 dat SETU E TEXT Samples Sampling Mel BH4 dat J7 BH8 dat i7 BH9 dat RockWorks borehole records from MDB Comments ast Modified 2 20 2007 Suggested design file borehole log dt field borehole log Log Design files LDFX and LDF Suggested vertical scaling 2 5 unitsjinch continuous no Use LogPlot key Boch pl pat Log Plot f
428. ve values check this box 3 Click here to generate a text report of the curve names units and values for your reference Entering your Data First check whether LogPlot has encountered a null value in the data file This will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen The null value is used in the LAS file to note no data entries If the null value is numeric such as 999 25 then you ll want to exclude them from the data summary Insert a check in the Ignore check box to be sure the null value is not included in the next step Click the Scan for Min Max Values to view a summary of the elog ranges excluding any null value The program will display these values in the Min and Max columns in the window This information can be very handy in knowing how to scale the curve column in the log It is also required if you want to build an automatic log design in the A screen of the import wizard 3 6 If you would like a text listing of the curve names along with the minimum and maximum data values and the measurement units click the Report button This text listing can be Saved copied or printed from the text window Select the curves you wish to import by inserting a check mark next to their names The check marks are toggle marks clicking in a checked box removes the check mark and clicking in an un checked box inserts a mark You may select up to 40 curves Use the All or None
429. w you can Double click on the Scale Bar in the body of the log right click on the Scale Bar and select Edit Entity or find the Scale Bar item in the View Entity List and choose the Edit button 89 Designing Your Logs Adding a Curve Column Use A Curve Column is used to plot quantitative data as a point to point curve LogPlot offers a variety of ways to display this curve filled with symbols as a block curve etc How it works As you compile your log in LogPlot the program will locate data listed on a Curve page 155 or Multi Curve data tab and will plot the data in the Curve Column of the Same name For example data contained in a Curve data tab named Gamma would plot into a curve column also named Gamma The data may be plotted from left to right or right to left linear or logarithmic scale with or without horizontal or vertical reference grids You may vary the line color thickness and style for the curve The curves may be filled with a solid color if desired Curves can wrap and can include symbols at the inflection points You may include automatic value labels at regular intervals down the log You can overlay any number of Curve Columns on top of each other Each Curve Column on the log must have a separate Curve tab in the data file or a separate column listing within a Multi Curve tab New e You can plot specific depth intervals of a single curve at different min max scales with a user defined Scale T
430. window you can Double click on the text item right click on the item and select Edit Entity or find the Static Notes item in the View Entity List and choose the Load I tem button Adding Editable Header Footer Notes Use The Header Footer Edit Notes item displays multi line wrapping text in the log header or footer The text to be plotted is entered into the data file for text that will change from log to log such as drilling notes well descriptions etc You might think of Edit Notes as expanded Edit Text labels If you want to enter non changing notes use the Static Notes item How it works When LogPlot compiles your data into the log design it will look in the data file for a Notes tab page 157 with the same name as the Edit Notes item in the design If it finds a match then the Notes in the data file will be plotted in the designated location If it does not find a Notes tab in the data file no text will be displayed though the notes block itself will if outlined with a border or filled with a solid color Restrictions There s no limit to the number of Notes entities you can include in your log design Each Notes item can be comprised of up to 2000 characters in length including Spaces How to Add editable header footer notes 1 Access the Log Designer window 2 In the toolbar pane to the left of the design window click the Header Footer Tool Button Header F ooter S if necessary to display the header footer
431. within the Text Column The program will honor hard carriage returns noting them with characters and leading spaces Shortcut Rather than typing in the text description you can double click on the text cell to bring up the Description Editor window 183 Entering Your Data You can use the lt Tab gt key to advance from cell to cell and from the end of a row to the next row in the tab See also the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Vertical Text Tab Use The Vertical Text tab is used to enter text and the depth intervals between which it is to be plotted in a Vertical Text column on the log This is often done in logs to note stratigraphic groupings or geologic time divisions Regular horizontal text is entered using the Text Column tab or with the Interval Data tab for Interval Text Columns Corresponding log design component Text listed in this tab will be plotted on the log within the Vertical Text column page 115 of the same name How to enter the Vertical Text data I 184 To add a new Vertical Text tab to the current data file you have two choices Automatic If there s already a Vertical Text column in the current log design to which you ll be linking the data you can use the Data Update Data Template from Log Design tool to insert a new Vertical Text tab in the current data file The program will know how to name the tab based on
432. word Editor 1 Select the Keyword Editor button prom the Data Editor or Log Design toolbar Or you can select the Tools menu s Keyword Editor command The program will display the Keyword Editor window and it will load the default Keyword File Keyword Attribute Editor C Documents and Settings user bis Doc Keyword Listing Adularia A Albitized Alluvium Edit Andesite Anhydrite Delete Anhydritic Dolostone Archimides Find Arenaceous Dolostone Arenaceous Limestone Arenaceous Shale Argillaceous ae Argillaceous Dolostone Index 10 Density 6 0 Argillaceous Limestone AE oy a Argillaceous Sandstone Fill Width 100 Ka are Araillite Plot Border Argillized Ash a ao Asphalt Backfill ba The default Keyword File is named LogPlot key but you can open a different table edit this one and save it under a new name etc 251 Other LogPlot Tools Access the Keyword Editor from a Lithology Well Construction or Fillbar tab 1 Access a Data Editor window 2 Click on a Lithology tab a Well Column tab or a Fillbar tab to bring it to the front 3 Double click in a cell in the Lithology column in the Lithology tab in the Material column in the Well Column tab or in the Fill column of the Fill Bar tab The program will display the Lithology Selector window where the current keywords are displayed 520 650 Lithology Base Lithology Contact Descr
433. yet your actual data starts at 2500 and extends to 3000 the program will not plot any data in the compiled log Be sure the Top Bottom settings are inclusive of the actual data If no data is being displayed at all in the compiled log check also If your depths are entered as negative values you must be sure the Positive Depths box is not checked This is displayed in the Options Log Settings dialog and also in the Compile a Log window If your depths are entered as positive values be sure the Positive Depths box is checked 290 Reference Edit Text Problems If your Edit Text items in the log header or footer are being cut off remember that there is a 60 character limit and the fields do not wrap onto a lower line If you need a two line entry you need to create two separate Edit Text items with different names Or you can use the Static Notes or Edit Notes items for multi line paragraphs Printing Tips Epson Tips To print continuous logs using the Epson Stylus 1500 amp 1520 1 Access the Log Designer window by clicking the Log Designer tab in the main program window Select the File Page Printer Setup option in the Log Designer window 3 Select the Epson Stylus 1500 or 1520 printer driver from the list of available printers Note This assumes that the Epson supplied Windows driver has already been installed on your computer 4 Do not select the paper size source or orientation from the initial Print
434. you can open a saved plot LPT file by clicking the LogView window s File Open command Access an existing LogView window 1 To access an existing Log View window in which a log is already displayed click on the Window menu in the main LogPlot toolbar Displayed in this menu will be the names of the current LogView windows 2 Click on the name of the window you wish to access The program will bring that window to the foreground Opening a Log If you have saved a log plot on disk as an LPT file it is possible to re open it into a LogView window for viewing exporting and printing Because scaling page size and paper orientation are stored in the LPT file these files should look the same when re opened as they did when originally created However if you have a different printer now set as default or are opening the LPT file on a different computer presumably with a different printer you may see a warning that the page size has changed Follow the instructions under the Update Page Size topic below Because of this different file structure LogPlot 7 cannot open LPT files created in LogPlot98 or earlier versions of the program It does open LPT files saved in LogPlot2005 LogPlot2003 and LogPlot2001 How to Open an existing LPT file 1 Access a LogView window if necessary 2 Select the Open button _ from the toolbar or the Open command from the LogView File menu 3 Select the log plot LPT file that y
435. you enter the quantitative values measured at the indicated depths to be represented on the log as a curve Entering your Data If there is no data for a depth you may note this with a non numeric entry such as ND or you may leave the interval blank If the curve is to be plotted as a line the line will be broken where there is no data If the curve is to be plotted as a filled curve then the no data entries will simply be ignored Shortcut If you already have this quantitative data in a tabular format in another application you can copy the data there and then paste it into the Curve tab using the Edit Paste command See also Importing Data page 206 and the program Help messages Help Contents Entering Your Data for more information Edit Notes Tab Use The Edit Notes tab is used to enter text to be displayed in an Edit Notes entity in the log header or footer This is text that uses WYSIWYG wrapping carriage returns margins border fill and alignment Such Edit Notes might be used to enter detailed comments about the current well Corresponding log design component Text listed in this tab will be plotted on the log within the Edit Notes item of the same name See page 62 Restrictions Each Notes entry is limited to 2048 characters How to Enter the Notes 1 To add anew Notes tab to the current data file or a new Notes entry to an existing tab you have two choices Automatic If there s alrea
436. you start the LogPlot program Si LogPtot 7 BEZ De CO Data Log Took Options Widow ep Saith Project el LH Desen beekuke ling ks Si Data Untitled Amih Dech a a BN Daa Fda t Aockworks D I E Samping Method Sample Number EI Postume El Consistency E Cal sl lithology vi GE Liesen aM SETUP El oroanic vapor Hewer ii sampes Mwe coumg i g Loge ipi pea 2 E oO 200 oO oO 0 Comments Row 1 MODIFIED d gt i 250 per 1 SINGLE 8 17 e 10 67 Ce Senth Project borethote kag its In this Editor e You can create new data files by typing in or cut and pasting information e You can open existing data files created in LogPlot 7 LogPlot2005 LogPlot2003 LogPlot2001 LogPlot98 LogPlot97 or LogPlot v 1 e You can make changes and additions to any data files e You can create a blank data template for any log design and update an existing data file for design changes e You can import data from RockWorks Excel LAS DBF and text files e You can export data from LogPlot to Excel or LAS format You can export to RockWorks borehole format using a free stand alone program 135 Entering Your Data The LogPlot Data Editor displays different blocks of data lithology descriptions curve listings etc in tabbed data pages where you can type point and click or cut and paste the information Throughout this documentation we refer to these data pages as tabs Access
437. ype in the name for the file accessing other drives or directories as necessary Choose the OK button The program will save the data in the current Editor window on disk Print a Data File You may output the data contained in the Editor window to your printer using the Printer Font and Print commands Data Editor s File menu To print the plotted log diagram use the View window s Print command To print the data file follow these steps L 2 146 Click in the Data Editor window that contains the file you want to print Select the Page Printer Setup command from the File menu This command is used to establish the type of printer you are using It s also used to define the paper size for your log which won t affect data printing In the upper Printer Info section of the window be sure the active printer that s listed is the one to which you wish to send the data print job To change the printer click on the Printers button and the program will display a dialog box with a pop up list box containing the printers that are currently installed within Windows You may select the printer you wish to use The Options button will display additional printer configuration dialog boxes for the selected printer Many of these options will also be used during log compiling to establish page size See your Windows documentation for information about installing printer drivers and see your printer s documentation regarding
438. yword characteristics e Keywords may be single words or multiple words e Keywords may be up to 60 characters in length including spaces e Keywords will be sorted alphabetically within the editor e Keyword matching is NOT case sensitive This means that an entry of Limestone in the data file will match with an entry of Limestone LIMESTONE or limestone in the keyword file See the LogPlot Help messages Help Contents Other LogPlot Tools Editing Keywords for information about the following additional keywords topics Search for keywords Create new keywords Editing keywords Delete keywords Open a different keyword file Save keyword changes or cancel without saving Save the keyword file under a new name s Combine keyword files Import keyword files from RockWorks or older versions of LogPlot Export keywords to RockWorks Select Patterns for keywords Selecting and Editing Patterns The Select Pattern Window The Select Pattern window is displayed e Inthe Keyword Editor when you click the Pattern button or the pattern picture e When you select the Tools Pattern Editor option This window is used to select the pattern s appearance for the current keyword pattern design density colors and line thickness It is also used to manage the Pattern file save changes open a different file to create a printable index of the patterns and to access the pattern editor 253 Other LogP

LogPlot TM User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents